Epc Full Product Catalog 2019

Industrial Encoders &
Accessories Catalog
Issue No. 8
50th Anniversary Edition
encoder.com
ENCODER SOLUTIONS THAT JUST MAKE SENSE.
Company History Solving Problems
Encoder Products Company, Inc. is a leading designer and world-wide We believe that an encoder supplier should solve problems, not cause
manufacturer of motion sensing devices. Founded in 1969 by William Watt, them. Since 1969, we have been solving encoder problems with our custom
EPC began operations with a small line of custom encoders. Today, EPC's designs, faster delivery, and reliable products – which set us apart from the
popular Accu-Coder™ brand is the most complete line of incremental and competition.
absolute shaft encoders in the industry. Our core philosophy is that each and
every customer deserves quality products, superior customer service, and Custom Encoders Our Specialty
expert support. Through years of experience, we understand that each industrial environment
is different and that you need an encoder that fits your specific situation.
Business Partnerships Ultimately, this means not having to make due with someone else’s
Fostering long-term business partnerships with satisfied customers is what we specifications or configurations, but having your own custom designed unit.
do best, and is at the heart of our mission. We take pride in providing superior Many of our customers have come to depend on us for this special area of
customer service and supplying our customers with encoders that function customization, because we can design and deliver custom encoders faster
precisely, dependably, and flawlessly. Listening to our customers needs, and than most suppliers’ standard products; standard delivery time for most
designing products that provide solutions for them, is a key to our success. products is just 4 to 6 days business days, and we offer same-day expedite
options on many products.
Setting the Standard
At EPC, we concentrate on encoders, and we have a long list of “firsts” to our ISO 9001 Quality Systems
name. At EPC, quality is designed into every product. Before it's offered for sale,
• First to design the cube style encoder, now an industry standard. each new Accu-Coder™ model is fully tested against EPC's exacting quality
standards. But quality doesn’t stop at design: during the manufacturing
• First to resolve mounting installation problems by providing a flexible- process, each Accu-Coder™ is subjected to a series of stringent quality control
mounting system. tests to ensure you are receiving the best encoder available. Our quality
• First to include Opto-ASIC technology, which virtually eliminates system has successfully been audited to the requirements of ISO 9001:2015,
miscounts by eliminating electrical noise and enhancing signal quality. an internationally recognized standard for comprehensive Quality Systems. By
paying close attention to detail, our Accu-Coder™ brand has become known
• First to provide an encoder that operates at 120° C. throughout the industry for quality and reliability.
• First to provide 6000 CPR in a 1.5" diameter encoder.
• First to provide a 3 year standard warranty because we stand proudly
behind the reliability of each of our products.
We will continue to do what we do best so that you can have the very best
encoder for the job.
800.366.5412 | www.encoder.com
EPC’s world headquarters in Sagle, Idaho.

Table of Contents
Quick Selection Guide................................................................2

Encoder Basics...........................................................................6
Typical Usage.............................................................................7
Encoder Selection Considerations.............................................8
A b s o lu t e E n c o d e r s S ta i n l e s s S t e e l E n c o d e r s
Model A58HE EtherCAT®...........................................................10 Model 802S................................................................................100
Model A58SE EtherCAT®............................................................12 Model 858S................................................................................102
Model A36HB.............................................................................14 Model 865T................................................................................104
Model A36SB.............................................................................16
Model A58HB.............................................................................18
Model A25SB.............................................................................20
Model 925..................................................................................22 i n c r e m e n ta l m o d u l e
Model 960..................................................................................24 and Modular encoders
Model 30M................................................................................106
Model 30MT..............................................................................108
L i n e a r M e a s u r e m e n t S o lu t i o n S Model 121..................................................................................112
Model TR1..................................................................................28
Model TR2..................................................................................30
Model TR3..................................................................................32 Accessories
Model LCE..................................................................................36
RX/TXD Converter/Repeater/Splitter (DIN Rail Mounted)........116
RX/TX Converter........................................................................118
RX/TX Repeater..........................................................................119
I n c r e m e n ta l T h r u-B o r e a n d RX/TX Splitter.............................................................................120
Encoder Power Supply...............................................................121
M oto r M o u n t E n c o d e r s Programmable Encoder Accessories.........................................121
Model 15T/H..............................................................................40 Connectors & Cables..................................................................122
Model 755A...............................................................................44 Bore/Shaft Accessories..............................................................123
Model 260..................................................................................46 Mounting Brackets & Options...................................................124
Model 225A/Q...........................................................................50 Motor Kits/Covers/Gasket Kits..................................................125
Model 25T/H..............................................................................52 Tru-Trac™ and Linear Encoder Accessories...............................125
Model 58TP/HP PROGRAMMABLE............................................54 Measuring Wheels.....................................................................127
Model 58TF/HF..........................................................................58
Model 775..................................................................................60
Model 776..................................................................................62
Model 770..................................................................................66 T e c h n i c a l I n f o r mat i o n
Model 771..................................................................................68
Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams.....................................129
Quadrature Phasing and Index Gating Options.........................130
Waveform Diagrams..................................................................132
Ordering/Technical Support......................................................134
I n c r e m e n ta l S h a f t E n c o d e r s Warranty/Returns/Repairs........................................................135
Model 711..................................................................................70 IP Ratings and Sealing Options..................................................137
Model 715..................................................................................72 CE Option/Cable Considerations...............................................138
Model 716..................................................................................74 Glossary......................................................................................139
Cube Housings...........................................................................76
Model 15S..................................................................................78
Model 755A...............................................................................82
Model 702..................................................................................84
Model 25SP PROGRAMMABLE..................................................88
Model 25SF................................................................................92
Model 725..................................................................................94
Model 758..................................................................................98
1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 1

Q u i c k S e l e ct i o n G u i d e
A b s o lu t e E n c o d e r s
Pg 10 Ø58 mm Pg 12 Ø58 mm Pg 14 Ø36 mm

Model A58HE Model A58SE Model A36HB
• EtherCAT Deterministic Communication: • EtherCAT Deterministic Communication: • Multiturn or Single Turn Absolute Encoder
CoE, FoE, EoE CoE, FoE, EoE • Durable Magnetic Technology
• 58 mm Diameter Package • 58 mm Diameter Package • Standard Size 36 mm Package (1.42”)
• Hollow Bore Construction • Shaft Unit with 2 Mounting Options • SSI and CANopen Communications
• Durable Magnetic Technology • Durable Magnetic Technology • New Turns Counting Technology—
No Gears or Batteries
Pg 16 Ø36 mm Pg 18 Ø58 mm Pg 20 Ø2.5”

Model A36SB Model A58HB Model A25SB
• Multiturn or Single Turn Absolute Encoder • Up to 14 Bits of Single-Turn Resolution • Standard size 25 package (2.5” x 2.5”)
• Durable Magnetic Technology • SSI and CANopen Communications • Durable magnetic technology — no gears
• Standard Size 36 mm Package (1.42”) • 58 mm Diameter or batteries
• SSI and CANopen Communications • Durable Magnetic Technology • Servo and flange mounting
• New Turns Counting Technology— • Multi-turn absolute encoder (14-bit/39-bit)
Pg 22 Ø2.5” Pg 24 Ø2.0”
Model 925 Model 960
• Industrial Housed 2.5” Single Turn Absolute • Low Profile - 1.55” Single Turn Absolute
• Gray, Natural Binary, and Excess Gray Codes • Opto-ASIC Circuitry in an All Metal Housing
• Shaft Sizes to 0.375”, or 10 mm • Resolutions to 11 Bits
• Flange and Servo Mounts • Bore Sizes to 0.375”, or 10 mm
• Sealing Up to IP67 • A Variety of Flexible Mounting Brackets
L i n e a r m e a s u r e m e n t S o lu t i o n s
Pg 28 Pg 30 Pg 32 Pg 36
Model TR1 Model TR2 Model TR3 Model LCE
• Integrated Encoder & Measuring Wheel • Integrated Encoder & Rack&Pinion Gear • Integrated Heavy Duty Encoder & • Linear Cable Measurement Up to 50 inches
• Spring Loaded Torsion Arm Installs in • Spring Loaded Torsion Arm Installs in Measuring Wheel • Resolutions From 2 to 500 Cycles Per Inch
Vertical, Horizontal, or Upside-Down Vertical, Horizontal, or Upside-Down • Easily Installs in a Vertical, Horizontal, • Low Cost Linear Solution
Orientation Orientation or Upside-Down Orientation • Sealing Up to IP65
• Resolutions to 10,000 CPR • Resolutions to 10,000 CPR • Resolutions to 10,000 CPR • Many Mounting/Cable Exit Configurations
• Sealing Up to IP66 • Sealing Up to IP66 • Single or Dual Wheel
2 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

I n c r e m e n ta l T h r u-B o r e & M oto r M o u n t E n c o d e r s
Pg 40 Ø1.5” Pg 44 Ø1.5” Pg 46 Ø2.0”

Model 15T/H Model 755A Model 260
• Resolutions to 10,000 CPR • Resolutions to 30,000 CPR • Resolutions to 10,000 CPR
• Up to 12 Pole Commutation Available • Bore Sizes to 0.750”, or 14 mm • Bore Sizes to 0.625”, or 15 mm
• Bore Sizes to 0.375”, or 10 mm • A Variety of Flexible Mounting Brackets • A Variety of Flexible Mounting Brackets
• Operating Temps from -40° to 120° C • Operating Temps from -40° to 100° C • Operating Temps from -40° to 120° C
• Sealing Up to IP64 • Frequencies to 1 MHz • Sealing Up to IP64
Pg 50 Ø2.25” Pg 52 Ø2.5” Pg 54 Ø58 mm

Model 225A/Q Model 25T/H Model 58TP/HP Programmable
• Single Channel & Quadrature • Replaces 2.0” to 3.5” Encoders • Programmable with USB Module or Factory
• Economical Tachometer • Resolutions to 10,000 CPR Configured when Ordered
• Motor Feedback • Bore Sizes to 1.125”, or 28 mm • Programmable Resolution from 1 to 65,536 CPR
• Bore Sizes to 0.875”, or 22 mm • Versatile Flexible Mounting Options • Programmable output type and waveform
• Operating Temps from -40° to 105° C
Pg 58 Ø58 mm Pg 60 Ø4.3” Pg 62 Ø4.3”

Model 58TF/HF Model 775 Model 776
• 58 mm package available in thru-bore or • Slim Profile - to 1.36” Thru-Bores • Slim Profile - to 1.36” Thru-Bores
hollow bore • Resolutions to 4096 CPR • Resolutions to 4096 CPR
• Resolutions from 1 to 65,536 CPR • Bore Sizes to 1.875”, or 43 mm • Bore Sizes to 1.875”, or 43 mm
• 6 different output types • Large Selection of Connector Options • Large Selection of Connector Options
• 32 different waveforms available • Operating Temps from 0° to 100° C • Operating Temps from 0° to 100° C
Pg 66 Ø6.5” Pg 68 Ø9.0”
Model 770 Model 771
• Fits NEMA Frame Size 56C Thru 184C • Fits NEMA Frame Size 182TC Thru 256TC
• Resolutions to 4096 CPR • Standard Double C-Face
• Bore Sizes to 1.00”, or 24 mm • Resolutions to 4096 CPR
• Large Selection of Connector Options • Bore Sizes to 1.875”, or 43 mm
• Operating Temps from 0° to 100° C • Optional protective cover affords IP65 Seal

Q u i c k S e l e ct i o n G u i d e
I n c r e m e n ta l S h a f t E n c o d e r s
Pg 70-77 Ø2.25” Pg 78 Ø1.5” Pg 82 Ø1.5”

Models 711, 715 & 716 Model 15S Model 755A
• The Original Cube Encoders • Resolutions to 10,000 CPR • Resolutions to 30,000 CPR
• Single Channel, Quadrature and Timed Pulse • Up to 12 Pole Commutation Available • Frequencies to 1 MHz
• Five Versatile Heavy Duty Housing Styles • Wide Variety of Mounting Options • A Variety of Servo and Flange Mounts
• Resolutions to 10,000 CPR • Operating Temps from -40° to 120° C • Available with In-Line M12 Connectors
• Single and Double Shaft Options • Sealing Up to IP64 • Operating Temps from -40° to 100° C
Pg 88 Ø2.5” Pg 92 Ø2.5”
Pg 84 Ø2.0”
Model 702 Model 25SP Programmable Model 25SF
• Programmable waveform, output type, • Resolutions from 1 to 65,536 CPR
• 80 lb. Max. Radial and Axial Load and resolution (262,144 quadrature counts)
• Resolutions to 30,000 CPR • Resolutions from 1 to 65,536 CPR • 32 waveforms to choose from
• Shaft Sizes to 0.375”, or 10 mm (262,144 quadrature counts) • 6 different output types available
• Operating Temps from -40° to 100° C • 2.7 MHz max frequency • 2.7 MHz max frequency
• Sealing Up to IP67 • Designed for industrial environments • Designed for industrial environments
• Sealing Up to IP67 • Sealing Up to IP67
Pg 94 Ø2.5” Pg 98 Ø58 mm
Model 725 Model 758
• Industrial Isolated Flex Housing Available • 80 lb. Max. Radial and Axial Load
• Standard and Industrial Housing Available • Resolutions to 30,000 CPR
• Resolutions to 30,000 CPR • Clamping or Synchro Flange Options
• Operating Temps from -40° to 100° C • Operating Temps from -40° to 100° C
• Sealing Up to IP67 • Sealing Up to IP67

S ta i n l e s s S t e e l E n c o d e r s
Pg 100 Ø2.0” Pg 102 Ø58 mm Pg 104 Ø6.5”

Model 802S Model 858S Model 865T
• 2.0” Industrial 316 Stainless Steel Housing • 58 mm Industrial 316 Stainless Steel Housing • Fits NEMA Frame Size 56C Thru 184C Motors
• 80 lb. Max. Radial and Axial Load • 80 lb. Max. Radial and Axial Load • Slim 1” Profile Housing in 316 Stainless Steel
• Resolutions to 30,000 CPR • Resolutions to 30,000 CPR • Resolutions to 4096 CPR
• Shaft Sizes to 0.375”, or 10 mm • Clamping or Synchro Flange Options • Bore Sizes to 1.00”, or 24 mm
• Sealing Up to IP67 • Sealing Up to IP67 • Sealing Up to IP66 with Optional Cover
I n c r e m e n ta l M o d u l e a n d M o d u l a r E n c o d e r s
Pg 106 Ø30 mm Pg 108 Ø30 mm Pg 112 Ø2.0”

Model 30M Model 30MT Model 121
• Resolutions to 1024 CPR • Resolutions to 1024 CPR • Patented Auto Aligning Modular Encoder
• Optional 2, 4 or 8-pole commutation • Threaded housing • Up to 12 Pole Commutation Available
• Sealing options to IP69K • Sealing options to IP69K • Bore Sizes to 0.625”, or 15 mm
• Temperature range -40° to 120° C • Temperature range -40° to 120° C • Ideal for higher speed motor applications
• Resolutions to 2540 CPR
Call Sales & Customer Service at 800-366-5412

EPC is open for business from
8:00 am to 7:30 pm EST/ 5:00 am to 4:30 pm PST.

encoder basics
What is an encoder?
An encoder is a sensing device that provides feedback from the Incremental encoders are available in two basic output
physical world – it converts motion to an electrical signal that can types, single channel and quadrature, shown below.
be read by some type of control device, such as a counter or PLC.
The control device can then use that signal to control a conditional
event, such as activating a print head to create a mark at a specific
location.
Encoders use different types of technologies to create a signal. Single Channel Output Quadrature Output
Some common encoder technologies are: mechanical, magnetic,
resistive, and optical. Currently, the most common technology A single channel encoder, often called a tachometer, is
employed by encoders is optical. normally used in systems that rotate in only one direction
and require simple position and velocity information.
Encoders may produce either incremental or absolute signals.
Incremental signals do not indicate specific position, only that Quadrature encoders have dual channels (A and B), phased
the position has changed. Absolute encoders, on the other hand, 90 electrical degrees apart. These two output signals
use a different “word” for each position, meaning that an absolute determine the direction or rotation by detecting the leading
encoder provides both the indication that the position has changed or lagging signal in their phase relationship. Quadrature
and an indication of the absolute position of the encoder. encoders provide very high speed bi-directional information
for very complex motion control applications.
How an incremental encoder square wave is produced:

The inset diagram outlines the basic Resolution is a term used to describe the
construction of an incremental encoder. A Cycles Per Revolution (CPR) for incremental
beam of light emitted from an LED passes encoders. Each incremental encoder has a
through a transparent disk patterned with defined number of cycles that are generated
opaque lines. The light beam is picked up for each 360 degree revolution of the shaft.
by a photodiode array, also known as a These cycles are monitored by a counter or
photosensor. The photosensor responds motion controller and converted to counts
to the light beam, producing a sinusoidal for position or velocity control. The diagram
wave form, which is transformed into a shows how the whole encoder comes
square wave or pulse train. This pulse together.
signal is then sent to the counter or
controller, which will then send the signal If you still have questions as to how an
to produce the desired function. encoder works in your specific application, please call
us. When you contact EPC, you talk to engineers and
The diagram is for a typical rotary encoder. Incremental encoder experts for your toughest encoder questions.
encoders can provide a once-per-revolution pulse (often
called the index, marker, or reference) that occurs at the
same mechanical point of the encoder shaft revolution. This
pulse is on a separate output channel (Z) from the signal
channel or quadrature outputs. The index pulse is often
used to position motion control applications to a known
mechanical reference.

typical usage
Motor Feedback is the most common use for rotary encoders. In this type of
application, an encoder is either mounted directly to the motor, or indirectly using a
measuring wheel or chain-and-sprocket arrangement. The parameter of interest is
primarily the speed of the motor.
Web Tensioning is an application in which the encoder is not usually mounted to the
drive motor, but to one of the tensioning arm rollers. Any unevenness in the speed
of this roller indicates that proper web tension is not being maintained and must be
adjusted. The rotating speed of the tensioning roller is fed back to the controller, which
then adjusts the drive motor so that web material is kept at an even tension.
Cut-to-Length is a very practical application of an encoder combined with simple

mathematics. If, for example, a system were to be designed with a roller that is
exactly one foot in circumference, the roller would feed one foot of material for every
revolution of the roller. An encoder mounted to the roller would reflect this situation
and could tell a controller how much material had been fed through the roller. The
resolution of the encoder would also directly reflect the accuracy of the cut. In the
above example, 96 CPR would yield cuts to an 1/8" accuracy.
Elevators are just one example where encoders can perform a dual role: they can
determine the position of the elevator through a mathematical calculation; and they
can determine the speed of travel of the elevator.
Registration Mark Timing uses encoders to determine the position of a unit relative
to a known point, and then to determine the unit's speed relative to that mark. Radar
antenna rotation is a good example of this type of application.
In Backstop Gauging, the encoder is used to make sure that the unit, typically a
machine tool, does not exceed a pre-set position or direction of travel. Very often,
this is combined with a determination of the speed of travel of the table, tool head, or
similar component. Filling applications is just one example where Table Positioning is
critical since the item being filled must arrive at filling tube at the same time the fluid
control is turned on.
Conveying is another common industry where encoders are widely used. They may
be attached to the motor, to intermediate axle shafts, or to both. Encoders are an
especially effective feedback device where the positioning and/or speed of multi-
element conveying systems must be carefully coordinated.
Spooling (sometimes referred to as Level Wind) is another application where

encoders can prove invaluable. Not only is it necessary for the speed of the supply
and take-up reels to be kept in proper relation to each other, but often the amount of
material being spooled must also be tracked.
Electronics is just one industry that widely uses encoders in pick-and-place

applications, where many of the capabilities of encoders (rate, position, speed,
velocity) can often be found combined in a single system.

E n c o d e r S e l e ct i o n
Modular vs. Bearing Encoders
considerations
When deciding whether a modular or bearing encoder is the best solution for your application, consider these factors:
1. First and foremost, shaft end float and total indicated runout (TIR) must be within the encoder’s specifications. This is so important
that if you don’t have (or can’t get) this information, or don’t trust what you have, an encoder with bearings is strongly recommended
since it will be a much safer choice.
2. Modular encoders can be a good choice for high-speed applications – above 10,000 RPM – because there are no speed
limitations dictated by encoder bearings. For example, EPC’s Accu-Coder™ Model 121 Modular Encoder has been successfully
operated at speeds in excess of 40,000 RPM. The speed limiting factor is the maximum frequency of the encoder (which is a
function of disk resolution), RPMs, and the signal processing circuitry. Most encoder manufacturers include maximum frequency in
product specifications.
3. If the motor is to be used under considerable mechanical load, where the motor bearings could experience extra wear, then an
encoder with bearings would be the better choice. Remember, the bearings of the host device serve as the bearings of the modular
encoder.
4. Modular encoders are difficult to seal. If your application requires washdown, or if the operating environment is dirty, dusty or
wet, then an encoder with bearings and seals should be your first consideration. Such environments effectively rule out modular
encoders, unless external protection, such as an IP sealed motor cover, is used.
5. If your application requirements combine high maximum frequency (> 200kHz), high temperature (100° C or higher), and higher
resolution (> 2048 CPR), then an encoder with bearings is recommended. For long term reliability, this combination of factors
requires the air-gap between the disk and sensor to be very narrow and tightly controlled. An encoder with bearings simply provides
a more stable optical platform.
6. Lower resolutions (up to 1024 CPR) are more forgiving of end float and TIR, and are often well-suited for modular applications if
the operating environment is appropriate.
7. If you plan to use numerous encoders, then the relatively lower price of a modular encoder could save you some money. On the
other hand, the greater durability and easier installation of an encoder with bearings might be worth a slightly higher unit price. In
any case, carefully weigh the factors of long term support costs versus lower acquisition costs before making your final decision.
Quick Selection Chart

Parameter Attribute Use Modular Use Encoder with
Bearings
Motor shaft end float and TIR Within the encoder manufacturer’s specifications Yes Yes
Motor shaft end float and TIR Outside the encoder manufacturer’s specifications No Yes
Motor shaft end float and TIR Don’t have the information or don’t trust Not suggested Suggested
High-speed applications Above 10,000 RPM Good possibility Not suggested
Severe duty application Motor bearings have extra load and wear Not suggested Suggested
Dirty environment May need seals Not suggested Suggested
Combination of high frequency > 200kHz, > 100° C, > 2048 CPR Not suggested Suggested
response, temperature, CPR
Lower resolution requirement < 1024 cycles per revolution Good possibility Good
Number of units needed Acquisition cost vs. life cycle cost Consider if large Good
volume

I n t r o d u ct i o n t o
absolute encoders
Absolute encoders differ from incremental encoders

in how they report position information. Both types
of encoders provide a signal to indicate a change
mechanical position; however, where incremental
encoders provide a series of pulses to indicate an
incremental change in position as the shaft rotates, an
absolute encoder provides a unique value indication of
the position of the shaft. This allows an absolute encoder
to report its exact position as soon as the system powers
up, while an incremental encoder would need to return to
a known position.
Absolute encoders provide position information for a

rotating shaft within either a single rotation (single turn),
or over the course of multiple rotations (multi-turn).
The encoder provides a unique digital code or bit for A selection of absolute encoders available from EPC
each increment of shaft rotation. Multi-turn absolute encoders store
turns-counting information for instant retrieval, even after power down. EPC offers both single turn and multi-turn absolute encoders
with a variety of housing sizes, bore diameters, signal types and resolutions (see pages 10 - 25 for EPC’s absolute encoder model
options).
Advantages of EPC Absolute Encoders

• Remember position after a power outage, no need to re-home
• Typically have speed, scaling, preset, and fieldbus functions
• Allow you to determine the exact position of a machine and control over the storage of electronic data
• Multiple interface options: Parallel, Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI), CANopen, and EtherCAT
• Single turn and multi-turn options available, with resolution up to 16 Bit for Single Turn and 43 Bit for Multi-Turn
• Maintenance-free and environmentally friendly all-magnetic design
• Energy harvesting magnetic multi-turn technology – no gears or batteries
• Meet CE/EMC standards for immunity and emissions
When to Use Absolute Encoders

There are certain considerations that would suggest the use of an absolute encoder rather than an incremental encoder. These
considerations include, but are not limited to:
• Connectivity. When you need your encoders to communicate over a network, absolute encoders offer more
communication protocol options.
• Electrical Noise. Absolute encoders are more resistant to electrical noise.
• Reliability of Power Supply. If your application is subject to power loss, an absolute encoder is a better choice
because it will retain its position after a power-off scenario.
If you have questions about using an absolute encoder, call our Technical Services Department. You’ll talk to real engineers who
understand absolute feedback in motion control, and will help you find the right encoder solution for your application.

Absolute Encoders
Model A58HE
Features
Single/Multi-Turn Absolute Encoder (16 Bit ST / 43 Bit MT)
EtherCAT with CoE, FoE, EoE
Maintenance-Free and Environmentally Friendly Magnetic Design
Energy Harvesting Magnetic Multi-Turn Technology
Electronic Cam Switches
Low TCO and easy provisioning with internal web server
Color LEDs for operating condition, bus status, link activity
Compact design with bus cover
58 mm (2.28”) Diameter Package
Common Applications
Robotics, Telescopes, Antennas, Medical Scanners, Wind Turbines,
Elevators, Lifts, Motors, Automatic Guided Vehicles, Rotary and X/Y
Ø58 mm Positioning Tables
EPC Absolute Encoder – now with EtherCAT connectivity

The Model A58HE is an EtherCAT-ready, multi-turn absolute encoder designed for harsh factory and plant environments. It is particularly
suited to applications where Ethernet-based connectivity is required, and the encoder must retain position information after power-
off events. Easily designed into a wide variety of system applications, the Model A58HE plugs directly into your network with minimal
provisioning for rapid deployment, facilitating data exchange among myriad networked devices. The Model A58HE retains absolute
position information even after a power loss, facilitating speedy system recovery at start-up without the need for system re-homing.
Ready for Industry 4.0 and for the Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT), data exchange between the Model A58HE and other
applications has no influence on the control loop. The Model A58HE is non-reactive and can work independently from the PLC
or master, transferring data through network gateways to other automation networks and sites, and up to the cloud for analysis.
Model A58HE Ordering Guide

Blue type indicates price adder options.
Mechanical Electrical
A58HE 06 SR 16 00 EC U B V4 RNB
MODEL BORE SIZE SINGLE TURN COMM PROTOCOL OUTPUT CODE connector type1
A58HE Absolute Series 06 6 mm RESOLUTION EC EtherCAT B Binary RNB RNB Bus Cover with 3xM12
Hollow Bore 07 7 mm 01 to 16 Bit
(Blind) 08 8 mm
10 10 mm VOLTAGE
12 12 mm MOUNTING TYPE V4 10V - 32V
SOFTWARE
14 14 mm SR 63 mm BC 2-pt. Multi-turn REV
15 15 mm Flex Mount resolution U Revison U
A5 0.250”, 1/4"
A9 0.375”, 3/8” 00 Single Turn
01 to 43 Multi-Turn
EtherCAT (Ethernet for Control and Automation Technology) is a registered trademark and patented NOTES:
technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany. 1 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com.

M o d e l A58HE 63 m m 2 p t. F l e x m o u n t (S r)
Primary dimensions are in mm, secondary dimen-

sions SI units [inches] in brackets for reference
only.
n e t w o r k b u s c o n n e c to r pi n o u t
Bus cover with 3x M12x1. For EPC-supplied mating cables, wiring table is provided with cable. Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Port 1 (In) Power Port 2 (Out)
assignments assignments assignments
rnb rnb rnb
Female M12x1, Connector M12x1, Female M12x1,

Connector 4-pin, (Power) 4-pin, Connector 4-pin,
(Port1) IN D-coded A-coded (Port2) OUT D-coded
Tx+ 1 (+) Vcc 1 Tx+ 1
Rx+ 2 n. c. 2 Rx+ 2
Tx- 3 GND 3 Tx- 3
Rx- 4 n. c. 4 Rx- 4
M o d e l A58 HE Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Max Axial
Electrical Cycle time �� up to 50 µs Shaft Load �� 50 N (11.2 lb)
Code �� Binary, CW default, program- Starting Torque �� Approximately 1.6 Ncm
Power Supply �� 10 VDC up to 32 VDC
mable (2.226 oz-in) at ambient
Current
Programmable �� Steps per revolution; counts of temperature.
Consumption �� typ. 125 mA
Parameter revolution; preset; scale; counting Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM
Power direction; 2x 8 cam switches;
Consumption �� typ. 3 W DC-Mode
Diagnostic LED �� Traffic and connection manage- Bearings
ment: L/A1: Port 1 (IN) L/A2: Port Type �� 2 precision ball bearings
Sensor Specification
2 (OUT) Nominal Service �� 1 x 109 revs. at 100% rated
Internal Cycle Time �� 50 µs Status LED �� STAT, MOD: status of encoder and Life shaft load
Resolution bus 1 x 1010 revs. at 40% rated
Single Turn �� up to 65,536 steps/360° (16 bit) shaft load
Multi-Turn �� 43 bit Mechanical 1 x 1011 revs. at 20% rated
Accuracy Flange �� Hollow bore (blind bore) shaft load
Single Turn �� ± 0.0878° (≤ 12 bit) Flange Material �� Aluminum Environmental
Single Turn, Repeat Shaft Material �� Stainless steel Operating Temp �� -40° to 85° C
Accuracy �� ± 0.0878° (≤ 12 bit) Shaft Length �� 17 mm Storage Temp �� -40° to 100° C
Technology Insertion depth Sealing �� IP65 tested per EN 60529
Single Turn �� Innovative Hall-sensor technology min �� 10 mm ESD �� 8 kV tested per EN 61000-4-2
Multi-Turn �� Patented energy-harvesting technology, max �� 19 mm
Burst �� 2 kV tested per 61000-4-4
no battery and no gears Housing Cap �� Steel case chrome-plated, EMC �� EN 61000-6-2; EN 61000-6-3
Turn on time �� < 1.5 s magnetic shielding Vibration �� 200 m/s2 (10 Hz up to 1000 Hz)
Connection Cover �� Die cast aluminum, powder (20.3 g [10Hz up to 1000 Hz])
Interface coated tested per EN 60068-2-6
Interface �� Industrial Ethernet Weight �� 14.4 oz / 410 g approx Shock �� 5000 m/s2 (6 ms)
Protocol �� EtherCAT Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional 509.8 g (6 ms)
Device Profile �� CiA DS-406 V4.0.2, Class 3 Max Radial tested per EN 60068-2-27
Data Transfer �� 100BASE-TX Shaft Load �� 80 N (17.9 lb) Design �� According DIN VDE 0160

Absolute Encoders
M o d e l A 5 8 SE
Features
Single/Multi-Turn Absolute Encoder (16 Bit ST / 43 Bit MT)
EtherCAT with CoE, FoE, EoE
Electronic Cam Switches
Low TCO and easy provisioning with internal web server
High Shaft Load
Color LEDs for operating condition, bus status, link activity
Compact design with bus cover
58 mm (2.28”) Diameter Package
Common Applications
EPC Absolute Encoder – now with EtherCAT connectivity

The Model A58SE is an EtherCAT-ready, multi-turn absolute encoder designed for harsh factory and plant environments. It is
particularly suited to applications where Ethernet-based connectivity is required, and the encoder must retain position information
after power-off events. Easily designed into a wide variety of system applications, the A58SE plugs directly into your network with
minimal provisioning for rapid deployment, facilitating data exchange among myriad networked devices. The Model A58SE retains
absolute position information even after a power loss, facilitating speedy system recovery at start-up without the need for system
re-homing.
Ready for Industry 4.0 and for the Industrial Internet of Things (IIoT), data exchange between the Model A58SE and other
applications has no influence on the control loop. The Model A58SE is non-reactive and can work independently from the PLC or
master, transferring data through network gateways to other automation networks and sites, and up to the cloud for analysis.
Model A58SE Ordering Guide

A58SE 06 MH 16 00 EC U B V4 RNB
MODEL SINGLE TURN COMM PROTOCOL OUTPUT CODE connector type3

A58SE Absolute RESOLUTION EC EtherCAT B Binary RNB RNB Bus Cover with 3xM12
Series shaft SIZE 01 to 16 Bit
06 6 mm1
08 8 mm1 VOLTAGE
10 10 mm2 V4 10V - 32V
A9 0.375”, 3/8”1 Multi-turn SOFTWARE
resolution REV
MOUNTING TYPE 00 Single Turn U Revison U
MH Clamping Flange 01 to 43 Multi-Turn
MK Synchro Flange
NOTES:
1 Available with IP65 seal only.
EtherCAT (Ethernet for Control and Automation Technology) is a registered trademark and patented 2 Available with IP67 seal only.
technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany. 3 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com.

M o d e l A58SE C l a m pi n g f l a n g e (m h)
M o d e l A58SE sy n c h r o f l a n g e (MK)
Primary dimensions are in mm, secondary dimensions SI units [inches] in brackets for reference only.
Please see the Model A58HE, page 11, for Pinout Diagram.
M o d e l A58 SE Sp e c i f i c at i o n s Max Axial �� 120 N (26.9 lb) for 6 mm, 8
Code �� Binary, CW default, program- Shaft Load mm and 10 mm shafts
Electrical mable 120 N (26.9 lb) for 3/8" shaft
Power Supply �� 10 VDC up to 32 VDC Programmable �� Steps per revolution; counts of Starting Torque �� Approximately 1 Ncm
Current Parameter revolution; preset; scale; count- (1.416 oz-in) at ambient
Consumption �� typ. 125 mA ing temperature.
Power direction; 2x 8 cam switches; Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM
Consumption �� typ. 3 W DC-Mode
Diagnostic LED �� Traffic and connection manage- Bearings
ment: L/A1: Port 1 (IN) L/A2:
Type �� 2 precision ball bearings
Sensor Specification Port 2 (OUT)
Nominal Service �� 1 x 109 revs. at 100% rated
Internal Cycle Time �� 50 µs Status LED �� STAT, MOD: status of encoder
Life �� shaft load
and bus
Resolution 1 x 1010 revs. at 40% rated shaft
Single Turn �� up to 65,536 steps/360° (16 bit) Mechanical load
Multi-Turn �� 43 bit
Flange �� Synchro or Clamping 1 x 1011 revs. at 20% rated shaft
Accuracy load
Flange Material �� Aluminum
Single Turn �� ± 0.0878° (≤ 12 bit) Environmental
Shaft Material �� Stainless steel
Single Turn, Repeat
Shaft Length �� 17 mm Operating Temp �� -40° to 85° C
Accuracy �� ± 0.0878° (≤ 12 bit)
Insertion depth Storage Temp �� -40° to 100° C
Technology
min �� 10 mm Sealing �� IP65 (IP67 on 10 mm shaft)
Single Turn �� Innovative Hall-sensor technology
max �� 19 mm tested per EN 60529
Multi-Turn �� Patented energy-harvesting technology,
Housing Cap �� Steel case chrome-plated, ESD �� 8 kV tested per EN 61000-4-2
no battery and no gears
magnetic shielding Burst �� 2 kV tested per 61000-4-4
Turn on time �� < 1.5 s
Connection Cover �� Die cast aluminum, powder EMC �� EN 61000-6-2; EN 61000-6-3
coated Vibration �� 200 m/s2 (10 Hz up to 1000 Hz)
Interface Weight �� 16 oz / 450 g approx (20.3 g [10Hz up to 1000 Hz])
Interface �� Industrial Ethernet Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional tested per EN 60068-2-6
Protocol �� EtherCAT Max Radial �� 125 N (28.1 lb) for 6 mm and Shock �� 5000 m/s2 (6 ms)
Device Profile �� CiA DS-406 V4.0.2, Class 3 Shaft Load 8 mm shafts 509.8 g (6 ms)
Data Transfer �� 100BASE-TX 220 N (49.4 lb) for 10 mm shaft tested per EN 60068-2-27
Cycle time �� up to 50 µs 220 N (49.4 lb) for 3/8" shaft Design �� According DIN VDE 0160

Absolute Encoders
Model A36HB
Features
Single Turn/Multi-Turn Absolute Encoder (16 Bit ST / 43 Bit MT)
SSI or CANopen Communication
Standard Size 36 mm (1.42") Hollow Bore (Blind) Encoder
Flex Mount Eliminates Couplings and Is Ideal for Motors or Shafts
Meets CE/EMC Standards for Immunity and Emissions
The Model A36HB Absolute Encoder offers a high performance solution
for your absolute feedback needs. It provides maintenance-free feedback
thanks to its innovative battery-free and gear-free multi-turn technology.
This encoder is especially suited for applications where position information
must be retained after loss of system power. Its rugged magnetic technology
and high IP rating make the Model A36HB an excellent choice, even in tough
industrial environments. Available with a 1/4" or 6 mm hollow bore (blind)
and a wide selection of flexible mounting options, the Model A36HB is easily
designed into a variety of applications.
Common Applications
M o d e l A36 HB O r d e r i n g G u i d e
Blue type indicates price adder options. Not all configuration combinations may be available. Contact Customer Service for details.
A36HB 06 SF 12 10 CO A B V4 AMJ
MODEL SINGLE TURN COMM

A36HB Absolute Series RESOLUTION PROTOCOL OUTPUT CODE
Hollow Bore (Blind) 01 to 16 Bit CO CANopen1 B Binary
SI SSI2 G Gray3
BORE SIZE Input

Multi-turn SOFTWARE
06 6 mm Voltage
resolution REV
A5 1/4", 0.250"
00 Single Turn 5 5 VDC3
A Revision A
01 to 43 Multi-Turn V4 10 to 32 VDC
MOUNTING CONNECTOR TYPE4

SF 1.812" (46 mm) Slotted Flex Mount AMJ 5-pin M12 Axial Mount5
SD 1.575" (40 mm) Slotted Flex Mount AMK 8-pin M12 Axial Mount3
SW 1.653" (42 mm) Slotted Flex Mount AC6 6-foot Axial Mount Cable3
RC6 6-foot Radial Mount Cable3
Notes:
1 Please refer to CANopen Interface Technical Reference Manual at encoder.com.
2 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB-529: Understanding EPC’s SSI Encoders at encoder.com.
3 Available with SSI only.
4 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin Configuration
Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
5 Available with CANopen only.

Model A36HB Specifications Model A36HB 1.812" (46 mm) Slotted Flex Mount (S F)
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 10 to 32 VDC max SSI or CANopen
5 VDC SSI Only
Input Current �� 50 mA typical for 10 to 32 VDC
80 mA typical for 5 VDC
Power Consumption �� 0.5 W max
Resolution (Single) �� 01 to 16 bit
Resolution (Multi) �� 01 to 43 bit
Accuracy �� ± 0.35°
Repeatability �� ± 0.2°
CE/EMC �� Immunity tested per EN 61000-6-2:2006
Emissions tested per EN 61000-6-3:2011
CANopen Interface
Protocol �� CANopen: M o d e l A36H B Op t i o n a l F l e x M o u n t s
Communication profile CiA 301
1.575" (40 mm) SD
Device profile for encoder CiA 406 V3.2
class C2
Node Number �� 0 to 127 (default 127)
Baud Rate �� 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud with automatic bit
rate detection
Note: The standard settings, as well as any customization in
the software, can be changed via LSS (CiA 305) and the SDO
protocol (e.g., PDOs, scaling, heartbeat, node-ID, baud rate,
etc.).
Programmable CANopen Transmission Modes
Synchronous �� When a synchronization telegram (SYNC)
is received from another bus node, PDOs
1.653" (42 mm) SW
are transmitted independently.
Asynchronous �� A PDO message is triggered by an
internal event (e.g., change of measured
value, internal timer, etc.).
SSI Interface
Clock Input �� Via opto coupler
Clock Frequency �� 100KHz to 500KHz. Higher frequencies
may be available. Contact Customer
Service.
Data Output �� RS485 / RS422 compatible
Output Code �� Gray or binary
SSI Output �� Angular position value
Parity Bit �� Optional (even/odd)
Error Bit �� Optional
Turn On Time �� < 1.5 sec W i r i n g Ta b l e
Pos. Counting Dir. �� Connect DIR to GND for CW
For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Connect DIR to VDC for CCW
(when viewed from shaft end) For CE (Conformity European) requirements, use M12 cordset with shield connected to M12 coupling nut.
Set to Zero �� Yes, see Technical Bulletin TB-529: Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Understanding EPC's SSI Encoders CANopen Encoders
SSI Encoders
Protection �� Galvanic Isolation
Gland Cable† 8-pin
Mechanical Function Wire Color M-12 Function Pin
Max Shaft Speed �� 12,000 RPM
Ground (GND) White 1 +VDC 2
Bore Depth �� 17 mm (0.669")
+VDC Brown 2 Ground (GND) 3
User Shaft
Radial Runout �� 0.005" max SSI CLK+ Green 3 CAN High 4
Starting Torque �� < 0.45 oz-in typical
Radial Shaft Load �� 17 lb (80 N) = bearing life of 1.4x108 SSI CLK- Yellow 4 CAN Low 5
revolutions
SSI DATA+ Gray 5 CAN GND / Shield 1
Axial Shaft Load �� 11 lb (50 N) = bearing life of 1.4x108
revolutions SSI DATA- Pink 6
Housing �� Ferrous chrome-plated magnetic
screening PRESET Blue 7
Weight �� 5 oz typical DIR Red 8
Environmental Shield Side - Exit Housing
Housing
Operating Temp �� -40° to 85° C End - Exit N/C
Storage Temp �� -40° to 100° C †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield.
Humidity �� 95% RH non-condensing
Vibration �� 5 g @ 10 to 2000 Hz
Shock �� 100 g @ 6 ms duration
Sealing �� IP67; shaft sealed to IP65

Absolute Encoders
M o d e l A 3 6 SB
Features
Standard Size 36 mm Package (1.42")
The Model A36SB Absolute Encoder offers a high performance solution
and high IP rating make the Model A36SB an excellent choice, even in tough
industrial environments. Available with a 1/4" or 6 mm shaft and a servo
mount, the Model A36SB is easily designed into a variety of applications.
Common Applications
M o d e l A36 SB O r d e r i n g G u i d e
A36SB 06 MB 12 10 CO A B V4 AMJ
MODEL SINGLE TURN COMM

A36SB Absolute Series PROTOCOL OUTPUT CODE
RESOLUTION
CO CANopen1 B Binary
01 to 16 Bit
SI SSI2 G Gray3
SHAFT SIZE
06 6 mm
A5 1/4", 0.250" Input
Multi-turn SOFTWARE REV Voltage
resolution A Revison A 5 5 VDC3
MOUNTING 00 Single Turn V4 10 to 32 VDC
MB 36 mm Servo Mount 01 to 43 Multi-Turn
Notes: CONNECTOR TYPE4

1 Please refer to CANopen Interface Technical Reference Manual at encoder.com. AMJ 5-pin M12 Axial Mount5
2 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB-529: Understanding EPC’s SSI Encoders at encoder.com. AMK 8-pin M12 Axial Mount3
3 Available with SSI only. AC6 6-foot Axial Mount Cable3
4 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin Configuration RC6 6-foot Radial Mount3
Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.

Model A36SB Specifications M o d e l A36 SB s o l i d s h a f t
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 10 to 32 VDC max SSI or CANopen
5 VDC SSI Only
80mA typical for 5 VDC
Power Consumption ��0.5 W max
Accuracy �� ± 0.35°
Repeatability �� ± 0.2°
CANopen Interface
Protocol �� CANopen:
class C2
W i r i n g Ta b l e
Node Number �� 0 to 127 (default 127) For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Baud Rate �� 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud with automatic bit For CE (Conformity European) requirements, use M12 cordset with shield connected to M12 coupling nut.
rate detection Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Note: The standard settings as well as any customization in
the software can be changed via LSS (CiA 305) and the SDO
protocol (e.g., PDOs, scaling, heartbeat, node-ID, baud rate, SSI Encoders CANopen Encoders
etc.)
Programmable CANopen Transmission Modes Pin
Function Wire Color M-12 Function
Synchronous �� When a synchronization telegram (SYNC)
is received from another bus node, PDOs Ground (GND) White 1 +VDC 2
are transmitted independently. +VDC Brown 2 Ground (GND) 3
Asynchronous �� A PDO message is triggered by an
internal event (e.g., change of SSI CLK+ Green 3 CAN High 4
measured value, internal timer, etc.)
SSI CLK- Yellow 4 CAN Low 5
SSI Interface
Clock Input �� via opto coupler SSI DATA+ Gray 5 CAN GND / Shield 1
Clock Frequency �� 100 KHz to 500 KHz. Higher frequencies SSI DATA- Pink 6
Service. PRESET Blue 7
Data Output �� RS485 / RS422 compatible DIR Red 8
Output Code �� Gray or binary Shield Side - Exit Housing
SSI Output �� Angular position value Housing
End - Exit N/C
†Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield.
Turn On Time �� < 1.5 sec
Pos. Counting Dir. �� Connect DIR to GND for CW
(when viewed from shaft end)
Set to Zero �� Yes, see Technical Bulletin TB-529:
Understanding EPC's SSI Encoders
Protection �� Galvanic Isolation
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed �� 12,000 RPM
Radial Shaft Load �� 17 lb (80 N) = bearing life of 1.4x108
revolutions
Axial Shaft Load �� 11 lb (50 N) = bearing life of 1.4x108
revolutions
Starting Torque �� < 0.45 oz-in typical
Housing �� Ferrous chrome-plated magnetic
screening
Weight �� 5 oz typical
Environmental
Operating Temp �� -40° to 85° C
Storage Temp �� -40° to 100° C
Sealing �� IP67; shaft sealed to IP65

Absolute Encoders
M o d e l A 5 8 hB
Features
Maintenance-Free and Environmentally Friendly All-Magnetic Design
58 mm (2.28”) Diameter Hollow Bore (Blind) Encoder
Flex Mount Eliminates Couplings and Is Ideal for Motors or Shafts
The Model A58HB Absolute Encoder offers a high performance solution
and high IP rating make the Model A58HB an excellent choice, even in tough
industrial environments. Available with bores up to 3/8" or 14 mm and two
flexible mounting options, the Model A58HB is easily designed into a variety
of applications.
Common Applications
Model A58HB Ordering Guide

A58HB 06 SQ 14 18 CO A B V4 RMJ
MODEL BORE SIZE SINGLE TURN COMM Input Voltage

A58HB Absolute Series 06 6 mm RESOLUTION PROTOCOL 5 5 VDC3
Hollow Bore 07 7 mm 01 to 16 Bit CO CANopen1 V4 10 to 32 VDC
(Blind) 08 8 mm SI SSI2
10 10 mm
OUTPUT CODE
12 12 mm
14 14 mm Multi-turn B Binary
G Gray3 connector type4
A5 0.250”, 1/4" resolution
A9 0.375”, 3/8” RMJ 5-pin M12 Radial Mount5
00 Single Turn
RMK 8-pin M12 Radial Mount3
01 to 43 Multi-Turn
SOFTWARE
MOUNTING TYPE REV
SQ 108 mm BC Flex Arm A Revison A
SR 63 mm BC 2-pt. Flex Mount
NOTES:
4 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com.
For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see
Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.

M o d e l A58 HB Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l A58H B 108 m m B C F l e x A r m (S Q )
CL
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 10 to 32 VDC max
5 VDC SSI Only
80 mA typical for 5 VDC
Power: Consumption �� 0.5 W max
Accuracy �� <± 0.35°
Repeatability �� <± 0.2°
CANopen Interface
Protocol �� CANopen:
class C2
Node Number �� 1 to 127 (default 127)
Baud Rate �� 10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud with automatic bit
rate detection M o d e l A58H B 63 m m 2 p t. F LE X m o u n t (SR)
Note: The standard settings, as well as any customization in the
software, can be changed via LSS (CiA 305) and the SDO proto-
col (e.g., PDOs, scaling, heartbeat, node-ID, baud rate, etc.).
Synchronous �� When a synchronization telegram (SYNC) is
received from another bus node, PDOs are
transmitted independently.
Asynchronous �� A PDO message is triggered by an internal
event (e.g., change of measured value,
internal timer, etc.).
SSI Interface
Clock Input �� Via opto-coupler
Clock Frequency �� 100 kHz to 500 kHz. Higher frequencies
Service.
Data Output �� RS485 / RS422 compatible Primary dimensions are in mm, secondary dimensions SI units [inches] in brackets for reference only.
Output Code �� Gray or binary
SSI Output �� Angular position value
Turn On Time �� < 1.5 sec
Pos. Counting Dir. �� Connect DIR to GND for CW W I r I n G ta B l e
Connect DIR to VDC for CCW For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
(when viewed from shaft end)
For CE (Conformity European) requirements, use M12 cordset with shield connected to M12 coupling nut.
Set to Zero �� Yes, see Technical Bulletin TB529:
Trim back and insulate unused wires.
SSI ENCOdERS CANopen ENCOdERS
Protection �� Galvanic Isolation with SSI option
Function 8-Pin M12
Mechanical Function 5-Pin M12
Ground (GND) 1
Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM +VDC 2
Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional +VDC 2
Ground (GND) 3
Radial Run-out �� 0.007” max SSI CLK+ 3
CAN HIGH 4
Axial Endplay �� ± 0.030” max SSI CLK- 4
Radial Shaft Load �� 17 lb (80 N) = bearing life of CAN LOW 5
SSI DATA+ 5
1x109 revolutions CAN GND / Shield* 1
SSI DATA- 6
Axial Shaft Load �� 11 lb (50 N) = bearing life of
1x109 revolutions PRESET 7 *M12 connector is connected to encoder
housing.
Starting Torque �� 2.3 oz-in typical DIR 8
Housing �� All metal with protective finish Shield Housing
Bearings �� 2 precision ball bearings
Weight �� 7.5 oz typical
Environmental
Operating Temp �� -40° to 85° C
Storage Temp �� -40° to 100° C This wiring table was created as a separate ﬁle to be placed
Vibration �� 5.1 g (10 Hz up to 2000 Hz) because it appears on the SA58H datasheet, the MA58H
Shock �� 100 g (6 ms)
datasheet, and TB-539. All documents are linked back to
Sealing �� IP67, shaft sealed to IP65
this wiring table.

Absolute Encoders
M o d e l A 2 5 SB
Features
IP67 Sealing Available
Servo and Flange Mounting
Standard Size 25 Package (2.5" x 2.5")
The Model A25SB Absolute Encoder offers a high performance solution
for your absolute feedback needs. This encoder is especially suited for
applications where position information must be retained after loss
of system power. It provides maintenance-free feedback thanks to its
innovative battery-free and gear-free multi-turn technology. This encoder
is the perfect choice for harsh industrial applications thanks to its rugged
magnetic technology, available IP67 rating, and proven double bearing
design. Available with several shaft sizes and mounting styles, the Model
A25SB is easily designed into OEM and aftermarket applications.
Common Applications
Ø2.5" Positioning Tables
M o d e l A25 SB O r d e r i n g G u i d e
A25SB 10 MA 12 10 CO A B V4 RMJ
MODEL TEMP
SINGLE TURN COMM
A25SB Absolute Series 0° to 80° C Std
RESOLUTION PROTOCOL
CO CANopen1 Input T5 -40° to 80° C
SHAFT SIZE 01 to 16 Bit
SI SSI2 Voltage
10 10 mm 5 5 VDC3 SEAL
A9 3/8", 0.375" V4 10 to 32 VDC IP50 Std
A5 1/4", 0.250" SOFTWARE REV
A Revison A S3 IP66
S4 IP67
MOUNTING Multi-turn CONNECTOR TYPE4
MA 2.50" Flange resolution RMJ 5-pin M12 Side Mount5
MC 2.50" Servo Mount 00 Single Turn OUTPUT CODE RMK 8-pin M12 Side Mount3
01 to 43 Multi-Turn B Binary
G Gray3
Notes:
4 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector
Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration
Diagrams at encoder.com.

Model A25SB Specifications M o d e l A25S B 2.5" F l a n g e M o u n t (MA)
Electrical
Input Voltage ��10 to 32 VDC max SSI or CANopen
5 VDC SSI Only
Input Current ��50 mA typical for 10 to 32 VDC
80mA typical for 5 VDC
Power Consumption ��0.5 W max
Resolution (Single) ��01 to 16 bit
Resolution (Multi) ��01 to 43 bit
Accuracy ��± 0.35°
Repeatability ��± 0.2°
CE/EMC ��Immunity tested per EN 61000-6-2:2006
CANopen Interface
Protocol ��CANopen:
class C2
Node Number ��0 to 127 (default 127)
Baud Rate ��10 Kbaud to 1 Mbaud with automatic bit
rate detection M o d e l A25S B 2.5" S e r v o M o u n t (MC )
Note: The standard settings, as well as any customization in
the software, can be changed via LSS (CiA 305) and the SDO
protocol (e.g., PDOs, scaling, heartbeat, node-ID, baud rate,
etc.)

Synchronous ��When a synchronization telegram (SYNC)
is received from another bus node,
PDOs are transmitted independently
Asynchronous ��A PDO message is triggered by an
internal event (e.g., change of measured
value, internal timer, etc.)
SSI Interface
Clock Input ��Via opto coupler
Clock Frequency ��100KHz to 500KHz. Higher frequencies
Service.
Data Output ��RS485 / RS422 compatible All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
Output Code ��Gray or binary Metric dimensions are given in brackets [mm].
SSI Output ��Angular position value
Parity Bit ��Optional (even/odd)
Error Bit ��Optional
Turn On Time ��< 1.5 sec
Pos. Counting Dir. ��Connect DIR to GND for CW
(when viewed from shaft end) W i r i n g Ta b l e
Set to Zero ��Yes, see Technical Bulletin TB-529: For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
For CE (Conformity European) requirements, use M12 cordset with shield connected to M12 coupling nut.
Protection ��Galvanic Isolation
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed ��8,000 RPM SSI Encoders CANopen Encoders
Shaft Material ��303 Stainless Steel Function Pin Function Pin
Radial Shaft Load ��80 lb (355 N) max. Rated load of 20 to
Ground (GND) 1
40 lb (88 to 177 N) = bearing life of 1.5 +VDC 2
x109 revolutions +VDC 2
Ground (GND) 3
Axial Shaft Load ��80 lb (355 N) max. Rated load of 20 to SSI CLK+ 3
40 lb (88 to 177 N) = bearing life of 1.5 CAN High 4
x109 revolutions SSI CLK- 4
CAN Low 5
Starting Torque ��1.0 oz-in typical with no seal SSI DATA+ 5
3.0 oz-in typical with IP66 shaft seal CAN GND / Shield 1
SSI DATA- 6
7.0 oz-in typical with IP67 shaft seal
Housing ��Black non-corrosive finish PRESET 7
Weight ��20 oz typical DIR 8
Environmental Shield Housing
Storage Temp ��-40° to 100° C
Humidity ��95% RH non-condensing
Vibration ��5 g @ 10 to 2000 Hz
Shock ��100 g @ 6 ms duration
Sealing ��IP50 standard; IP66 or IP67 optional

Absolute Encoders
Model 925
Features
Standard Size 25 Package (2.5")
Resolutions up to 12-Bit (4096 Counts)
Incorporates Opto-ASIC Technology
Industrial Grade, Heavy Duty Housing
Optional IP67 Seal
The Model 925 Single Turn Absolute Encoder is ideal for a wide variety of
industrial applications that require an encoder with the capability of absolute
positioning output. Its fully digital output and innovative use of Opto-ASIC
technology make the Model 925 an excellent choice for all applications,
especially ones with a high presence of noise. Available with either round
servo or square flange mounting, and a variety of connector and cabling
options, the Model 925 is easily designed into a variety of application
requirements. The Model 925, with its wide selection of shaft sizes supported
by industrial grade, heavy duty bearings, and optional IP67 seal, is ideal for
rough environments.
Common Applications
Machine Tools, Robotics, Telescopes, Antennas, Rotary & X-Y Positioning
Tables, Medical Scanners
Ø2.5" Not recommended for new applications.
M o d e l 925 O r d e r i n g G u i d e
925 B F XXXX CW S G/6 07 N PP N
MODEL MOUNTING CONNECTOR SHAFT CERTIFICATION

925 Absolute Series F Flange LOCATION SEAL
N None
Size 25 (2.5") S 2.5" Servo S Side N No Seal CE CE Marked 5
E End 1 IP66
OUTPUT CODE RESOLUTION 2 IP64
5 IP67
G Gray See Table Below
B Natural Binary
X Excess Gray COUNT DIRECTION/ SHAFT SIZE OUTPUT TYPE
CODE INVERSION 07 1/4", 0.250" PP Push-Pull (standard)
CW Clockwise 19 5/16", 0.3125" OC Open Collector
CCW Counter Clockwise 20 3/8", 0.375"
CWI Clockwise/Inverted 06 6 mm
CCI Counter Clockwise/Inverted 18 8 mm
21 10 mm
CONNECTOR TYPE 1,2

C10 10-pin MS3
C16 16-pin M23
C19 19-pin Bayonet
G Gland, 24" cable (standard)4
M o d e l 925 R e s o lu t i o n Ta b l e
Output Code Counts Per Resolution NOTES:
Gray Code 0256 0512 1024 2048 4096 1 For additional connector styles, please contact Customer Service.
Natural Binary 0250 0256 0360 0500 0512 0720 1000 For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see
1024 1440 2000 2048 2880 4000 4096 Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
3 Only available with 8-bit resolution encoder. Not available with CE.
Excess Gray 0180 0250 0360 0500 0720 1000 1440 4 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in
2000 2880 4000 feet. Example: G/6 = 6 feet of cable.
5 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at encoder.com.
Contact Customer Service for availability.

REVISIONS
LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
- INITIAL RELEASE
A ECO #01959 GMA 03/30/04
M o d e l 925 2.5" F l a n g e M o u n t (F)

M o d e l 925 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 26 VDC max
Regulation �� 100 mV peak-to-peak, max ripple at
0 to 10 kHz
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no external load
Output Format �� Absolute – Parallel Outputs
Output Type �� Open Collector – 20 mA max per channel
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channel
Code �� Gray Code, Natural Binary Code,
Excess Gray Code
Max Frequency �� 50 kHz (LSB)
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond
Resolution �� Up to 12 bit
Accuracy �� ±1/2 LSB
REVISIONS
Control LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
- INITIAL RELEASE
Directional Control �� Field selectable for increasing counts A ECO #01959 GMA 03/30/04
(CW or CCW)
M o d e l 925 2.5"
ISSUE DATE
S e r v o M o u n t (S)
Mechanical 9/19/01
TOLERANCE E
P
C ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM continuous NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
Radial Shaft Load �� 35 lb max

+
- .005 DR GDB 9/19/01
MODEL 925 FLANGE MOUNT
PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
Axial Shaft Load �� 40 lb max +

- .01
DWG NUMBER REV.
925-flg1
QC
Starting Torque �� 1.0 oz-in typical for no seal PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG A
-+ .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZE SCALE SHEET OF
2.0 oz-in typical with IP64 seal
B NONE 1 1

7.0 oz-in typcial with IP67 shaft seal
Housing �� Aluminum
Environmental
F 4
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz B
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64, IP66 or
All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
IP67 optional
ISSUE DATE
W i r i n g Ta b l e 9/19/01 TOLERANCE E
P
NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL
For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to.005

wiring table provided with cable.
INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
+
- GDB 9/19/01
DR
MODEL 925 SERVO MOUNT
Trim back and insulate PREV
unused
ASSEMBLYwires. DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER REV.
+
- .01
925-ser1
QC
PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG A

Gland Cable† +
-
19-pin
.1° Bayonet PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
Function Wire Color KPT02E14-19P 16-pin M23 10-pin MS*

S1 MSB Brown A 3 A
S2 White B 5 B
S3 Green C 6 C
S4 Orange D 7 D
S5 Blue E 8 E
S6 Violet F 9 F
S7 Gray G 10 G
S8 LSB 8-bit Pink H 11 H
S9 LSB 9-bit Red/Green J 12 --
S10 LSB 10-bit Red/Yellow K 13 --
S11 LSB 11-bit Turquoise L 14 --
S12 LSB 12-bit Yellow M 15 --
Direction+ Red/Blue R 4 --
Case Ground Drain/Screen S 16 --
0V Common Black T 1 J
Special** White/Red U -- --
+VDC Red V 2 I
*Only available with 8-bit resolution encoder. Not available with CE.
**Where fitted.
+Direction control Standard is CW increasing when viewed from the shaft end. Direction pin is
pulled high to 5V internally. Direction pin must be pulled low (GND, Common) to reverse count
direction. Applied voltage to direction pin should not exceed 5V.

Absolute Encoders
Model 960
Features
Low-Profile – 1.55"
Thru-Bore or Hollow Bore Styles
Industrial Grade, Heavy Duty Housing
State-of-the-Art Opto-ASIC Circuitry
The single turn Model 960 Absolute Series Encoder provides a unique
solution to a wide variety of industrial applications requiring absolute
position information. By providing a low profile package of just 1.55", as
well as a variety of hollow and thru-bore sizes and an easy to use flexible
mounting system, the Model 960 goes where traditional absolute encoders
do not fit. In addition, its innovative Opto-ASIC circuitry, coupled with its
digital output, make it an excellent choice in those applications plagued by an
unusually high level of electrical noise. The Model 960 can easily be mounted
directly on a motor shaft, bringing the advantage of absolute positioning in
an all metal housing, while eliminating the fixtures, couplers and adapters
required by other absolute encoder designs.
Common Applications
Machine Tools, Robotics, Telescopes, Antennas, Rotary & X-Y Positioning
Tables, Medical Scanners
Ø2.0" Not recommended for new applications.
960 T 01 G 09 PP SF G/6 CE
MODEL OUTPUT OUTPUT CERTIFICATION

960 Absolute Series CODE TYPE
N None
Thru-Bore G Gray Code PP Push Pull CE CE Marked 2
(Standard)
OC Open
BORE SIZE Collector CONNECTOR TYPE
01 1/4", 0.250" G Gland, 18" Cable1
02 3/8", 0.375" RESOLUTION
04 6 mm (Bits, Counts Per Revolution)
14 8 mm
08 8 bit, 0256
05 10 mm
09 9 bit, 0512
10 10 bit, 1024
11 11 bit, 2048
HOUSING 36 9 bit, 360 (XS76)
STYLE 72 10 bit, 720 (XS152)
T Thru-Bore
B Hollow Bore
MOUNTING
SF Standard Slotted Flex Mount
FA Flexible Arm
NOTES:
1 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet. Example:
G/6 = 6 feet of cable.

REVISIONS
- INITIAL RELEASE
A ECO #01960 GMA 04/05/04
M o d e l 960 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 960 S l ot t e d F l e x M o u n t (S F)
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 26 VDC max
Regulation �� 100 mV peak-to-peak, max ripple
at 0 to 10 kHz
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no external load
Output Format �� Absolute – Parallel Outputs
Output Type �� Open Collector – 20 mA max per channel
Code �� Gray Code, Excess Gray Code
Max Frequency �� 25.6 kHz (LSB)
Resolution �� Up to 11 bit
Accuracy �� ±1/2 LSB
Control
Directional Control �� Field selectable for increasing counts
(CW or CCW). Standard configuration
user selects the applicable MSB wire
for direction of count. Direction M o d e l 960 ISSUE
W iDATE
t h F l e x A r m (FA)
control option allows user to select 05/16/03
TOLERANCE E
P
count direction by applying 0 VDC to NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
an encoder input. See Wiring Table. +

.005
- DR BSR 05/16/03
MODEL 960 FLEX MOUNT
Mechanical -+
DWG NUMBER REV
Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM continuous PART NUMBER ANGULAR
.01 QC
MFG
960cat1 A
Bore Size �� 0.250", 0.3125", 0.375", 6 mm, -+ .1˚ PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
8 mm, 10 mm
Bore Tolerance �� -0.0000" / +0.0006"
User Shaft Tolerances
Radial Runout �� 0.007"
Axial Endplay �� ±0.030"
Starting Torque �� 0.3 oz-in typical for thru-bore
0.14 oz-in typical for hollow bore
Electrical Conn �� Gland with 18" cable (braid shield,
30 AWG conductors)
Housing �� Aluminum with non-corrosive finish All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
Mounting �� Slotted Flex Mount standard,
Flex Arm optional
Weight �� 7 oz typical W i r i n g Ta b l e
Environmental
Operating Temp �� 0° to 70° C Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Storage Temp �� -20° to 85° C Gland Cable†
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing Function Wire Color
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz Common *CE Option only.
Black
Shock �� 20 g @ 11 ms duration **Standard is CW increasing count (when viewed
Sealing �� IP50 from shaft end, and using brown wire for MSB).
+VDC Red
Red/Blue is pulled up internally to 5 VDC.
To reverse count direction, Red/Blue must be
S1 CW MSB Brown
pulled to low (0 VDC). If 5 VDC is applied to
Red/Blue, unit remains in standard CW increas-
S1 CCW MSB Yellow ing count mode. Count direction can also be
reversed by using the yellow MSB wire instead
S2 White of the Brown. At no time should voltage applied
to Red/Blue exceed 5 VDC.
S3 Green †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil
and braid shield.
S4 Orange
S5 Blue
S6 Violet
S7 Gray
S8 LBS 8-bit Pink
S9 LSB 9-bit Red/Green
S10 LSB 10-bit Red/Yellow
S11 LSB 11-bit Turquoise
Direction Control** Red/blue
Case Ground* Shield

Tru-Flexibility
The Tru-Trac™ Family of Linear Solution Encoders
Companies spend hours designing measuring wheel and bracket

assemblies, to attach to an encoder, to measure position or
velocity. That design time costs money. What's more, adjusting
the pressure of the measuring wheel once it's been installed
is often a major challenge – costing yet more time and money.
Thanks to EPC's Tru-Trac™ Linear Measurement Solution
Encoders, you now have a ready-made solution.
Easy to use and very compact, the Tru-Trac™ encoders are fully
adjustable, integrated encoders with spring-loaded measuring
wheel assemblies. Monitoring speed, velocity, or position has
never been easier or more cost effective. Designed for use in
almost any position and orientation, installation possibilities are Model TR1
endless. The threaded shaft on the pivot axis makes these units
reversible, allowing measuring from either side of the assembly.
A variety of available measuring wheels, together with the

flexibility of the adjustable spring loaded torsion arm, prevents
slippage over many different surfaces or textures (for more on
measuring wheel options, see page 35). Have an application
with a unique surface or measurements? No problem. Order
your Tru-Trac™ without a wheel, and you can install your own
measuring wheel. Simple torsion control provides easy wheel
pressure adjustment in seconds, allowing various thicknesses of Model TR2
materials to be measured.
Common applications include: Web Tension Control, Paper

Monitoring, Glue Dispensing, Linear Material Monitoring,
Conveyor Systems, Printing, Labeling, and Document Handling.
The Tru-Trac™ encoders are perfect for linear applications

and can be mounted above or below the moving object. The
spring-loaded torsion arm allows the tension on the wheel to be
adjusted, so that measurement can be obtained over a variety
of different surfaces and textures. Perfect for cut-to-length,
packaging, conveyors, mail sorting and gantry applications.
The Tru-Trac™ encoders can be mounted in any orientation to

Model TR3
monitor velocity. This is perfect for many rotational applications Available with single or dual wheels
such as web tension control drums, rotary tables, printing,
spooling, etc.
The Tru-Trac™ by Encoder Products Company is a versatile

solution for tracking velocity, position, or distance over a wide For specification assistance call
variety of surfaces in almost any application. Customer Service at 1-800-366-5412.

T r u - T r a c ™ E n c o d e r s o n th e j o b
Model TR1 Tru-Trac™ Applications
For linear applications, the Tru-

Trac™ can be mounted above
or below the moving object,
and the tension on the wheel
can be adjusted for a wide
range of applications, such as
packaging, conveyors, mail
sorting, cut-to-length, labeling,
gantries, etc.
For rotational applications, the

Tru-Trac™ can be mounted in
any orientation to monitor the
position or velocity of many
types of rotating equipment,
such as web tension control
drums, rotary tables, printing,
spooling, etc.
Model TR2 Tru-Trac™ Applications

For reciprocating linear motion applications, the TR2 provides accurate reliable feedback. The adjustable spring inside the torsion
arm allows the TR2 to be oriented in any direction, while still ensuring the pinion gear is properly engaged with the rack. The
precision pinion gear, when paired with EPC’s stainless steel or flexible rack system provides feedback with virtually no backlash.
The TR2 is ideal for gauging and backstop applications typically The Model TR2 is applied to provide vertical
found on a variety of metal working equipment. speed and position feedback for a fork lift tower.

Linear Measurement Solutions
M o d e l T R 1 T r u - T r a c TM
F e at u r e s
Encoder and Measuring Wheel Solution Integrated Into One Compact Unit
Spring Loaded Torsion Arm Makes Wheel Pressure Adjustments a Snap
Easily Installed in a Vertical, Horizontal or Upside Down Orientation
Operates Over a Variety of Surfaces at Speeds up to 3000 Feet per Minute
Integrated Module Simplifies Your System Design, Reducing Cost
With operating speeds up to 3000 feet per minute and a wide variety of
configuration options, the TR1 Tru-Trac™ is the versatile solution for tracking
velocity, position, or distance over a wide variety of surfaces in almost any
application. An integrated encoder and spring-loaded measuring wheel assembly
available in one unit, the TR1 is both easy-to-use and compact. Plus, the TR1
housing is a durable, conductive composite material that will eliminate static build
up. Its spring-loaded torsion arm offers adjustable torsion load, allowing the TR1 to
be mounted in almost any orientation – even upside-down. And the threaded shaft
on the pivot axis is easily reversible in the field, providing mounting access from
either side. The TR1 is your solution for a compact, linear encoder.
C o mm o n A pp l i c at i o n s
Web Tension Control, Paper Monitoring, Glue Dispensing, Linear Material
Monitoring, Conveyor Systems, Printing, Labeling, Document Handling
M o d e l TR1 T r u- T r a C™ O r d e r i n g G u i d e
Mechanical Electrical Optional Features

Leave Blank For Standard Options
-20° to 85°C Std IP50 Std None Std
TR1 U1 R4 0500 N V1 A OC F00
MODEL CYCLES PER OUTPUT TYPE Operating CERTIFICATION

TR1 Tru-Trac™ REVOLUTION OC Open Collector Temperature None (Std)
See CPR Options below PP Push-Pull -20° to 85° C (Std) CE CE Marked 9
Price adder > 1999 HV Line Driver4 T1 -40° to 85° C
PU Pull-Up T2 -20° to 100° C
PIVOT SHAFT Input Resistor 3,5
MOUNTING1 Voltage OD Open Collector
with Differential MAXIMUM SEALING
R4 Right side 1/4-20 V1 5 to 28 VDC
Outputs FREQUENCY IP50 (Std)
thread Standard S2 IP65
L4 Left side 1/4-20 thread F3 Extended S3 IP66
R6 Right side M6 thread See Specifications
L6 Left side M6 thread NUMBER OF CHANNELS2
A Channel A
Channel A Leads B CONNECTOR TYPE6
Q Quadrature A & B F00 18" Cable 7 (Std)
WHEEL TYPE & CIRCUMFERENCE
R Quadrature A & B with Index F01 12" Cable
U1 Urethane 6" cir
F02 24" Cable
U2 Urethane 200 mm cir Channel B Leads A3 F03 36" Cable
K1 Knurled 6" cir K Reverse Quadrature A & B M00 2M Cable 7
K2 Knurled 200 mm cir D Reverse Quadrature A & B J00 18" Cable with 5-pin M124
A1 Anodized Knurled 6.0" cir with Index K00 18" Cable with 8-pin M12
A2 Anodized Knurled 200 mm cir
19 No Wheel - 1/4" shaft
NOTES:
20 No Wheel - 6 mm shaft
1 See mechanical drawing. Shaft is reversible in the field.
2 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating or phase relationship options.
M o d e l TR 1 T r u-T r a c ™ C P R Op t i o n s 3 Reverse Quadrature not available with Pull-Up Resistor Output Type.
4 Line Driver output not available with 5-pin M12 connector. Additional cable lengths
0001 thru 0189* 0198 0200 0250 0256 0300 0315 0360 available. Please consult Customer Service.
0400 0500 0512 0580 0600 0750 0800 1000 1024 5 With Input Voltage above 16 VDC, operating temperature is limited to 85° C.
1200 1250 1500 1800 2000 2048 2500 2540 3000 6 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For
3600 4000 4096 5000 6000 7200 8192 10,000 Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see
*Contact Customer Service for Availability Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
7 For non-standard English cable lengths enter ‘F’ plus cable length expressed in feet.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.
Service to determine all currently available values. Special disk resolutions 8 For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length expressed in meters.
are available upon request and may be subject to a one-time NRE fee. Example: M06 = 6 meters of cable.

M o d e l TR1 T r u-T r a C™ 8 M o d e l TR 1 T r u- T r a C ™
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
REVISIONS
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
-- INITIAL RELEASE
A CHANGED SOME DIMENSION LOCATIONS
B CHANGED PIVOT ARM BOLT HEAD
Electrical 6.000" CIRCUMFERENCE STANDARD TORQUE ADJUSTMENT

Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures D METRIC OR CUSTOM SIZES AVAILABLE UNDER RUBBER CAP CABLE LENGTH
up to 85° C Ø0.2498" or Ø5.995mm
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures between
85° C and 100° C "L" "R"
Input Current �� 100 mA max (65 mA typical) with no SIDE SIDE
output load
Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in 5/32" [4.0] HEX 1/4-20 or M6 THREADS AVAILABLE
quadrature with channel A leading B for SOCKET 1.00 [25.3]
C SHAFT CAN BE REVERSED FOR Ø 1.71 [43.4]
clockwise shaft rotation, as viewed from 2.500 [63.5] 1.3 [33] MOUNTING FROM EITHER SIDE
3.13 [79.60] TYPICAL (SPECIFY IN ORDERING GUIDE)
the shaft side. See Waveform Diagram. 0.50 [12.6]
Output Types �� Open Collector – 20 mA max per channel 0.24 [6]
"L" SIDE
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 2.2K ohm
0.740 18.80] Note: Width of Wheel is 0.25" [6.35].
internal resistor, 20 mA max per channel All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
B 0.100 [2.54]
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) Metric dimensions are given in brackets [mm].
Index �� Once per revolution. "R" SIDE
0.60 [15.2] tracB
0001 to 0189 CPR: Ungated
0190 to 10,000 CPR: Gated to output A
See Waveform Diagram.
Max. Frequency �� Standard Frequency Response is
200 kHz for CPR 1 to 2540 For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table
500 kHz for CPR 2541 to 5000 A provided with cable. THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
E
P
C ENCODER PR0DUCTS COMPANY
1 MHz for CPR 5001 to 10,000 Trim back and insulate unused wires. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
APPROVALS
DRAWN
J.Meschko
DATE
10/25/04
NAME AND TITLE
CHECKED
Model TR1
ISSUE DATE:
Extended Frequency Response (optional)

xx/xx/xx TOLERANCES
Gland Cable† 5-pin M12** 8-pin M12**

NEXT ASSEM. DECIMAL RESP ENG
DWG. NO.
XXX -+ .005
trac-01
is 300 kHz for CPR 2000, 2048, 2500,
PREV. ASSEM. DECIMAL MFG ENG
XXX -+ .01
Function Wire Color

PART NUMBER ANGULAR QUAL ENG SHEET
SCALE: NONE DWG. SIZE: B
<> -+ 1
and 2540 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit Com Black 3 7
protected. NOTE: Sustained reverse
+VDC White 1 2
voltage may result in permanent
damage. A Brown 4 1
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; A' Yellow -- 3
BS EN50081‑2; BS EN61000-4-2;
BS EN61000-4-3; BS EN61000-4-6; B Red 2 4
BS EN500811 B' Green -- 5
Quadrature ��67.5° electrical or better is typical, Z Orange 5 6
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at temperatures > 99° C Z' Blue -- 8
Waveform Symmetry ��180°(±18°) electrical (single channel encoder) Shield Bare* -- --
Accuracy �� Within 0.017° mechanical or 1 arc-minute
*CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal case.
from true position (for CPR > 189) †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield.
**CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to M12 connector coupling nut.
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM. Higher speeds may be REVISIONS
achievable;- contact Customer Service. LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
- INITIAL RELEASE
Shaft Material �� Stainless Steel
Shaft Tolerance �� +0.0000/-0.0004" [+0.000/-0.010 mm]
Radial Shaft Load �� 5 lb max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m
bearing life of 1.2 x 1010 revolutions Incremental Signals
Axial Shaft Load �� 5 lb max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for INCREMENTAL SIGNALS
bearing life of 1.2 x 1010 revolutions

OUTPUT A
Starting Torque �� IP50 0.05 oz-in
OUTPUT A
IP65 0.4 oz-in
IP66 0.8 oz-in
Housing �� Stainless steel fibers in a high OUTPUT B
temperature nylon composite
Wheel Width �� 0.25"
OUTPUT B
Environmental gated to A = 180°
Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C INDEX Z
ungated approx. = 270°

INDEX Z
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz gated to A = 180°
ungated approx. = 270° Note: Rising edge of
Shock �� 80 g @ 11 ms duration Chan. U occurs within
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP65 or IP66 available CLOCKWISE
COMMUTATION SIGNALS ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE SHAFT SIDE.
±1° mechanical
to center of Index Z.
NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES.
OUTPUT U
Waveform shown with optional complementary signals
OUTPUT U A, B, Z for HV output only.
120°
OUTPUT V
OUTPUT V
1-800-366-5412
120°
• www.encoder.com • [email protected] 29
OUTPUT W
M o d e l T R 2 T r u - T r a C ™ with Rack and Pinion Gearing
Features
Encoder with Rack-and-Pinion Gear Integrated into One Compact Unit
Easily Installed in a Vertical, Horizontal or Upside Down Orientation
Operates at Speeds up to 400 Feet per Minute
Spring Loaded Torsion Arm Eliminates Gear Backlash
Integrated Module Simplifies Your System Design
The TR2 Tru-Trac™ is a versatile solution for tracking velocity, position, or
distance in almost any application and features an integrated encoder with
a rack-and-pinion gear assembly. Using the rack-and-pinion gear system,
encoder readings can be obtained with repeatable positioning, providing
excellent accuracy. Racks can be ordered in varying lengths, and with the
accessory spacer block, multiple lengths of rack can be joined for easy
installation. The spring loaded torsion arm provides easily adjustable torsion
load, giving the TR2 all the flexibility and maneuverability of the original
TR1 Tru-Trac™. It can be installed in a horizontal, vertical, or upside down
position. The threaded shaft on the TR2's pivot axis is field reversible,
providing mounting access from either side. And the durable conductive
composite housing material reduces static build up.
Common Applications
X-Y Tables, Gantry Systems, Packaging Machinery, Cut-to-Length, Printing,
Labeling, Document Handling, Machine Shop Equipment
M o d e l TR2 T r u-T r a c™ O r d e r i n g G u i d e

Leave Blank for Standard Options
-20° to 85°C Std IP50 Std None Std
TR2 D1 R4 0800 N V1 A OC F00
MODEL CYCLES PER Input OUTPUT TYPE Operating CERTIFICATION

TR2 Tru-TracTM REVOLUTION Voltage OC Open Collector Temperature None (Std)
See Resolution Chart V1 5 to 28 VDC PP Push-Pull -20° to 85° C (Std) CE CE Marked 9
Below HV Line Driver4 T1 -40° to 85° C
Price adder >1999 PU Pull-Up T2 -20° to 100° C
Resistor 3,5
PIVOT SHAFT OD Open Collector MAXIMUM SEALING
MOUNTING1 with Differential FREQUENCY IP50 (Std)
R4 Right side 1/4-20 thread Outputs Standard S2 IP65
L4 Left side 1/4-20 thread F3 Extended S3 IP66
R6 Right side M6 thread NUMBER OF CHANNELS2 See Specifications
L6 Left side M6 thread
A Channel A
Channel A Leads B CONNECTOR TYPE6
PINION GEAR
Q Quadrature A & B F00 18" Cable 7 (Std)
D1 40 Tooth Pinion Gear for Stainless Steel Rack R Quadrature A & B with Index
D2 40 Tooth Pinion Gear for Flexible Rack F01 12" Cable
19 No Pinion, 1/4" Shaft Channel B Leads A3 F02 24" Cable
20 No Pinion, 6 mm Shaft K Reverse Quadrature A & B F03 36" Cable
D Reverse Quadrature A & B M00 2M Cable 8
with Index J00 18" Cable with 5-pin M124
K00 18" Cable with 8-pin M12
M o d e l TR 2 T r u-T r a C ™ C P R Op t i o n s NOTES:
0001 thru 0189* 0198 0200 0250 0256 0300 0315 0360 1 See mechanical drawing. Shaft is reversible in the field.
0400 0500 0512 0580 0600 0750 0800 1000 1024
3 Reverse Quadrature not available with Pull-Up Resistor Output Type.
1200 1250 1500 1800 2000 2048 2500 2540 3000 4 Line Driver output not available with 5-pin M12 connector. Additional cable lengths available.
3600 4000 4096 5000 6000 7200 8192 10,000 Please consult Customer Service.
5 With Input Voltage above 16 VDC, operating temperature is limited to 85° C.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer 6 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
Service to determine all currently available values. Special disk resolutions Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see
are available upon request and may be subject to a one time NRE fee. Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com..
Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.
8 For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length expressed in meters.
Example: M06 = 6 meters of cable.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
-- INITIAL RELEASE 9/06
M o d e l TR2 T r u-T r a C ™ M o d e l TR 2 T r u- T r a c ™
40 TOOTH, 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH PINION TORQUE ADJUSTMENT
Sp e c i f i c at i o n s CABLE LENGTH
D D
Ø1.2732 PITCH CIRCLE, 4.000 PITCH CIRCUMFERENCE UNDER RUBBER CAP
18" [457] STANDARD
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures up "L" "R"
to 85° C 4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures SIDE SIDE
between 85° C to 100° C
5/32” [4.0]
Input Current �� 100 mA max (65 mA typical) with no HEX SOCKET 1.00 1/4-20 or M6 THREADS AVAILABLE
C SHAFT [25.4] Ø 1.71 [43.4]
output load
C
Ø0.2498 2.50 [63.5] 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH RACK
or [Ø5.995] 3.13 [79.6] 1.5 [38]
Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in AVAILABLE TYPICAL 6-32 UNC-2B 0.25 DEEP
quadrature with channel A leading B for
0.50 [12.7] 0.188 [4.78] All 4.00
dimensions are in
TYP. SPACING inches with 0.4432
a tolerance
[11.257] of
0.24 [6.0]
FACE WIDTH
"L" SIDE +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwisePITCH
specified.
LINE
clockwise shaft rotation, as viewed from Ø0.147 THRU
Metric dimensions are given in brackets [mm].
3.00 TYP. SPACING 0.475
the wheel side. See Waveform Diagram. [12.06]
0.740 [18.80]
Output Types �� Open Collector- 20 mA max per channel
Reso lu t0.218
i o[5.54]
n s – English0.230
B B
0.100 [2.54]
Units
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 2.2K ohm 0.60 [15.2] SEE ORDERING GUIDE [5.84]
"R" SIDE FOR AVAILABLE LENGTHS
internal resistor, 20 mA max per channel trac02 Inches per Pulses per Disc Cycles per
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel W i r i n g Ta b l e Pulse Inch Revolution
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table 0.01 100 400
Index �� Once per revolution. provided with cable. 0.005 200 800
0190 to 10,000 CPR: Gated to output A. A Trim back and insulate unused wires. 0.004 250 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
1000ENCODER PR0DUCTS COMPANY
E
P
C
A
0001 to 0189 CPR: Ungated Gland Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 0.002 500
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2000
APPROVALS
DRAWN
NNP
DATE
8/25/06
NAME AND TITLE
Model TR2
See Waveform Diagram. Function Wire Color M12** M12**

ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
0.001 1000 - 2000*

09/01/06 TOLERANCES
trac-02 DWG. NO. REV.

+ .005
-
DECIMAL MFG ENG
0.0005 2000 -- 2000**

PREV. ASSEM.
Com
+ .01
Black 3 7 PART NUMBER ANGULAR

+1
QUAL ENG
SCALE: NONE DWG. SIZE: B
SHEET
1 OF 1
200 kHz for CPR 1 to 2540

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+VDC White 1 2 0.0004 2500 2500**

500 kHz for CPR 2541 to 5000 A Brown 4 1 0.0002 5000 2500**+
1 MHz for CPR 5001 to 10,000 A' Yellow -- 3 0.0001 10,000 2500**++
Extended Frequency Response (optional) is B Red 2 4 *Requires 2x external quadrature counting.
300 kHz for CPR 2000, 2048, 2500, & 2540 B' Green -- 5 **Requires 4x external quadrature counting.
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit +Requires 2x Interpolation.
Z Orange 5 6
protected. NOTE: Sustained reverse ++Requires 4x Interpolation.
Z' Blue -- 8
voltage may result in permanent damage. Shield Bare* -- -- R e s o lu t i o n s – Metric Units
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081‑2; mm Pulses Disc Cycles per
*CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to
BS EN61000-4-2; BS EN61000-4-3; internal case. per Pulse per mm Revolution
BS EN61000-4-6, BS EN500811 †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and
0.04 25 2540
braid shield.
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical, 0.02 50 2540*
**CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at temperatures > 99° C to M12 connector coupling nut.
REVISIONS 0.01 100 2540**
*Requires 2x external quadrature counting.
Waveform Symmetry ��180°(±18°) electrical (single channel encoder) - INITIAL RELEASE
**Requires 4x external quadrature counting.
from true position (for CPR>189) Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m pinion gear for
Incremental Signals
Mechanical INCREMENTAL SIGNALS F l e xib l e R a c k
Radial Shaft Load �� 5 lb max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for 0.1250 0.188 [4.78] 0.1250 0.125 [3.18]
OUTPUT A FACE WIDTH
bearing life of 1.2 x 1010 revolutions OUTPUT A
FACE WIDTH
0.125 FACE WIDTH PINION
FOR FLEXIBLE RACK
Axial Shaft Load �� 5 lb max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for
bearing life of 1.2 x 1010 revolutions 6-32 UNC-2B THRU 6-32 UNC-2B THRU
OUTPUT B 2X @ 90 0 2X @ 90 0
Starting Torque �� IP50 0.05 oz-in 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH RACK
IP65 0.4 oz-in 40 TOOTH, 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH PINION
6-32 UNC-2B 0.25
DEEP
40 TOOTH, 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH PINION
1.2732 PITCH CIRCLE, 4.000 PITCH CIRCUMFERENCE
IP66 0.8 oz-in 4.00 TYP. SPACING 0.4432 [11.257]
OUTPUT B PITCH LINE 0.118 [3.00] MOLDED
Housing �� Stainless steel fibers in a high temperature gated to A = 180°
0.147 THRU
0.475 0.130 [3.30] FOR 200 P
3.00 TYP. SPACING
nylon composite INDEX Z
ungated approx. = 270° [12.06] R.02 0.059 [1.50] 1/10 CIRC
[0.5]
Weight �� 5 oz typical INDEX Z
1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH RACK
2X
gated to A = 180°
TOTAL LENG
6-32 UNC-2B 0.25 DEEP 0.218 [5.54] 0.230
Environmental 4.00 TYP. SPACING ungated approx. = 270° 0.4432 [11.257] Note: Rising edge of
SEE ORDERING GUIDE [5.84] 0.315 [8.00] - SEE ORD
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM PITCHTHELINESHAFT SIDE Chan. U occurs within
0.118 [3.00]
0.2498 THRU
MOLDED FLEXIBLE RACK
Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C 0.147 THRU
COMMUTATION
0.2498
SIGNALS[6.345]
THRU
0.475
±1° mechanical
FOR AVAILABLE LENGTHS
to center of Index Z. [6.345]
0.130 [3.30]
NOTE: ALL SPACING
3.00 TYP. DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES. FOR 200 PRESSURE ANGLE PINION
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing Waveform shown with optional complementary signals
[12.06] R.02 0.059 [1.50] 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH
OUTPUT U [0.5]
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz A, B, Z for HV output
PRECISIONonly.
AGMA 10 PINION FOR RIGID RACK 0.125 FACE WIDTH PINION FOR FLEXIBLE RACK
2X
OUTPUT U TOTALTRACKLENGTH RACK+/- 0.5%
Shock �� 80 g @ 11 ms duration 0.218 [5.54] 0.230 TRAC-GEARS 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH RACK - SEE ORDER GUIDE -
SEE ORDERING GUIDE [5.84] 0.4432 [11.257] 0.315 [8.00]
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP65 or IP66 available FOR AVAILABLE LENGTHS
120° 1/10 CIRCULAR
PITCH LINE 6-32 UNC-2B 0.25 DEEP
pi n i o n g e a r f o r S ta i n l e s s S t e e l R a c k PITCH SPACER BLOCK
4.00 TYP.0.475
SPACING 0.4432 [11.257]
Mechanical - Stainless Steel Rack OUTPUT V
1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH RACK
0.147 THRU [12.06]
PITCH LINE
6-32 UNC-2B 0.25 DEEP 0.475
Max Linear Speed �� 400 Feet Per Minute. Speeds over 200 OUTPUT V 0.1250 0.188 [4.78] 3.00 TYP. SPACING
TRACK RACK4.00 TYP. SPACING 0.1250 0.125 [3.18] [11.257]
0.4432 [12.06] R.02
FPM require lubricant, such as MoS2 FACE WIDTH
120°[11.257] 0.147 THRU 0.230 PITCH LINE
FACE WIDTH
[0.5]
0.4432 1.90 0.475
paste, to reduce gearing wear. Higher 1/10 CIRCULAR
OUTPUT W PITCH LINE
[5.84]
3.00 TYP. SPACING
[12.06] R.02 2X
PITCH SPACER BLOCK 0.218 [5.54] 0.230 [0.5]
speeds may be achievable, contact 0.475
SEE ORDERING GUIDE6-32 UNC-2B THRU [5.84] 2X
6-32 UNC-2B THRU [12.06]
Customer Service. 2X @ 90 0 FOR AVAILABLE
0.218 LENGTHS
[5.54] 2X @ 90 0.230 0
[5.84]
Rack Material �� 303 Stainless Steel OUTPUT W SEE ORDERING GUIDE
FOR AVAILABLE LENGTHS
0.230
Gearing Tolerance �� AGMA 10, 20 degree pressure angle teeth 1.90 40 TOOTH, 1/10ROTATION
CLOCKWISE CIRCULAR PITCH PINION
1.2732 PITCH CIRCLE, 4.000[5.84]
PITCH CIRCUMFERENCE
40 TOOTH, 1/10 CIRCULAR PITCH PINION
Accuracy �� ±0.0005 inch/inch max accumulated error 15wave NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES TRAC
Repeatability �� ±0.0001 inch PRECISION AGMA 10 PINION 0.4432 [11.257] TRACK RACK
FOR RIGID RACK 1/10 CIRCULAR
PITCH[11.257]
0.4432 LINE
PITCH SPACER BLOCK
Mechanical - Flexible Rack ISSUE DATE
1/10 CIRCULAR
PITCH SPACER BLOCK
PITCH LINE 0.475
Max Linear Speed �� 200 Feet Per Minute 04/22/04
TOLERANCE E
P
C ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY [12.06]
0.475
[12.06]
Rack Material �� Acetal NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
LINE DRIVER AND COMM.
+
- .005 DR SKW 7/24/03
Gearing Geometry �� 20° pressure angle teeth 0.2498 THRU OUTPUT WAVEFORM 1.90 0.2498 THRU
0.230
0.230
1.90 [6.345] [5.84]
Accuracy �� ±0.002 inch/inch max accumulated error [6.345] DWG NUMBER REV.
[5.84]
.01
15wave
+
- QC
-
Repeatability �� ±0.001 inch for Flexible Rack PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG
+
- .1° PRJ ENG PRECISIONDWG
AGMA A FOR RIGID RACKSCALE
SIZE 10 PINION N/A SHEET 1 1OF 0.125 FACE WIDTH PINION FOR FLEXIBLE RACK
1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] TRAC-GEARS 31

Model TR3 Heavy Duty Tru-Trac™
Features
Integrated Heavy Duty Encoder and Measuring Wheel In One
Spring Loaded Torsion Arm for Quick Wheel Pressure Adjustments
Easily Installed in a Vertical, Horizontal or Upside-Down Orientation
Operates Over a Variety of Surfaces at Speeds up to 3000 Feet per Minute
Integrated Module Simplifies System Design, Reducing Cost
The TR3 Heavy Duty Tru-Trac™ is an integrated, heavy duty encoder and
spring loaded measuring wheel assembly all in one unit. Available in both
single or optional dual-wheel format, the TR3 Heavy Duty Tru-Trac™ is a
versatile solution for tracking velocity, position or distance over a wide
variety of surfaces in many industrial applications. Its spring loaded torsion
arm provides a simple-to-adjust torsion load, allowing the TR3 Heavy
Duty Tru-Trac™ to be mounted in any orientation, even upside-down. The
TR3 Heavy Duty Tru-Trac™ housing is an all metal work horse, specifically
designed to take on your toughest application environments at operating
speeds up to 3000 feet per minute. Just one look and it’s easy to see the TR3
Heavy Duty Tru-Trac™ is the ideal solution for countless applications.
Common Applications
Lumber, Corrugated, Converting, Metal Roll Forming, Paper Monitoring,
Glue Dispensing, Linear Material Monitoring, Conveyor Systems, Printing,
Labeling, Mining, Construction
M o d e l TR3 H e avy D u t y T r u-T r a c™ O r d e r i n g G u i d e


-20° to 85° C Std IP50 Std None Std
TR3 U3 A 0500 N V1 A OC F00
MODEL CYCLES PER OUTPUT TYPE Connector Operating CERTIFICATION

TR3 Tru-Trac™ REVOLUTION OC Open Collector Orientation Temperature None (Std)
See CPR Options below PP Push-Pull (See Drawing) -20° to 85° C (Std) CE CE Marked 10
Price adder >1999 HV Line Driver3 Standard Rear Exit T1 -40° to 85° C9
PU Pull-Up L1 60° From Standard T2 -20° to 100° C
WHEEL INput Voltage Resistor 2,4 L2 120° From Standard
CONFIGURATION V1 5 to 28 VDC OD Open Collector L3 180° From Standard SEALING
A Single with Differential L4 240° From Standard IP50 (Std)
B Double Outputs L5 300° From Standard S3 IP66
S4 IP67
WHEEL TYPE & CIRCUMFERENCE CONNECTOR TYPE5 MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF CHANNELS1
U3 Urethane 12" cir F00 18" Cable 6 (Std) FREQUENCY
A Channel A
U5 Urethane 300 mm cir F01 12" Cable Standard
K3 Knurled 12" cir Channel A Leads B F3 Extended
F02 24" Cable
K5 Knurled 300 mm cir Q Quadrature A & B See Specifications
F03 36" Cable
25 No Wheel 3/8" (0.375") Shaft R Quadrature A & B with Index
M00 2M Cable7
A3 Hard Anodized Knurled 12" cir Channel B Leads A2 SMW 6-pin MS8
A5 Hard Anodized Knurled 1/3 M cir K Reverse Quadrature A & B SMY 7-pin MS8
D Reverse Quadrature A & B SMX 10-pin MS8
with Index SMJ 5-pin M123,8
SMK 8-pin M128
NOTES:
M o d e l TR 3 T r u- T r a c ™ C P R Op t i o n s 1 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating or phase relationship options.
2 Reverse Quadrature not available with Pull-Up Resistor Output Type.
0001 thru 0189* 0198 0200 0250 0256 0300 0315 0360 3 Line Driver not available with 5-pin M12 connector.
0400 0500 0512 0580 0600 0750 0800 1000 1024 4 With Input Voltage above 16 VDC, operating temperature is limited to 85° C.
1200 1250 1500 1800 2000 2048 2500 2540 3000 5 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
3600 4000 4096 5000 6000 7200 8192 10,000 Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams
at encoder.com.
*Contact Customer Service For Availability
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.
Service to determine all currently available values. Special disk resolutions are 7 For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length expressed in meters.
available upon request and may be subject to a one-time NRE fee.
8 Body Mount connector options only available with connector orientation L1 thru L5.
9 Rated to -40° C during encoder operation. Storage and startup below -25° C not recommended.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
REV. DESCRIPTION
8 7 6 5 4 00 PRELIMINARY RELEASE3
01 ADDED A LEADS B, REMOVED 12" CIRC. STD
REV.
00 PREL
01 ADD
M o d e l TR3 T r u-T r a c™ M o d e l TR3 H e avy D u t y T r u- T r a c™

Sp e c i f i c at i o n s A LEADS B FOR OPTIONAL DOUBLE WHEEL
CW ROTATION
Electrical OPTIONAL DOUBLE WHEEL
A LEADS B FOR
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures up to 85° C CWFOR MOUNTING ON
ROTATION
A Ø0.625 +0.000
-0.005 SHAFT
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures between FOR MOUNTING ON
85° CC to 100° C A Ø0.625 +0.000
-0.005 SHAFT
Input Current ��100 mA max (65 mA typical) with no output load

Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves Cin quadrature 12" CIRC. 1/2-20, .500" DEEP
WHEEL SHOWN
with channel A leading B for clockwise shaft
12" CIRC. 0.75 [19.0]1/2-20, .500" DEEP
rotation, as viewed from the shaft side. (For 5.25 [133.4] WHEEL SHOWN
TR3-STD
3.35 [85.2]
units with dual wheels, orient the encoder 6.25 [158.8] 4.00 [101.6] 0.75 [19.0]
5.25 [133.4]
so that the label is readable). See Waveform 2.50 [63.5] TR3-STD
3.35 [85.2]
6.25 [158.8] 4.00 [101.6]
Diagram. BODY DIA. 5/32" HEX SOCKET
FOR SHAFT CLAMP
Output Types �� Open Collector – 20 mA max per channel 2.50 [63.5]
BODY DIA. 5/32" HEX SOCKET
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channel FOR SHAFT CLAMP
B
internal resistor, 20 mA max per Bchannel
Line Driver
8 – 20 mA max per channel 7 6 5 4 3 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 REVI1
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) REV. REVISIONSDESCRIPTIO
REV. 00 DESCRIPTION
PROTOTYPE
Index �� Once per revolution.8 7 6 5 4 3 00 PROTOTYPE
201 MOVED SHAFT DIMENSION, REM 1
01 MOVED SHAFT DIMENSION,REVISIONS
REMOVED STRAY MARK
0190 to 10,000 CPR: Gated to output A REV. DESCRIPTION
00 PROTOTYPE
0001 to 0189 CPR: Ungated 01 MOVED SHAFT DIMENSION, REMOVED STRAY MARK
See Waveform
D
Diagram.
D
Max. Frequency �� Standard Frequency Response is THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
200 kHz
A Dfor CPR 1 to 2540
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED M o d e l TR3 M o u n t i n g Bracket APPROVALS DATE
www.encoder.com
500 kHz for CPR 2541 to 5000 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

DRAWN
SBR 09/25/09
NAME AND TITLE
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
TR3 STANDARD CATALOG VIEWS
1 MHz for 1.CPRMATERIAL:
5001 to 10,000 A NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
ISSUE DATE:
TOLERANCES
CHECKED
2. FINISH: NONE
xx/xx/xx
2.50
APPROVALS
3.00 [76.2] NEXT ASSEM. DECIMAL RESP ENG
Extended Frequency Response

3. BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES (optional) is [63.5]
XXX -+ .005 DWG. NO.
TR3-STD SBR
DRAWN
1. MATERIAL: 1.50 [38.1]

3.00 [76.2] 2.50 PREV. ASSEM.
XXX
DECIMAL
-+ .01
MFG ENG
ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
300 kHz for CPR 2000, 2048, 2500, and2. 2540 FINISH: NONE 3.00
1.00 [76.2]
1.50 [38.1] [25.4] 2.501.75
[63.5] PART NUMBER
<>
ANGULAR
-+ 1
QUAL ENG xx/xx/xx
NEXT ASSEM.NONE
SCALE:
TOLERANCES
DWG. SIZE:
DECIMAL BRESP ENG
S
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit 4 [44.4]

[63.5] -+ .005
3. BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES 1.00
6 5 XXX
7 1.50+0.000
[38.1] 3 2 1
[25.4] 1.75 PREV. ASSEM. DECIMAL MFG ENG
Ø0.625 -0.005
1.00 [25.4] 1.751.25 XXX -+ .01
protected. NOTE: Sustained reverse voltage [ Ø15.86 +0.01
] [44.4]
[44.4][31.7] PART NUMBER ANGULAR
-+ 1
QUAL ENG
+0.000 -0.13 <>
may result in permanent damage. Ø0.625Ø0.625 7 +0.000

-0.005 -0.005
6 5 1.25
Ø0.281
1.25 4 3
C [ Ø15.86
[
+0.01 +0.01
-0.13 ]-0.13 ]
Ø15.86 [31.7]
[Ø7.14]
[31.7]
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081‑2;
Ø0.281
Ø0.281
C BS EN61000-4-2;
C BS EN61000-4-3; THRU
[Ø7.14] 5x
[Ø7.14]
BS EN61000-4-6, BS EN500811 THRU 5x
8.95 3.50 THRU 5x
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical, [227.3] [88.9]
8.95 3.50 TR3-BRACKET
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at temperatures > 99° C 8.95[227.3] 3.50
[88.9]
[227.3] [88.9] TR3-BRACKET
Waveform Symmetry ��180°(±18°) electrical (single channel encoder)
TR3-BRACKET
from true position (for CPR>189). ADJUSTABLE 4.50
B
HEIGHT [114.3]
Mechanical 3.25
ADJUSTABLE 4.50
B [82.6]
Max Linear Speed �� 3000 FPM not to exceed a maximum shaft 3.25 HEIGHT [114.3]
B speed of 6000 RPM. [82.6] ADJUSTABLE
1.00 4.50
3.25 HEIGHT
[25.4] [114.3]
Shaft Material �� Stainless Steel 1.00
Radial Shaft Load �� Up to 10 lb max. Controlled by spring torsion [82.6]
[25.4]
feature 1.00
Starting Torque �� 1.0 oz-in typical with IP50 seal [25.4]
2.5 oz-in typical with IP66 seal and single wheel
4.0 oz-in typical with IP66 seal and dual wheel THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
A NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED www.encod
7.0 oz-in typical with IP67 seal and single wheel APPROVALS DATE NAME AND TITLE
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION DRAWN
14.0 oz-inA typical with
1.NOTES:
MATERIAL:IP67
UNLESS seal and
OTHERWISE dual wheel
SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES SBR 12/29/09 TR3 ACCESSORY
www.encod
BRACKET
ISSUE DATE: TOLERANCES CHECKED
APPROVALS DATE NAME AND TITLE
Housing �� Powder coated2.3. aluminum
FINISH: NONE
BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES
xx/xx/xx
NEXT ASSEM. DECIMAL RESP
DIMENSIONS
XXX
DRAWN
ARE-+ IN.005INCHES
ENG DWG. NO.
SBR
1. MATERIAL:
Wheel Width �� 3/4" standard 2. FINISH: NONE PREV.
ISSUE ASSEM.
DATE: TOLERANCES MFG ENG 12/29/09 TR3 ACCESSORY
DECIMAL CHECKED BRACKET
TR3-BRACKET
XXX
PARTxx/xx/xx
NUMBERTHIRD-+ ANGLE
ANGULAR
.01
DECIMAL PROJECTION
RESP
QUAL ENG
ENG
NEXT
<>XXXASSEM. -+ 1.005 SCALE:
DWG. NONE
NO. DWG. SIZE:
B
Weight ��
A 2.5 lb typical
NOTES: with
3. BREAK
UNLESS OTHERWISE single wheel
ALLSPECIFIED
SHARP EDGES
7 6 5 4 3PREV. ASSEM. DECIMAL MFG ENG 2 TR3-BRACKET 1
3.0 lb typical with dual wheel
XXX
PART NUMBERANGULAR-+ .01 QUAL ENG APPROVALS DATE NAME AN
<> + 1 DRAWN SCALE:NONE DWG. SIZE: B
1. MATERIAL: 7 6 5 4 3
-
2SBR 12/29/09 TR3 ACC1
ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
Environmental 2. FINISH: NONE xx/xx/xx TOLERANCES
NEXT ASSEM. DECIMAL RESP ENG DWG. NO.
3. BREAK
Storage Temp �� -25° ALL SHARP
to 85° C EDGES XXX -+ .005 MFG ENG
PREV. ASSEM. DECIMAL
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing XXX -+ .01 QUAL ENG
PART NUMBERANGULAR
<> -+ 1 SCALE:NON
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz 7 6 5 4 3 2
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP66 or IP67 optional Optional Accessory Mounting Bracket
(stock #176389-01) for TR3 Heavy Duty
Tru-Trac™ can be ordered separately.

Model TR3 Heavy Duty Tru-Trac™
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
00 PRELIMINARY RELEASE DATE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
D D
M o d e l TR3 D o u b l e W h e e l P iv oT
D D
ALLOWS UNIT TO ROTATE FREELY TO MAINTAIN EQUAL

PRESSURE ON BOTH WHEELS,
ALLOWS ACCOMODATING
UNIT TO UNEVEN/
ROTATE FREELY TO MAINTAIN EQUAL
ANGLED SURFACES AND MOUNTING
PRESSURE MISALIGNMENT
ON BOTH WHEELS, ACCOMODATING UNEVEN/
ANGLED SURFACES AND MOUNTING MISALIGNMENT
C PIVOT JOINT C
C PIVOT JOINT C
7.5 7.5
B B
B B
TR3-PIVOT
TR3-PIVOT

A
A www.encoder.com
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
APPROVALS DATE
NAME AND TITLE
A
DRAWN
A DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES SBR 12/28/09 www.encoder.com
TR3 DOUBLE WHEEL PIVOT
1. MATERIAL:
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ISSUE DATE:
TOLERANCES
CHECKED
DATE
2. FINISH: NONE
xx/xx/xx APPROVALS
NEXT ASSEM.
DRAWN DECIMAL RESP ENG NAME AND TITLE
TR3-PIVOT
DWG. NO. REV.
3. BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES XXX

SBR -+ .00512/28/09 TR3 DOUBLE WHEEL PIVOT
1. MATERIAL: PREV. ASSEM.
CHECKED
DECIMAL MFG ENG
00
ISSUE DATE:
TOLERANCES XXX -+ .01
2. FINISH: NONE
xx/xx/xx PART NUMBER ANGULAR QUAL ENG SHEET
NONE B 1 OF 1
NEXT ASSEM. DECIMAL <> RESP ENG
-+ 1 SCALE: DWG. SIZE:
TR3-PIVOT
DWG. NO. REV.
3. BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES 7 6 5 4 XXX - + .0053 2 1

00
XXX -+ .01
8 7 6
PART NUMBER ANGULAR QUAL ENG 5 B
4 SHEET 3 2 1
NONE 1 OF 1
<> -+ 1 SCALE: DWG. SIZE:
REVISIONS
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 REV. DESCRIPTION DATE
Optional Accessory Double Pivot Kit (stock #176391-01) for

TR3 Heavy Duty Tru-Trac™ can be ordered separately. M o d e l TR 3 C o n n e c to r O r i e n tat i o n
C
STANDARD
L1 REAR EXIT
L2
60°
L3
TR3-ORIENT
B
L5 REVISIONS
L4 DATE
LTR DESCRIPTION
- INITIAL RELEASE
W i r i n g Ta b l e Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m
For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable. Incremental Signals
INCREMENTAL SIGNALS
Trim back and insulate unused wires. A
www.encoder.com
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED APPROVALS DATE
OUTPUT A DRAWN
NAME AND TITLE

SBR
8-pin 10-pin
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES 012/28/09 TR3 CABLE ORIENTATIONS
1. MATERIAL:
7-pin 2.MSFINISH:7-pin
NONE MS 6-pin MS
ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
TOLERANCES
OUTPUT A xx/xx/xx
Function Wire Color M12** M12** MS TR3-ORIENT

DWG. NO. R
3. BREAK ALL -+ .005

PU,SHARP EDGES
XXX
HV, OD PP, OC PU, PP, OC PREV. ASSEM.

XXX
DECIMAL
-+ .01
MFG ENG
0
NONE B 1 OF 1
Com Black 3 7 F F F A,7 F 6 OUTPUT B 5 4 3 2 1
+VDC White 1 2 D D D B
A Brown 4 1 A A A D
A' Yellow -- 3 H C -- -- OUTPUT B
B Red 2 4 B B B E gated to A = 180°
B' Green -- 5 I E -- -- INDEX Z
Z Orange 5 6 C -- C C INDEX Z
gated to A = 180°
Z' Blue -- 8 J -- -- -- ungated approx. = 270° Note: Rising edge of
Chan. U occurs within
Case -- -- -- G G G -- ±1° mechanical
CLOCKWISE
COMMUTATION SIGNALSROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE SHAFT SIDE to center of Index Z.
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- (For units with dual wheels, orient the encoder so
OUTPUT Uthat the label is readable).
*CEOption: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal case.
†Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield. OUTPUT U
**CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to M12 connector coupling nut. A, B, Z for HV output only.
120°
OUTPUT V
OUTPUT V
120°
34 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] OUTPUT W
measuring wheels
Increasing the Versatility of Encoders
While using an encoder with a measuring wheel has many advantages, it
can also be challenging to assemble and put into use. EPC has decades of
experience helping customers solve their linear measurement needs with
our Tru-Trac™ series, a family of integrated units that bring together a rotary
encoder, precision measuring wheel, and spring-loaded torsion arm into a
single, easy-to-use package. See pages 126 - 128 for measuring wheels
and other measuring wheel options.
Size/Speed A selection of measuring wheels available from EPC, including two

different urethane, hard anodized knurled aluminum, and rubber insert
The wheel's circumference should give the best accuracy possible within
the mounting constraints. EPC offers many different measuring wheel sizes,
including, but not limited to: 6", 12", 1/3 meter, 200 mm. Also, make sure the encoder can handle both the mechanical and electrical speed
of your application. For Instance, EPC Models TR1 and TR3 can handle applications with linear speeds up to 3000 feet per minute and
electrical frequencies up to 1 MHz.
Selecting the Proper Measuring Wheel Surface

When selecting a measuring wheel surface, consider these general guidelines:
• Wheel material will expand and contract with temperature variations.
• Wheels wear down with usage.
• A harder wheel surface generally provides greater durability, but less traction.
• Dual wheels result in twice the traction, reducing the potential for wheel slippage (dual wheels only available with Model TR3).
Encoder Products Company offers numerous measuring wheels in different sizes, all made of high grade aluminum alloy. There are four
different contact surfaces available.
Rubber Insert
Rubber provides better traction in most applications, but also may wear faster than other materials, depending on the application. The
nature of replaceable O-rings allows easy completion of regularly scheduled maintenance. Rubber insert wheels are good for materials
such as (but not limited to): paper, film, foil, hard plastic, and other smooth materials.
Polyurethane
This smooth, versatile material comes in different durometer ratings (that is, degrees of hardness). Polyurethane is good for materials such
as (but not limited to): metal pipe, sandpaper, matting, cardboard/packaging, belting, insulated wire, metal, etc.
Knurled Aluminum
Knurled aluminum offers good traction, but should not be used with delicate materials. It is a good choice for materials such as (but not
limited to): metal pipe, sandpaper, matting, cardboard/packaging, belting, insulated wire, metal, coarse fabric, cloth tape, rubber, rough
wood, carpet, foam, insulation, or other rugged materials that won’t damage easily from constant contact with the wheel.
Hard Anodized Knurled Aluminum

Anodizing hardens the aluminum and prevents corrosion, so these wheels are good for harsh environments where there may be washdown
or exposure to corrosive elements. These wheels are also not meant for delicate materials, and are excellent for materials such as (but not
limited to): coarse fabric, wood (i.e., lumber cut-to-length), or other durable materials.
For long service life, choose a measuring wheel encoder that will withstand the environment in which it will be exposed. All measuring
wheels, like EPC’s Accu-Coder™ brand encoders, are manufactured to EPC’s exacting standards, and feature EPC’s 3-year standard
product warranty, ensuring years of trouble free use.

Model LCE
Features
Low Cost Linear Solution
Resolutions from 2-500 Cycles per Inch
Cable Measurement 0 - 50 inches
The Linear Cable Encoder (LCE) provides a low cost alternative for obtaining
accurate linear measurements. As opposed to typical rotary shaft style
encoders, the LCE has a retractable stainless steel cable, allowing for
numerous measuring configurations. You can place the LCE away from harsh
environmental conditions, while still providing precise measurements, giving
the LCE an outstanding advantage over shaft-style encoders. Installation is
easy with a variety of cable exit directions, and perfect parallel alignment is
no longer necessary. The heart of the LCE is the popular Cube Accu-Coder™,
the original cube style encoder. The LCE provides a reliable digital pulse
train in either single channel or quadrature format, with resolutions down
to 0.002" per cycle. The small overall size, a variety of resolutions, and many
different connector types, makes the versatility of the LCE unbeatable.
Common Applications
Robotics, Extrusion Presses, Valve Positioning, Textile Machinery, Control
Gate Positioning
M o d e l LCE O r d e r i n g G u i d e
LCE01 1 002 Q PU S
MODEL CYCLES PER INCH OUTPUT TYPE

LCE01 Standard See chart below OC Open Collector
LCE02 IP65 (Industrial) Price adder for CPI >100 PU Pull-Up Resistor
PP Push-Pull
CABLE EXIT HV Line Driver1
1 Option 1
2 Option 2 CONNECTOR TYPE 2
3 Option 3 NUMBER OF CHANNELS S Standard 6-pin MS
4 Option 4 Q Quadrature A & B Y 7-pin MS
R Quadrature A & B with Index Z X 10-pin MS
J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)1
K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
G Gland Nut, 18" cable3
T Solder Terminal
B Solder Terminal with
Conduit Box
Model LCE features.a retractable stainless
steel cable at a standard length of 50".
Longer lengths may be available, please
contact Customer Services.
M o d e l LCE R e s o lu t i o n Ta b l e NOTES:
1 Line Driver not available with 5-pin M12 connector.
Cycles Per Inch 002 020 040 050 100 200 250 500 2 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.
Resolution 0.500" 0.050" 0.025" 0.020" 0.010" 0.005" 0.004" 0.002" com. For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information
or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
Contact Customer Service for other resolutions. 3 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length
expressed in feet. Example: G/6=6 feet of cable.

REVISIONS
LTR DESCRIPTION CHK DATE APPR DATE
M o d e l LCE S ta n da r d H o u s i n g (LCE01)
- INITIAL RELEASE
M o d e l LCE Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures up
to 85° C
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures
between 85° and 100° C
Input Current �� 80 mA maximum with no output load
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to100 kHz
Output Format �� Incremental – Square wave with channel
A leading B during linear extension
Output Type �� Open Collector- 250 mA max per
channel
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 1.5K
ohm internal resistor, 250 mA max per
REVISIONS
channel LTR DESCRIPTION CHK DATE APPR DATE
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channel M o d e l LCE I P 65 I n d u s t r i aTOLERANCE
l H o u s i nENCODER
g (LCE02) ISSUE DATE
- INITIAL RELEASE
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel PRODUCTS COMPANY

M/D/Y
E
P
C
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
+
- .005 DR SBR 5/6/03 STANDARD LCE CATALOG DWG.
Index �� Once per 5" cable extension or retraction THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER REV.
+
.01
LCE-STDCAT -
-
Max Frequency �� 0 to 125 kHz

QC
PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit EPC P/N -+ .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZE
B SCALE
NONE SHEET
1 OF
1
damage.
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical,
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at temperatures > 99° C
Mechanical
Full Stroke �� 50" standard. Longer measuring ranges
Length (FSL) may be available, please contact
Customer Service. All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
Finish �� Black powder coated aluminum
C a b l e Exi t Op t i o n s
ISSUE DATE
Accuracy �� ±0.10% of FSL M/D/Y
TOLERANCE E
P
Repeatability �� ±0.015% of FSL NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL
OptionalINDUSTRIAL
MountingLCE
DATE
Plate
NAME AND TITLE
+
- .005 DR SBR 5/6/03 CATALOG DWG.
Linear Resolution ��Up to 500 cycles per inch (0.002" per cycle) THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
Attaches to Standard or Industrial LCE in three
DWG NUMBER REV.
-+ .01
Cable Material �� 0.034" nylon coated stainless steel rope LCE-INDCAT
different orientations. Order Accessory Item -
QC
.1°
#176064-01. B
+
Cable Tension �� 20 oz maximum typical EPC P/N - PRJ ENG

NONE
DWG SIZE
1 1 SCALE SHEET OF
Life (cycles) �� 1,000,000 predicted at zero angle cable exit

Environmental
Sealing �� IP65 for Industrial LCE
Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s
7-pin 7-pin 6-pin MS 6-pin Term. Term
Gland Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 10-pin MS MS HV, No MS Block Block Line Driver and Push-Pull Open Collector and Pull-Up
Function Wire Color M12 M12 MS HV O, S, PP Index O, S, PP HV, No Index O, S, PP
Com Black 3 7 F F F A A, F 1 1, 6
+VDC Red 1 2 D D D B B 2 2
A White 4 1 A A A C D 3 4
A' Brown -- 3 H C -- D -- 4 -- CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED
FROM THE SHAFT SIDE
B Blue 2 4 B B B E E 5 5
B' Violet -- 5 I E -- F -- 6 --
Z Orange 5 6 C -- C -- C -- 3
Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- -- -- -- --
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE SHAFT SIDE
Case Green -- -- G G G -- -- -- --
Shield Bare -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Waveform shown with optional complementary
signals A, B, Z for HV output only.
*E-Cube only.

Specifying Output Types for
Incremental encoders
Choosing the correct number of channels and the correct output type for an encoder can be the determining factor in whether or not
a feedback system functions properly. There are four common output types to select from, and most of EPC’s encoder models can
be ordered with any of these four types. There are also some speciality output types, available on select models.
Determining What Output Type Your Application Needs

The receiving device determines the correct configuration of the encoder’s outputs. One type of output is not necessarily better than
another; it depends on the individual application and the controller being used with the encoder. For instance, if the controller calls
for “compatible NPN” output circuitry, a simple open-collector output type is the right choice. The circuit will be current sinking, and
the load on the controller side will pull up the encoder output to the desired voltage. In another example, if the controller is set up to
receive differential signals, for better noise immunity (especially at higher voltages), use an encoder with an HV differential line driver
output. Reference your controller’s manual for specific information on its requirements, and of course, EPC Technical Services is
here to help if you still have questions.
Common Output Types

1. “OC” NPN Open-Collector is a current sinking output and is useful for doing what is called level shifting. This is when the
encoder is powered with on e voltage level, and the output is pulled up externally to a different voltage level. For example, the
REVISIONS
DESCRIPTION DATE
encoder can be powered with 5 volts DC and theINITIAL
output can be pulled up to a 24 volt DC level.
LTR
REVISIONS
RELEASE LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
INITIAL RELEASE
e Driver Hook-up
2. “PU” Pull-Up is OR
CONTROLLER the same as the open-collector, but, as the name implies, it also contains an internal pull-up resistor to the
Typical Differential Line Driver Hook-up
positive supply voltage supplied to the encoder. (Not to be confused with a “sourcing” type output.) The amount of current that
COUNTER Controller or
Encoder Counter
+VDC +VDC
+VDC
Typical Push-Pull Electrical Hook-up
can be sourced with the output transistor in the off state is limited by the supply voltage and the value of the internal pull-up
A
A’ Encoder +VDC
Controller or
Counter
+VDC
resistor. Common values for the internal pull-up resistor used in encoder is between
Common
1,500 and 2,200 Ω. This type of output is
REVISIONS
A
used when the counter, or PLC does not have built-in provisions
LTR
to pull
INITIAL RELEASE
up the input circuitry.
DESCRIPTION DATE
Common
pical Differential Line Driver Hook-up +VDC +VDC +VDC

Typical Open Collector Hook-up
CONTROLLER OR OUTPUT Controller or
REVISIONS
Encoder
COUNTER Counter OUTPUT
+VDC OUTPUT
or Hook-up +VDC LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
+VDC A OUTPUT INITIAL RELEASE
CONTROLLER OR +VDC +VDC +VD
COUNTER COMMON COMMON
Typical Differential
CommonLine Driver Hook-up Pull-up Resistor OUTPUT
+VDC 500-2.2K OHM COMMON OUT
OUTPUT
Line Driver Controller or Push Pull or equivalent
Encoder +VDC
Counter Open CollectorOUTPUT
+VDC COMMON
COMMON Hook-up
Typical Push-Pull Electrical
A
Pull-Up Resistor Controller or COM
Push Pull
500-2.2K OHM
A’
NPN Electrical Hook-Up Encoder +VDC
OCLine Driver
Output Circuit Counter Open Collector
or equivalent +VDC
Common Typical Pull-Up Resistor Hook-up +VDC +VDC +VDC
Controller or A
Encoder +VDC Counter
OUTPUT +VDC
3. “PP” Push-Pull is sometimes referred to as a “totem-pole” type of output circuit. For our discussion here, we will treat them
+VDC +VDC
Common
OUTPUT OUTPUT 2.2K OHM 1.5K OHM
Typical Open Collector Hook-up A
OUTPUT OUT
tor Hook-up
equally. This is a combination
CONTROLLERof
COUNTER
OR sinking and sourcing outputs. When the output
Common
OUTPUT
+VDC is in the logic high state,
+VDC current is sourced
COMMON 2.2K OHM COMMON 1.5K OHM
to the load. When theOR output is in the logic low state, current is sinked fromOUTPUT thePushload. It suffers from OUTPUTlack of noise immunity,
Typical Open Collector Hook-up
+VDC Controller or COMMON COMMON COM
CONTROLLER Encoder Line Driver Pull Counter
however, because+VDC when the output is high (sourcing) whatever noise, ripple, etc., that is on the DC supply lines to the encoder
COUNTER +VDC
+VDCOpen Collector Pull Up Resistor 2 Pull Up Resistor 1
A
is directly dumped into the500-2.2K

input circuitry of the counter, PLC, or whatever the load. When the output is sinking (low state), the
Pull-Up Resistor +VDC +VDC +VDC
OHM
Common
or equivalent COMMON COMMON
Pull-up Resistor OUTPUT
noise immunity is the same as if the open-collector was used. 500-2.2K ISSUE
OHM DATE TOLERANCE OUTPUT OUTPUT
Pull Up Resistor2 Pull Up Resistor1
or equivalent OUTPUT ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL COMMON

INITIAL
COMMON
NAME AND TITLE
DATE COMMON
Line Driver Push Pull
TYPICAL HOOK-UPS Open Collector
PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL +VDC

CK +VDC
Typical Pull-Up Resistor Hook-up
ypical Pull Up Resistor Hook-up DWG NUMBER
Controller or 2.2K OHM
QC 1.5K OHM
Encoder +VDC Counter
CONTROLLER OR +VDC
PART NUMBER OUTPUT
MFG +VDC OUTPUT +VDC
COUNTER 2.2K OHM 1.5K OHM
A DWG SIZE SCALE NONE SHEET
+VDC OUTPUT OUTPUT
ISSUE DATE TOLERANCE

Common
COMMON COMMON
ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY COMMON COMMON
Pull Up Resistor2 Pull Up Resistor1
Pull Up Resistor 2 Pull Up Resistor 1
NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
PU Electrical Hook-Up PU Output Circuit
DR GMA 4/08/04
TYPICAL HOOK-UPS
PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK ISSUE DATE TOLERANCE
DWG NUMBER ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY REV.
QC

TYPICAL HOOK-UPS
DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
ISSUE DATE TOLERANCE PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER REV.
QC
REVISIONS
4. “HV” Differential Line Driver provides differential outputs, or complementary signals for noise immunity. It meets RS-422 LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
standards when operated at 5 volts DC. This type of output should be selected if the load device is set up to receive differential
INITIAL RELEASE
signals. The output lines are electrically balanced and if the proper balance between them is not maintained, ringing and
Typical Differential Line Driver Hook-up
spurious oscillations can occur onCONTROLLER

the lines.
COUNTER
OR
At higher frequencies it may cause false counting in the load device. Noise immunity
is obtained by the nature of what is called “common
+VDC
mode” rejection. (For more information, see white paper WP-2005: Noise
REVISIONS
Suppression of Differential Signals.)

LTR Remember that for each output channel theDATEencoder has, one additional wire in the cable
DESCRIPTION
N must be used for the complement signal. Also, for applications where there will be long lengths of interconnecting cable, which
INITIAL RELEASE
ver Hook-up
can degrade the signal, HV is the best option to ensure a clear signal.
Controller or
Counter
+VDC
Typical Push-Pull Electrical Hook-up +VDC
Controller or +VDC +VDC
Encoder Counter
+VDC
OUTPUT
+VDC
OUTPUT REVISIONS OUTPU
Typical Open Collector Hook-up A
OUTPUT
CONTROLLER
Common OR LTR DESCRIPTION
COUNTER COMMON COMMON
INITIAL RELEASE
+VDC COMMO
Typical Differential Line Driver Hook-up Open Collector
Hook-up
Controller or
PP Electrical Hook-up PP Output Circuit
Counter
Pull-Up Resistor CONTROLLER OR
N ENCODER 500-2.2K OHM COUNTER
+VDC +VDC
or equivalent +VDC
Specialty Output Types

A
A’ Pull-up Resistor
+VDC
OUTPUT
+VDC +VDC
OUTPUT
500-2.2K OHM OUTPUT REVISIONS
or equivalent
COMMON OUTPUT DESCRIPTION
The following output types are available COMMON
on select EPC encoderCOMMON
models:
LTR
+VDC +VDC
Typical Pull Up Resistor Hook-up INITIAL RELEASE
Line Driver Push Pull COMMON 2.2K OHM 1.5K OHM
Open Collector
CONTROLLER OR Line Driver Hook-up
Typical Differential OUTPUT OUTPU
Hook-up COUNTER +VDC +VDC
Controller or
Controller or +VDC
Encoder Counter
Counter +VDC OUTPUT
+VDC +VDC +VDC +VDC
Typical Push-Pull Electrical Hook-up
A
Typical Open Collector Hook-up 2.2K OHM 1.5K OHM COMMON OUTPUT COMMO
A’ OUTPUT OUTPUT Encoder OUTPUT
+VDC
CONTROLLER OR Pull Up Resistor2 Pull Up Resistor1
ENCODER Common COUNTER
ON ACOMMON COMMON
+VDC +VDC
COMMON COMMON Line Driver Common
Push Pull
A
Pull Up Resistor 2 Pull Up Resistor 1
HV Electrical Hook-Up HV Output Circuit
Pull-Up Resistor
“OD” Open Collector/Differential: an open
COMMON
Typicalcollector
Open Collector output
Hook-up with complimentary channels similar to a line driver.
500-2.2K OHM
or equivalent
Controller or
Encoder Counter
+VDC ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
+VDC
“LO” Line Driver
on ABZINITIAL
and
ISSUEA Open
DATE Collector
DATE
on UVW: Complimentary line drivers outputs for the clock +VDC
TOLERANCE
NAME AND TITLE
channels A, B, and Z. +VDC
Open collector outputs for theCommon
commutation channels U, V, W.
TYPICAL HOOK-UPS
ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
Pull-up Resistor OUTPUT +VDC
Typical Pull Up Resistor Hook-up DECIMAL 500-2.2K NAME
OHM AND TITLE
PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CKNEXT ASSEMBLY INITIAL DATE 2.2KOUTPUT
OHM
DWG NUMBER or equivalent REV.
OUTPUT
QC CONTROLLER OR 4/08/04 OUTPUT
“H5” Line Driver at +5VDC: MFG Regardless of the input voltage, the outputs will be limited to TYPICAL
+5VDCHOOK-UPS
complimentary
COMMON line driver. InputCOMMON
DR GMA
ENCODER
PART NUMBER COUNTER
+VDC DECIMAL +VDC
PREV ASSEMBLY
voltage is limited to 8-28 VDC for ModelsDWG702, 725, 758, 802, and
SCALE 755.
CK
SIZE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
DWG NUMBER
A Typical Pull-Up Resistor Hook-up
QC
COMMON
Controller or
“P5”COMMON
Push-Pull at +5VDC: Regardless of the input voltage, the outputs will be limited
Counter
to +5VDC Push-Pull.
Encoder +VDC Pull Up Resistor2
+VDC +VDC
DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE 2.2K OHM SHEET 1
A
OUTPUT
Other Common Industry Terminology

Common
COMMON
Pull Up Resistor 2
Output types are also referred to in the industry as “HTL”, “TTL”, “PNP”, and many others. Sometimes the output IC (7272, 4469,
8830, 7406, 3904, 26LS31, etc.) is all that is used to define the output type. TOLERANCE
ISSUE DATE ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY

If the output type you need is not discussed here or is otherwise unclear, or if you have
DR any additional questions, please contact EPC
NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL NAME AND TITLE
DATE
GMA 4/08/04
TYPICAL HOOK-UPS
Technical Service at 800-366-5412 or email [email protected].
TYPICAL HOOK-UPS
PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL
PREV ASSEMBLY CK
DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER
QC DWG NUMBER
QC
PART NUMBER MFG
DWG SIZE SCALE NONE
DWG SIZE B SCALE N

Incremental Thru-Bore & Motor Mount Encoders
Model 15T/H
Features
High Performance Economical Encoder
Low Profile – 1.0" (25.4 mm) Height and 1.5" (38 mm) Diameter
Thru-Bore or Hollow Bore (Blind) with sizes up to 0.375" (10 mm)
Simple, Innovative Flex Mounting System (Global Mounting Standards)
Up to 12 Pole Commutation Optional for Brushless Motor Control
The Model 15T or 15H Accu-Coder™ offers a high performance feedback
solution in a low profile package. Unlike modular or kit encoders, the Model
15 utilizes an integral bearing set and an innovative flexible mounting system,
which are much more tolerant to axial misalignment or radial shaft runout.
The slotted flex mounts provide 20 to 30 degrees of rotational adjustment for
commutation or index pulse timing. Installation is quick and easy; for brushless
servo motor applications, three 120° electrical phase tracks can provide up to
12 pole commutation feedback. The optional 100° C and 120° C temperature
options allow servo motors to operate at higher power outputs and duty cycles.
With its stable and reliable operation, the Model 15 is an excellent replacement
modular encoder when you need a high-performance solution.
Common Applications
Servo Motor Control, Robotics, Specialty Assembly Machines,
Ø1.5" Digital Plotters, High Power Motors
M o d e l 15 T/H O r d e r i n g G u i d e

-20° to 85° C Std IP50 Std None Std
15T 01 SF 0500 N 5 A OC F00

CONNECTOR TYPE7
MODEL CYCLES PER Input Operating CERTIFICATION
F00 18" Cable8 (Std)
15T Thru-Bore REVOLUTION Voltage Temperature None (Std)
F01 12" Cable
15H Hollow Bore See CPR Options below 5 5 VDC -20° to 85° C (Std) CE CE Marked 13
Price adder for F02 24" Cable
(Blind) V1 5 to 28 VDC T1 -40° to 85° C
CPR>1999 F03 36" Cable
T2 -20° to 100° C
M00 2M Cable9
T3 -20° to 120° C 12
1 j00 18" Cable with 5-pin M1210
BORE SIZE Commutation 3 T7 -40° to 120° C12
15 3/16", 0.1875" N No Commutation K00 18" Cable with 8-pin M1210
01 1/4", 0.250" A 4 Pole A00 15-pin Header with 18" Cable11
03 5/16", 0.3125" B 6 Pole SEALing
02 3/8", 0.375" C 8 Pole OUTPUT TYPE IP50 (Std)
08 4 mm E 10 Pole MAXIMUM S1 IP64 for Thru-Bore &
OC Open Collector FREQUENCY
06 5 mm D 12 Pole PP Push-Pull Blind Hollow Bore
04 6 mm Standard
HV Line Driver F3 Extended
14 8 mm NUMBER OF CHANNELS4 PU Pull-Up Resistor 6
05 10 mm See Specifications
A Channel A OD Open Collector with Differential Outputs
Channel A Leads B Available on special request.
Q Quadrature A & B Additional lead times may apply:
MOUNTING R Quadrature A & B with Index LO Line Driver on ABZ
SF 1.812" (46 mm) Slotted Flex-Mount Channel B Leads A5 Open Collector on UVW 6
SA 1.812" (46 mm) Two Hole Flex Mount K Reverse Quadrature A & B
SB 1.142" (29 mm) Slotted Flex Mount 2 D Reverse Quadrature A & B NOTES:
SC 1.2795" (32.5 mm) Slotted Flex with Index
1 Contact Customer Service for additional options not shown.
Mount2 2 This mount requires button head screws and a modified Hex wrench.
Order appropriate Installation Kit listed under Specifications.
SD 1.575" (40 mm) Slotted Flex Mount2 3 Not available in all configurations, and not available with V1 Input Voltage. Contact Customer Service for availability.
5 Reverse Quadrature not available with PU output type.
6 With Input Voltage above 16 VDC, operating temperature is limited to 85° C.
M o d e l 15T/H C P R Op t i o n s 7 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin Configuration
0001 thru 0189 0198 0200 0250 0256 0300 0315 0360 Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
0400 0500 0512 0580 0600 0750 0800 1000 1024 8 For non-standard English cable lengths enter ‘F’ plus cable length expressed in feet.
1200 1250 1500 1800 2000 2048 2500 2540 3000 Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.
3600 4000 4096 5000 6000 7200 8192 10,000 9 For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length expressed in meters.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Cus- 10 Not available with commutation. 5-pin not available with Line Driver (HV, OD, LO) outputs.
tomer Service to determine all currently available values. Special disk Additional cable lengths available. Please consult Customer Service.
resolutions are available upon request and may be subject to a one-time 11 Pin Header available with 5 VDC Input Voltage, HV Line Driver and standard quadrature phasing only.
NRE fee. Not available with CE Certification. IP50 sealing option only.
12 Only available with 5 VDC Input Voltage.

REVISIONS
- INITIAL RELEASE 03/30/04
M o d e l 15 T/H Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
M o d e l 15T/H 1.811" (46 m m ) S l ot t e d F l e x M o u n t (S F)
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 5 VDC ±10% Fixed Voltage
4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures up
to 85° C
Input Current �� 140 mA max (65 mA typical for most
configurations) with no output load
Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in
quadrature with channel A leading B
for clockwise shaft rotation, as viewed
from the encoder mounting face. See
Waveform Diagrams.
Output Types �� Open Collector – 20 mA max per
channel
internal resistor, 20 mA max per channel
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel
M o d e l 15T/H 1.811" (46 m m ) Tw o H o l e F l e x M o u n t (SA )
ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE P
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply)
E C

Index �� Once per revolution INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
+
- .005 DR BSR 1/05/04
MODEL 15 FLEX MOUNT
1 to 189 CPR: Ungated PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER REV.
190 to 10,000 CPR: Gated to output A .01

+
-
15-flex
QC
PART NUMBER -
See Waveform Diagrams.
ANGULAR MFG
-+ .1˚ PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1

200 kHz for CPR 1 to 2540
500 kHz for CPR 2541 to 5000
1 MHz for CPR 5001 to 10,000
(optional) is 300 kHz for CPR 2000,
2048, 2500, and 2540
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit
damage.
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-6-2;
BS EN50081-2; BS EN61000-4-2; M o d e l 15T/H S m a l l Di a m e t e r S l ot t e d F l e x M o u n t s
BS EN61000-4-3; BS EN61000-4-6;
BS EN500811 1.142" (29 mm) SB* 1.2795" (32.5 mm) SC* 1.575" (40 mm) SD*
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at
temperatures > 99° C
Waveform Symmetry �� 180° (±18°) electrical (single channel
encoder)
Accuracy ��Within 0.017° mechanical or
1 arc-minute from true position
(for CPR > 189)
Commutation �� Up to 12 pole. Contact Customer Service
for availability.
Comm. Accuracy �� 1° mechanical
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed �� 8000 RPM. Higher speeds may be
achievable, contact Customer Service.
Bore Tolerance �� -0.0000" / +0.0006" *Order Appropriate No Charge Mounting and Installation Kit
User Shaft Tolerances for SB, SC, or SD Option. Each kit contains 10 screws for
Radial Runout �� 0.008" max mounting 5 encoders.
Axial Endplay �� ±0.030" max 176150-01 Installation Kit, 4-40 Buttonhead Screws
Starting Torque �� IP50 Hollow Bore: 0.2 oz-in with 0.062" Shortened Hex Wrench
IP50 Thru-Bore: 0.3 oz-in 176149-01 Installation Kit, M2.5 Buttonhead Screws
IP64: 0.6 oz-in with 1.5 mm Shortened Hex Wrench
Moment of Inertia �� 6.7 x 10-5 oz-in-sec2 (4.8 gm-cm2)
Weight �� 3 oz typical Encoder length and diameter are the same as SF and SA mounts detailed
above. All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" SB Slotted Flex Mount
Environmental unless otherwise specified. Metric dimensions are given in brackets [mm].
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64 available

Model 15T/H
Flying Leads
Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 15-pin
Function Wire Color M12** M12** Header
Com Black 3 7 1
+VDC White 1 2 2
A Brown 4 1 4
15-pin Header
A' Yellow -- 3 3
B Red 2 4 6
B' Green -- 5 5
Z Orange 5 6 7
Z' Blue -- 8 8
U Violet -- -- 10
U' Gray -- -- 9
V Pink -- -- 14
V' Tan -- -- 13
Pin 1
W Red/Green -- -- 12
W' Red/Yellow -- -- 11
Shield Bare* -- -- --

†Standard cable for non-commutated models is 24 AWG For commutated units,
REVISIONS
conductors are 28 AWG. LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
**CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield
- INITIAL connected to M12 connector coupling nut.
RELEASE
Incremental Signals
INCREMENTAL SIGNALS
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
OUTPUT B
gated to A = 180°
INDEX Z
INDEX Z
gated to A = 180°
Commutation Signals
COMMUTATION SIGNALS
±1° mechanical
OUTPUT U
OUTPUT U
120°
OUTPUT V
OUTPUT V
120°
OUTPUT W
OUTPUT W
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
CLOCKWISE AS VIEWED
ROTATION
15wave FROM THE
NOTE: ALL DEGREE MOUNTING
REFERENCES FACE
ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES
Waveform shown with optional complementary
signals A, B, Z for HV and OD outputs only.
ISSUE DATE
04/22/04
TOLERANCE E
P
42
NEXT ASSEMBLY1-800-366-5412
DECIMAL INITIAL • www.encoder.com • [email protected]
DATE NAME AND TITLE
LINE DRIVER AND COMM.
+
- .005 DR SKW 7/24/03
OUTPUT WAVEFORM
DWG NUMBER REV.
+
EP C H a s th e s o l u t i o n
Replacing an Encoder Has
Never Been Easier
Cross References
EPC also has a complete line of motor friendly encoders that easily fit motor sizes from small to large.
The Model 15 can be crossed to many encoders. This is not a comprehensive list. Please contact Customer Service for additional offerings and to
ensure complete and accurate cross-referencing. For help selecting the correct motor kit for your motor, please contact our encoder experts today.
Visit encoder.com for a product datasheet and to view our full line of replacement encoders. Or contact EPC with your cross-reference request. You'll
get a prompt response from an encoder expert that will help you serve your customers better, while reducing your overhead.
M o d e l 15 S
The Model 15S offers a wide selection of mounting face options. A variety of bosses and bolt hole patterns provide cross-reference
adaptability like no other encoder.
M1 – 3x120° M2 – 3x120° M3 - 2.093” Sq. Flange M4 - 2.093” Dia. M5 - 0.8745” Dia. Boss
M3 on 1.102” BC 0.547” Dia. Boss 0.688” Dia. Boss 0.688” Dia. Boss Dynapar E14
0.787” Dia. Boss DRC model 150/2/3 DRC M2 DRC 23
Automation Dir TRDS DRC 77L
Nemicon OEW DRC M2
Sumtak IRS3
Tamagawa OIS38
M6 - 0.6875” Dia. Boss M7 - 0.7870” Dia. Boss M8 - 0.7870” Dia. Boss M9 - 0.750” Dia. Boss
M3x0.5-6H 0.187” Deep M3 0.18” Deep M3 0.18” Deep Can be used with Servo clips
4x1.000” BC 4x1.181” BC Omron E6B2 Sumtak LBL
Dynapar E23 Nemicon OEW
Tekel TK-15
M o d e l 15 T
The Model 15T (thru-bore) and 15H (hollow bore, or "blind") are the superior choice for your servo or stepper motor applications. Endurance under
high-temperature conditions, high resolution performance, commutation, and flexible mounting options make the 15T/H an unbeatable encoder.
SA - 1.811” Bolt SB - 1.142” (29mm) SC - 1.2795” (32.5mm SD - 1.575” (40 mm SF - 1.811” Bolt
Circle Mounting Bolt Circle Mounting Bolt Circle Mounting Bolt Circle Mounting Circle Mounting
DRC 73 DRC T23 Dynapar F14 Dynapar M14 Sumtak IRH3 DRC H15 Renco RCM15
DRC 731 Sumtak LBK/LDA Renco RCM15 Sumtak IRT3 Dynapar M15 Sumtak LBK/LDA
Dynapar M21 Turck 8.3720
Dynapar F14

Model 755A
Features
Miniature Size (1.5" Diameter)
Up to 30,000 Cycles Per Revolution
Flex Mounting & Large Hollow Bore Option (up to 0.750")
High Temperature Option
The Model 755A Size 15 Accu-Coder™ is ideal for applications requiring a small,
high-precision, high-performance encoder. Approximately 1.5" in diameter
and 1.5" long, it will fit where many encoders cannot. All metal construction
and shielded ball bearings provide years of trouble-free use. A variety of blind
hollow bore sizes are available with large bores allowing for shafts up to 0.750"
or 14 mm. Attaching directly to a motor is quick and simple with the innovative
flex mount, first developed by EPC. This industry-standard mount eliminates
couplings and increases reliability, while reducing overall length and cost.
Where critical alignment is required, a Slotted Flex (SF) is available. A perfect
replacement encoder where high reliability is required.
Common Applications
Robotics, Assembly Machines, Motor-Mounted Feedback, Phototypesetters,
Printers & Digital Plotters, Elevator Controls,
Ø1.5" Medical Diagnostic Equipment
M o d e l 755A O r d e r i n g G u i d e
755A 01 S 1000 R HV 1 S S CE
MODEL CYCLES PER OUTPUT TYPE MOUNTING CERTIFICATION

755A Model 755A REVOLUTION 1-30,000 5 - 28V In/Out 5 S Standard N None
See CPR Options below for OC Open Collector Flex Mount CE CE Marked 8,12
available resolutions. PU Pull-Up Resistor SF Slotted
Price adder for CPR >1270 PP Push-Pull Flex Mount
HV Line Driver6
Operating 8-28V In/5V Out 7,8 CONNECTOR TYPE10
Temperature H5 Line Driver6 S Standard 18" Cable 11
L -40° to 70° C2 P5 Push-Pull C01 8-pin Molex
S 0° to 70° C C02 Terminal Block
H 0° to 100° C 3 j00 18" Cable with 5-pin M12 6
MAXIMUM
K00 18" Cable with 8-pin M12
NUMBER OF CHANNELS4 FREQUENCY
BORE SIZES 1
A Channel A 1 Standard 100 kHz
15 3/16", 0.1875" 16 4 mm 2 200 kHz ≤ 3000 CPR
01 1/4", 0.250" 18 5 mm Channel A Leads B
Q Quadrature A & B 5 250 kHz, >3000 CPR
03 5/16", 0.3125" 04 6 mm 3 500 kHz, >6000 CPR 9
02 3/8", 0.375" 14 8 mm R Quadrature A & B with Index
4 1 MHz, >10,000 CPR 9
10 1/2", 0.500" 05 10 mm Channel B Leads A
11 5/8", 0.625" 12 12 mm K Reverse Quadrature A & B
17 3/4", 0.750" 13 14 mm D Reverse Quadrature A & B
with Index
NOTES:
M o d e l 755A C P R Op t i o n s
1 Contact Customer Service for additional options.
0001* 0002* 0004* 0005* 0006* 0007* 0008* 0010* 0011* 2 Low temperature option not available with resolutions of 3000 CPR or higher.
0012* 0014* 0020 0021* 0024* 0025* 0028* 0030* 0032* 3 0° to 85° C for certain resolutions, see CPR Options.
0033* 0034* 0035* 0038* 0040* 0042* 0045* 0050* 0060 4 Contact Customer Service for index gating options.
0064* 0100 0120 0125 0128* 0144* 0150* 0160* 0192* 5 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0200 0240* 0250 0254* 0256* 0300 0333* 0360 0400 6 Line Driver outputs not available with 5-pin M12 connector.
0500 0512 0600 0625* 0635 0665* 0720 0768* 0800 7 Standard temperature, 60 to 3000 CPR only. Not available with 2540 CPR.
0889 1000 1024 1200 1201*a 1203*a 1204*a 1250a 1270a 8 H5 and P5 outputs are not available with CE option.
9 Standard cable lengths only. For details, please refer to Technical Bulletin
1440 1500 1800 2000 2048 2400a 2500 2540a 2880a
TB116: Noise and Signal Distortion Considerations encoder.com.
3000a 3600a 4000a 4096a 5000a 6000a 7200a 7500a 9000a 10 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at
10,000a 10,240a 12,000a 12,500a 14,400a 15,000a 18,000a 20,000a encoder.com. For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see
20,480a 25,000a 30,000a Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at
*Contact Customer Service for High Temperature Option. encoder.com.
aHigh Temperature Option (H) limited to 85° C maximum for these CPR options. 11 Additional cable lengths available. Please consult Customer Service.
For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Service to determine expressed in feet. Example: S/6 = 6 feet of cable.
all currently available CPR values. Special disk resolutions are available upon request. A one-time 12 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark
NRE fee may apply. at encoder.com.

M o d e l 755A Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 755A F l e x M o u n t (S)
Electrical BORE DEPTH
0.500
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures up to 70° C Ø0.125 THRU 2x 180° (12.7)
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures FOR #4 OR 3mm 0.040
MOUNTING SCREWS (1.0)
.
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no output load CABLE
LENGTH
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to 100 kHz 18"
1.811
Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in (46)
2.125
(54)
1.500
(38)
SEE BORE
from the encoder mounting face. See OPTIONS 1.500
6-32 SET SCREWS
Waveform Diagrams. 2x 90°
(38)
Output Types �� Open Collector – 100 mA max per channel 55A-HSFMC

internal resistor, 100 mA max per channel Op t i o n a l S l ot t e d F l e x M o u n t (S F)
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channel BORE DEPTH
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel ROTATIONAL
ADJUSTMENT
0.500
(12.7)
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) SLOT WIDTH
0.150 (3.8)
300
0.040
Index �� Occurs once per revolution. The index for (1.0)
units > 3000 CPR is 90° gated to Outputs
CABLE
A and B. See Waveform Diagrams. LENGTH
18"
Max Frequency �� Up to 1 MHz 1.811
2.125 1.500
(46)
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit (54) (38)
protected. NOTE: Sustained reverse voltage
may result in permanent damage. 6-32 SET SCREWS
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3; 2x 90° 1.500
(38)
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; DDENV 55FLEXADA
50204; BS EN55022 (with European

compliance option); BS EN61000-6-2;
BS EN50081-2 M o d e l 755A L a r g e B o r e F l e x M o u n t (S)
Symmetry �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 180° (±18°) electrical at
Ø0.125 THRU 2x 180° BORE DEPTH
100 kHz output FOR #4 OR 3mm 0.750
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 180° (±36°) electrical MOUNTING SCREWS (19)
Quad Phasing �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 90° (±22.5°) electrical at 0.040
(1.0)
100 kHz output
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 90° (±36°)
CABLE 2.125
Min Edge Sep ��1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at 100 kHz output LENGTH 18" (54)
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 54° electrical 1.811
(46)
1.500
(38)
> 20,480 CPR: 50° electrical
Accuracy �� Instrument and Quadrature Error:
For 200 to 1999 CPR, 0.017° mechanical 55A-LBFMD
(1.0 arc minutes) from one cycle to any Ø12mm TO Ø0.750 2.200
BORES WITH (55.9)
other cycle. For 2000 to 3000 CPR, 0.01° SET SCREWS
mechanical (0.6 arc minutes) from one 2x 90°
cycle to any other cycle. Interpolation All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified. Metric dimensions are given in
error (units > 3000 CPR only) within brackets [mm].
0.005° mechanical. (Total Optical Encoder
Error = Instrument + Quadrature + Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
Interpolation) Line Driver and Push-Pull For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Mechanical Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Max Shaft Speed �� 7500 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may be Flying
achievable, contact Customer Service. Leads
Bore Tolerance �� -0.0000" / +0.0006" Cable† Terminal 8-pin 5-pin 8-pin
User Shaft Tolerances Function Wire Color Block Molex M12** M12**
Radial Runout �� 0.007" max Com Black 7 2 3 7
Axial End Play �� ±0.030" max
+VDC White 8 1 1 2
Starting Torque �� 0.14 oz-in typical
4.0 oz-in typical for -40° C operation A Brown 1 8 4 1
Moment of Inertia �� 2.8 x 10 -4 oz-in-sec 2
A' Yellow 2 7 -- 3
Housing �� Black non-corrosive finish CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE MOUNTING FACE B Red 3 4 2 4
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES.
Weight �� 3.50 oz typical Waveform shown with optional complementary B' Green 4 3 -- 5
Z Orange 6 6 5 6
Environmental Open Collector and Pull-Up Z' Blue 5 5 -- 8
Shield Bare* -- -- -- --
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz *CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal case.
**CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to M12
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE MOUNTING FACE connector coupling nut.
INDEX IS POSITIVE GOING.

Model 260
Features
Low Profile 1.19"
Up to 12 Pole Commutation
Available in Thru-Bore and Hollow Bore (Blind)
Simple, Innovative Flexible Mounting System
CE Marking Available
With a bore up to 0.625" and a low profile, the Model 260 Accu-Coder™ is the
perfect solution for many machine and motor applications. Available in both
hollow bore and a complete thru-bore, the Model 260 uses EPC’s innovative
anti-backlash mounting system, allowing simple, reliable, and precise encoder
attachment. Unlike traditional kit or modular encoder designs, its integral
bearing set provides stable and consistent operation without concerns for axial
or radial shaft runout. For brushless servo motor applications, the Model 260
can be specified with three 120° electrical phase tracks to provide up to 12 pole
commutation feedback. The optional extended temperature capability allows
servo motors to operate at higher power outputs and duty cycles. And of course,
the Model 260 uses EPC's pioneering Opto-ASIC design, so you'll always get a
clean, reliable signal.
Common Applications
Brushless Servo Motor Commutation, Robotics, Motor-Mounted Feedback,
Ø2.0" Assembly Machines, Digital Plotters, High Power Motors
260 N T 01 S 0256 Q OC 1 S SF 1 N
MODEL BORE SIZE 2 OUTPUT TYPE CONNECTOR6

CYCLES PER CERTIFICATION
260 Ultra Versatile 01 1/4", 0.250" OC Open Collector TYPE
REVOLUTION N None
Commutated 02 3/8", 0.375" PP Push-Pull S 18" Cable 7
1-10,000 CE CE Marked 10
Thru-Bore 76 7/16", 0.4375" See CPR Options below HV Line Driver5 j00 18" Cable with
10 1/2", 0.500" Price adder > 1999 OD Open Collector 5-pin M128
11 5/8", 0.625" with Differential K00 18" Cable with SEALING
Commutation 1
06 5 mm Outputs 8-pin M12 8 1 IP50 for Thru-Bore
N No Commutation
04 6 mm SMJ 5-pin Body 2 IP64 for Thru-Bore
C4 4 Pole
14 8 mm NUMBER OF CHANNELS4 3 IP64 for Hollow Bore
C6 6 Pole Mount M12 5,8
05 10 mm Channel A Leads B 4 IP50 for Hollow Bore
C8 8 Pole SMK 8-pin Body
09 11 mm Q Quadrature A & B
C10 10 Pole Mount M12 8
12 12 mm R Quadrature A & B with Index
C12 12 Pole
13 14 mm SMH 10-pin Body9 MOUNTING
Channel B Leads A
15 15 mm Mount Bayonet SD 1.575" (40 mm) BC Flex
K Reverse Quadrature A & B
Housing Style D Reverse Quadrature A & B with Mount
B Hollow Bore (Blind) Index SF 1.811" (46 mm) BC Flex
MAXIMUM Mount
T Front Clamp Thru-Bore
Operating See http://www.encoder.com/ FREQUENCY SL 2.36" (60 mm) BC Flex Mount
R Rear Clamp Thru-Bore literature/index-phasing.pdf for
Temperature 3 1 Standard XF 2.250" BC 3-point Flex Mount
L -40° to 70° C additional options, and waveforms. 2 Extended NF 2.375" BC 3-point Flex Mount
S 0° to 70° C See specifications for FA 2.12" to 3.62" BC Flex Arm
H 0° to 100° C explanation.
FB 3.00" to 6.26" BC Flex Arm
V 0° to 120° C8 NOTES:
1 Not available in all configurations. Contact Customer Service for availability.
M o d e l 260 C P R Op t i o n s 3 5 to 16 VDC supply only for H option; 5 VDC supply only for V option. Contact Customer Service for
0001 thru 0189* 0200 0250 0254 0256 availability and additional information.
0300 0360 0400* 0500 0512 0600 4 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating options.
0720 0800 0840 1000 1024 1200 5 Line Driver not available with 5-pin Body Mount M12 connector type.
1250 1270 1500 1800 2000 2048 6 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at
2500 2540 3000 3600 4000 4096 encoder.com.
5000 6000 7200 8192 10,000 7 For non-standard cable lengths add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet. Example: S/6 = 6
*Contact Customer Service for availability. feet of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions. Not all disk resolutions 8 8-pin Body Mount M12 Connector Type not available with commutation or with V temperature option.
available with every commutation option. Additional cable lengths available. Please consult Customer Service.
9 Not available with commutation.

M o d e l 260 W i t h F r o n t S h a f t C l a m p (T )
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC for temperatures W i t h 1.811" (46 m m) B C S l ot t e d F l e x (S F)
up to 70° C
5 to 16 VDC for 0° to 100° C operating
temperature
5 VDC for 0° to 120° C operating
temperature
Input Current �� 130 mA max (< 100 mA typical) with
no output load
from the mounting face.
Output Types �� Open Collector – 20 mA max per
channel
Index �� Once per revolution gated to channel
A. See Waveform Diagrams.
200 kHz for CPR 1 to 2540 M o d e l 260 R e a r C l a m p (R )
500 kHz for CPR 2541 to 5000
1 MHz for CPR 5001 to 10,000 W i t h 1.811" (46 m m) B C S l ot t e d F l e x (S F)
(optional) is 300 kHz for CPR 2000,
2048, 2500, and 2540
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short
circuit protected. NOTE: Sustained
reverse voltage may result in
permanent damage.
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-6-2; BS
EN50081-2; BS EN61000-4-2; BS
EN61000-4-3;
BS EN61000-4-6, BS EN55011
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical.
Edge Separation �� 54° electrical minimum at
Accuracy �� Within 0.01° mechanical from one cycle
to any other cycle, or 0.6 arc minutes.
Commutation �� Up to 12 pole. Contact Customer
Service for availability.
B ECO 02528 GMA
Comm. Accuracy �� 1° mechanical.
T h r e e P o i n t F l e x M o u n t (X F, N F)
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed �� 7500 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may
be achievable, contact Customer 4-40 OR 6-32
MOUNTING SCREWS
Service. Note: For extreme 3x 120°
Ø2.250" OR
temperature operation, de-rate Ø2.375" B.C.
temperature by 5° C for every 1000
RPM above 3000 RPM.
Bore Tolerance �� -0.0000" / +0.0006"
Radial Runout �� 0.007" max
0.05
Axial Endplay �� ±0.030" max
Starting Torque �� IP50 Thru-Bore: 0.50 oz-in 0.30
30°
IP50 Hollow Bore: 0.30 oz-in
260NF-XFCAT1B
1.05 BLIND BORE
DEPTH FLEX MOUNT WITH
IP64 Thru-Bore: 2.50 oz-in 1.27 30° ROTATIONAL
IP64 Hollow Bore: 2.0 oz-in ADJUSTMENT
Note: Add 3.0 oz-in for -40° C

operation
Moment of Inertia �� 3.9 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2
Housing �� Non-corrosive material All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
Weight �� 3.5 oz typical
Environmental
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE E
P
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz 10/4/01
3 POINT FLEX MOUNT
Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration +

- DR GDB 10/4/01
FOR MODEL 260
Sealing �� IP50; IP64 available
B

Incremental Thru-Bore & Motor Mount Encoders LTR
- INITIAL RELEASE
DESCRIPTON
REVISIONS
CHK DATE APPR DATE
Model 260
1.575" (40 m m) B C F l e x M o u n t (SD)
Ø0.218
USE 4-40 OR M2.5
BUTTONHEAD SCREWS
Ø1.575
[40.00]
0.07 20°
1.00 BLIND
BORE DEPTH ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT
1.19 260-sdflex
1.06" to 1.81" F l e x A r m (FA)
ISSUE DATE
03/06/06
TOLERANCE
+
- .005 DR SBR 3/3/06 260 W/ 40mm FLEX MOUNT
DWG NUMBER REV.
+
.01
260-SDFLEX
-
-
QC

+
- .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZE
B NONE SCALE SHEET
1 1
OF
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REVISIONS
-- INITIAL RELEASE DATE
2.36" (60 m m) B C F l e x M o u n t (SL)

D
USE 4-40 OR M2.5

BUTTONHEAD SCREWS
2.362
60
MOUNTING
.032
30°
1.00 BLIND ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMNET B
BORE DEPTH
1.18
260-slflex
1.50" to 3.13" F l e x A r m (F B)
A
www.encoder.com
APPROVALS DATE
DRAWN
NAME AND TITLE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TLM 3/02/10 260 60MM SL FLEX
ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
TOLERANCES
xx/xx/xx
260-slflex
DWG. NO. REV.
XXX -+ .005
--
XXX
PART NUMBER
-+ .01
ANGULAR QUAL ENG SHEET
NONE B 1 OF 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1

M o d e l 260 C o n n e c to r Op t i o n s
B o dy M o u n t 10-pi n B ayo n e t (SMH) B o dy M o u n t M 12 (SM J, SMK)

1.00 2.07 1.00 1.87
1.00 1.00
260-10P-BAY 1.64 1.32

260M12
Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
Flying Leads
Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 10-pin
Function Wire Colors M12** M12** Bayonet+
Com Black 3 7 F
+VDC White 1 2 D
A Brown 4 1 A
A' Yellow -- 3 H
B Red 2 4 B
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED B' Green -- 5 J

FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
Z Orange 5 6 C
Z' Blue -- 8 K
U Violet -- -- --
U' Gray -- -- --
V Pink -- -- --
V' Tan -- -- --
W Red/Green -- -- --
W' Red/Yellow -- -- --
†Standard cable for non-commutated models is 24 AWG For commutated units, conductors are 28 AWG.
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED
FROM THE MOUNTING FACE **CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to M12 connector coupling nut.
NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES.Wave- +CE Option: Pin G is connected to internal case.
form shown with optional complementary signals A, B,
Z for HV and OD outputs only.

Model 225A/Q
Features
Single Channel & Quadrature Models
Easy to Mount Economical Thru-Bore Design
Metal Construction
Bore Sizes to 0.875" or 22 mm
Controlling motor speed is essential for many production assembly
machines or robotic equipment. For tachometer feedback, or motor
speed control applications, the Model 225 Accu-Coder™ is the ideal
encoder choice. The Model 225 Accu-Coder™ is a thru-bore encoder
available in both single channel (225A) and quadrature (225Q) models
that provides a cost-effective solution for simple measurement. Features
including an all metal housing, a variety of connector options, and easy
installation due to the thru-bore design, make the Model 225 Accu-
Coder™ ideal for many motion control and manufacturing applications.
Common Applications
Brushless Servo Motor Commutation, Robotics, Motor-Mounted
Ø2.25" Feedback, Assembly Machines, Digital Plotters, High Power Motors
M o d e l 225 a/Q O r d e r i n g G u i d e
225Q 10 100 OC N N K
MODEL OUTPUT TYPE

225A Single Channel OC Open Collector
225Q Quadrature PU Pull-Up Resistor
CYCLES PER
REVOLUTION CONNECTOR TYPE2
See CPR Options below S 6 ft Cable 3
225A 1 - 600 CPR T Terminal Block
225Q 1 - 100 CPR 9D 9-pin D-subminiature
J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)
K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
BORE SIZES MOUNTING
01 1/4", 0.250" 07 7 mm N No Additional Mounting
03 5/16", 0.3125" 05 10 mm F Flex Arm Kit
02 3/8", 0.375" 06 11 mm
10 1/2", 0.500" 12 12 mm SEALing
56 9/16", 0.562" 14 14 mm N No Seal (Standard)
11 5/8", 0.625" 15 15 mm Y Bearing Seals 1
68 11/16", 0.6875" 16 16 mm
34 3/4", 0.750" 17 17 mm
18 7/8", 0.875" 19 19 mm
20 20 mm
22 22 mm
M o d e l 225A/Q C P R Op t i o n s
225A
1-600 CPR, all resolutions
225Q NOTES:
001 002 003 004 005 006 010 011 1 Shaft speed limited to 400 RPM.
015 016 020 022 025 030 032 040 2 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For
048 050 060 062 080 083 090 099 Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin
100 Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
3 For Non-Standard Cable Lengths add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions. feet. Example: S/12 = 12 feet of cable.

M o d e l 225A Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
S ingle C hannel M o d e l 225
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 24 VDC
Input Current �� 32 mA max with Pull-Up option
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to 100 kHz
Output Format �� Square wave 50% duty cycle
Output Types �� Open Collector – 100 mA max
Max Frequency �� 0 to 6 kHz
Cycles per Rev �� 1 to 600
Mechanical
Max. Shaft Speed �� 4000 RPM
Bore Tolerance �� Bore H7 fit for g6 shaft Class LC5 M o d e l 225 C o n n e c to r Op t i o n s
per ANSI B-4.I Standard 9D 9-pin D-Subminiature T Terminal Block J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)
Running Torque �� 10 oz-in typical K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
Housing �� Black non-corrosive finish
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings
Environmental
M o d e l 225Q Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Q uadrature
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 24 VDC
REVISIONS
Input Current �� 64 mA max with Pull-Up option M o d e l 225 M o u n t i n g Op t i o n (F) F l e x A r m Ki t LTR
-
DESCRIPTION
INITIAL RELEASE
DATE
11/04/05
To order Model 225 Flexible Mounting Arm Kit as an accessory, order part #140106-01.
Output Format �� Square wave 50% duty cycle in quadrature Kit may be mounted in either an up or down orientation.
Output Types ��Open Collector – 100 mA max per channel
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 1.5K ohm MOUNTS ON
ADJUSTABLE
DEPTH
resistor, 20 mA max per channel M3 OR 6-32 MOUNTS IN EITHER ORIENTATION
EITHER END
0.40
MAX. SCREW SIZE
Max Frequency �� 0 to 6 kHz Ø3.35 MAX. 0.30
(SEE NOTE)
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit Ø2.42
Ø2.40
voltage may result in permanent Ø1.47 MIN.
(SEE NOTE)
damage.
Cycles Per Rev �� 1 to 100
Mechanical 225-FLEX
Max. Shaft Speed �� 4000 RPM NOTE: FOR ANY CONNECTOR OPTION, THE BOLT CIRCLE RANGE IS
Bore Tolerance �� Bore H7 fit for g6 shaft Class LC5 per FROM Ø1.72" TO Ø3.60" DUE TO THE INCREASED CAP HIEGHT
ANSI B-4.I Standard

Running Torque �� 10 oz-in typical All dimensions are in inches
ISSUEwith
DATE a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
TOLERANCE E
P
Housing �� Black non-corrosive finish NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
+
- .005 MODEL 225 FLEX MOUNT REVISIONS
DR SBR 11/04/05

DWG NUMBER REV.
LTR DESCRIPTON
+
.01 - INITIAL RELEASE
-
For EPC-supplied mating cables, 225-FLEX

PART NUMBERrefer to wiring table provided with cable.
QC
ANGULAR MFG -
+
- .1˚ PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
Environmental Trim back and insulate unused wires.

Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C Flying
Humidity �� 95% RH non-condensing Leads wav e f o r m d i a g r a m
Vibration �� 3 g @ 5 to 1000 Hz Cable† 5-pin 8-pin Term 9-pin M o d e l s 225A/Q
Shock �� 20 g @ 10 ms duration Function Wire Color M12 M12 Block D-Sub
Com Black 3 7 1 9 OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
+VDC Red 1 2 2 1
QSIG230
A White 4 1 3 2
Note: Model 225A includes output A only
B Green 2 4 4 4
Shield Bare -- -- -- --

Model 25T/H
F e at u r e s
2.5" Opto-ASIC Encoder with a Low Profile (2.0”)
Standard Bore Sizes Ranging from 0.625” to 1.125”
Metric Bore Sizes Ranging from 6 mm to 28 mm
Single Replacement Solution for 2.0" to 3.5" Encoders
Resolutions to 10,000 CPR; Frequencies to 1 MHz
Versatile Flexible Mounting Options
RoHS Compliant
Representing the next generation of high performance encoders, the Model 25T Accu-
Coder™ features the largest thru-bore available in a 2.5” encoder, able to mount directly
on shafts as large as 1.125" (28 mm). With resolutions up to 10,000 CPR and frequencies
up to 1MHz, this industrial strength encoder is perfect for fast revving motors. The 25T
features the next generation of EPC's proprietary Opto-ASIC sensor, which provides
superior accuracy and precision counts. The injection molded housing, made from
EPC's custom blend of nylon composites, is grooved with "cooling fins" and can tolerate
the extreme heat of the motion-control industry. With sealing available up to IP66 and
many new rugged flexible mounting options, the Model 25T can perform in demanding
industrial environments.
C o mm o n A pp l i c at i o n s
Motor-Mounted Feedback and Vector Control, Specialty Machines, Robotics,
Ø2.5" Web Process Control, Paper and Printing, High Power Motors
M o d e l 25 T/H O r d e r i n g G u i d e

-20º to 85º C Std IP50 Std None Std
25T 42 SE 0500 N V1 R OC SMW
Housing Option CYCLES PER Operating CERTIFICATION

INput OUTPUT TYPE
(Leave Blank for Standard) REVOLUTION Temperature None (Std)
Voltage 5 - 28V In/Out 3
Standard See CPR Options below -20º to 85º C (Std) CE CE Marked 12
V1 5 to 28 VDC OC Open Collector
C Corrosion Resistant Price Adder for PP Push-Pull T1 -40º to 85º C
Resolutions Over 2000 HV Line Driver 4 T4 -20º to 105º C11
MODEL PU Pull-Up Resistor5 SEALING
25T Thru-Bore 8- 28V In/5V Out 6 IP50 (Standard)
25H Hollow Bore (Blind) H5 Line Driver 4 CONNECTOR TYPE 7 S3 IP66
MOUNTING P5 Push-Pull SMW 6-pin MS4,8
BORE SIZE 1 SMY 7-pin MS4
SE 2.25" to 2.75" B.C. SMX 10-pin MS
NUMBER OF CHANNELS1
01 1/4", 0.250" 04 6 mm 3-point Flex Mount SMJ 5-pin M12 (12 mm)4
03 5/16", 0.3125" 14 8 mm SG 3.50" to 5.90" B.C. Channel A Leads B
Q Quadrature A & B SMK 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
02 3/8", 0.375" 10 10 mm (4.5" C-face) Tether Arm Kit SMH 10-pin Bayonet9
05 1/2", 0.500" 09 11 mm SJ 3.50" to 8.10" B.C. R Quadrature A & B with Index
F00 Gland, 24" Cable 10
11 5/8", 0.625" 12 12 mm (8.5" C-face) Tether Arm Kit Channel B Leads A2 9D 9-pin D-Sub9
34 3/4", 0.750" 13 14 mm SH 2.72" to 3.42" B.C. K Reverse Quadrature A & B
78 7/8", 0.875" 15 15 mm (Block & Pin) Tether Arm Kit D Reverse Quadrature A & B
40 1", 1.000" 16 16 mm with Index
42 1-1/8", 1.125" 17 17 mm
18 18 mm See http://www.encoder.com/
19 19 mm literature/index-phasing.pdf for
20 20 mm additional options and waveforms.
24 24 mm
25 25 mm NOTES:
28 28 mm 1 Contact Customer Service for additional options.
2 Reverse Quadrature not available with PU output type.
3 24 VDC max for T4 temperature option.
4 Line Driver not available with 5-pin M12 or 6-pin MS style connectors. Available with 7-pin MS style
M o d e l 25T/H C P R Op t i o n s connector without index Z.
0001 0002 0003 0005 0008 0010 0011 0012 5 With Input Voltage above 16 VDC, operating temperature is limited to 85° C max.
6 Standard operating temperature only.
0024 0025 0030 0032 0050 0060 0064 0070
7 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
0080 0100 0105 0115 0120 0125 0150 0180 Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at
0192 0200 0240 0250 0256 0300 0336 0360 encoder.com.
0500 0512 0600 0625 1000 1024 1200 1250 8 Not available with CE option.
1800 2000 2048 2500 3600 4096 5000 7200 9 Not available with corrosion resistant option.
8192 10,000 10 For non-standard English cable lengths, enter ‘F’ plus cable length expressed in feet.
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions. Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable.
11 Contact Customer Service for availability on resolutions < 360 CPR.
12 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at encoder.com. Contact
Customer Service for availability.

- INITIAL RELEASE XX/XX/XX
M o d e l 25T/H Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 25T/H 3-p o i n t F l e x M o u n t (SE)

Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures up 1.48 1.65 BLIND BORE
to 85° C [37.5] [41.9] DEPTH THRU AND BLIND
0.40 BORES TO Ø1.125
4.75 to 24 VDC max for temperatures [10.1] OR Ø28mm
between 85° and 105° C 6-32 OR M3
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no output load MAX. SCREW 1.50
3x @ 120° [38.1]
7/64 HEX
quadrature with channel A leading B for WRENCH
clockwise shaft rotation, as viewed from
the mounting face. 25T-STD
See Waveform Diagram, below.

Ø2.25 B.C. Ø2.50
Output Types �� Open Collector – 20 mA max per channel [Ø57.2] 15°
Ø2.75 B.C. [Ø63.5]
[Ø69.9] 2.00
Pull Up – Open Collector with 2.2K ohm 15° [50.7]
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) M o d e l 25T/H C o n n e c to r Op t i o n s
Index �� Once per revolution. CABLE LENGTH
24"[610] STD.
1 to 360 CPR: Ungated ISSUE DATE
361 to 10,000 CPR: Gated to output A TOLERANCE E
P
2.17 2.38 2.71
See Waveform Diagram, below. 2.00 NEXT ASSEMBLY [55.2]DECIMAL [60.3]
INITIAL
1.88
DATE NAME AND TITLE 2.05
2.56 [52.1]
2.95
[74.8] [68.9]
[50.8]
.005 MODEL 25T STANDARD
[65.0]
+
SBR[47.6]
Max Frequency �� 250 kHz for 1 to 2500 CPR - DR 6/26/07 1.88
[47.6]
500 kHz for 2501 to 5000 CPR PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER
+
.01
25T-STD
-
1 MHz for 5001 to 10,000 CPR Electrical
Protection Reverse voltage and
25T-CON
output short circuit protected. NOTE:
5, 8-PIN M12 9-PIN D-SUB 10-PIN BAYONET 6, 7-PIN MS STYLE 10-PIN MS STYLE GLAND, 24" CABLE
Sustained reverse voltage may result in
permanent damage.
CE Testing �� Emissions tested per EN61000-6-3:2001
as applicable. Immunity tested per
EN6100-6-2: 2005 as applicable. M o d e l 25T/H M o u n t i n g Op t i o n s
Min. Edge Sep �� 45° electrical min, 63° electrical or better typical
Accuracy �� Within 0.1° mechanical from one cycle to
any other cycle, or 6 arc minutes.
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM, 8000 RPM intermittent
4000 RPM for IP66 seal option
Bore Tolerance �� -0.0000"/+0.0008"
Starting Torque �� IP50 sealing: 1.0 oz-in typical
IP66 sealing: 4.0 oz-in typical
Note: Add 1.0 oz-in typical for -20° C
operation SH Mount SG Mount SJ Mount
Moment of Inertia �� 7.6 x 10-4 oz-in-sec 2
Housing �� Proprietary nylon composite All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
Environmental
Storage Temp............-20° to 85° C
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing W i r i n g Ta b l e
Vibration �� 20 g @ 5 to 2000 Hz For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Sealing �� IP50, IP66 with shaft seals at both ends
10-pin
7-pin MS 6-pin MS Bayonet
Gland Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 10-pin 7-pin MS PU, PP, PU, PP, 9-pin HV, H5, OD,
Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m Function Wire Color M12** M12** MS HV, H5 OC, P5 OC, P5 D-sub PU, PP, OC, P5
Com Black 3 7 F F F A, F 9 F
+VDC White 1 2 D D D B 1 D
A Brown 4 1 A A A D 2 A
A' Yellow -- 3 H C -- -- 3 H
B Red 2 4 B B B E 4 B
B' Green -- 5 I E -- -- 5 J
Z Orange 5 6 C -- C C 6 C
Z' Blue -- 8 J -- -- -- 7 K
Case -- -- -- G G G -- 8 G
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED *CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal case.
FROM THE MOUNTING FACE †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield.
NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES. **CE Option: Use cable cord set with shield connected to M12 connector coupling nut.
signals A, B, Z for HV and h5 outputs only.

M o d e l 5 8 t p - p r o g r a mm a b l e
Features
Programmable with USB Module or Factory Configured when Ordered
Programmable Resolution from 1 to 65,536 CPR
Programmable Output Type and Wave Form
58 mm Thru-Bore or Hollow Bore (Blind)
Standard and Metric Thru-Bore Sizes up to 5/8” and 15 mm
Several Flexible Mounting Options
Sealing Options up to IP67
The Model 58TP Programmable 58 mm Accu-CoderPro™ thru-bore encoder
is specifically designed for the challenges of an industrial environment. Its
advanced set of electronics allow the encoder to be programmed to meet
your exact application needs. Using EPC's optional programming module,
users may select the output type, 32 different waveforms, and any resolution
from 1 to 65,536 CPR – that's 262,144 counts using 4x quadrature counting.
These programming features allow a single encoder to be configured for
multiple applications, enabling one encoder to replace many different part
numbers – and that provides cost savings on inventory and down-time
replacement. The 58TP can also be configured and shipped with specs pre-
programmed, with no on-site programming needed.
Common Applications
Motor Control, Conveyors, Elevator Controls, Machine Control, Food
Processing, Process Control, Robotics, Material Handling, Textile Machines
Ø58 mm and all types of Motion Control Feedback
M o d e l 58t P O r d e r i n g G u i d e

-20º to 85ºC Std IP50 Std None Std
58TP 02 SE B 1000 B5 OC S MK
MODEL CPR OUTPUT TYPE1 Operating CERTIFICATION

58TP Thru-Bore PROGrAMMING Programmable feature. Select Temperature None (Std)
58HP Hollow Bore Range the initial output type to be -20º to 85º C (Std) CE CE Marked 7
(Blind) A 1 to 16,384 programmed at factory. T6 -40º to 100º C
B 1 to 65,536
Programmable Outputs
SEALING
OC Open Collector2 CONNECTOR TYPE
CPR1 IP50 (Standard)
BORE SIZE PP Push-Pull MY 7-pin MS4
Programmable feature. S1 IP64
HV Line Driver MX 10-pin MS
01 1/4", 0.250" 04 6 mm Select the initial CPR S3 IP66
03 5/16", 0.3125" 14 8 mm to be programmed at Limited Programmable3 MJ 5-pin M12 (12 mm)5
S4 IP67
02 3/8", 0.375" 10 10 mm factory. 5-30 VDC in & 5 VDC out MK 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
05 1/2", 0.500" 09 11 mm H5 Line Driver F00 Gland, 24" Cable 6
11 5/8", 0.625" 12 12 mm P5 Push-Pull M00 Gland, 2M Cable 6
waveform1 9D 9-pin D-Sub
13 14 mm
15 15 mm Programmable feature. Non-Programmable MR 12-pin M23
Select the initial index and Output
waveform configuration to be PU Pull-Up Resistor2
MOUNTING
programmed at factory. See
SE 2.25" to 2.75" B.C. page 56 for options.
3-point Flex Mount
SH 2.72" to 3.42" B.C.
(Block & Pin) Tether Arm Kit
SG 3.50" to 5.90" B.C. NOTES:
(4.5" C-face) Tether Arm Kit 1 Programmable feature using Field Programming Software, USB Programming Module, and Interface Cable. For more
SJ 3.50" to 8.10" B.C. information, see EPC Field Programming Software User Guide at encoder.com.
(8.5" C-face) Tether Arm Kit 2 Open Collector (OC) and Pull-Up Resistor (PU) outputs not recommended for CPR > 8192 and/or
frequencies > 150 KHz.
3 If ordered with initial output type of either H5 or P5, encoder cannot be programmed to OC, PP, or HV output types.
4 7-pin MS Connector does not provide Index Pulse Z when selected output is Line Driver (HV or H5).
5 5-pin M12 Connectors only available with Pull-Up, Open Collector, and Push-Pull output types.
6 For non-standard English cable lengths enter ‘F’ plus cable length expressed in feet. Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable.
For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length expressed in meters.
Example: M06 = 6 meters of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.

M o d e l 58T P Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 58t P / 58H P 3-p o i n t F l e x M o u n t (SE)
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 30 VDC max. See Output Types for
limitations
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no output load (65 mA
typical)
Output Format �� Incremental, Programmable. See Waveforms
on following pages for options.
Output Types �� Line Driver* (HV) – 20 mA max per channel,
max freq 1.0 MHz, 5 VDC max at 100° C or
24 VDC max at 85° C.
Line Driver* (H5) – 5-30 VDC in/5 VDC out,
20 mA max per channel, max freq 2.7 MHz,
Push-Pull (PP) – 20 mA max per channel, max
frequency 1.0 MHz, 5 VDC max at 100° C or 24
VDC max at 85° C.
Push-Pull (P5) – 5-30 VDC in/5 VDC out,
20 mA max per channel, max frequency
2.7 MHz, 5 VDC max at 100° C. M o d e l 58t P / 58H P c o n n e c to r o p t i o n s
Open Collector (OC) – 100 mA max per
channel, 200 KHz max freq recommended
Pull-Up (PU) – 2.2K ohm internal resistors,
100 mA max per channel, 150 KHz max freq
recommended, max temp 85° C at > 24 VDC
*Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply
Index �� Once per revolution, programmable. EPC
standard is 180° gated to output A (waveform
B5). See Waveform Diagrams for additional
options. 5, 8-pin m12 9-pin D-SUB gland cable 12-pin m23 7-pin MS Style 10-Pin ms
Index Teach �� Index location adjustable via programming
interface.
Max Frequency �� 2.7 MHz subject to RPM restrictions for high
resolution (CPR): M o d e l 58t P / 58H P m o u n t i n g o p t i o n s
5000 RPM max for CPR 16385 to 32768 and 2500
RPM max for CPR 32769 to 65536
NOTE: Use 5 VDC Line Driver (H5 or HV output
type) to obtain high frequencies.
Electrical Protection ��Overvoltage, reverse voltage, and output
short circuit protected. NOTE: Sustained over
or reverse voltage may result in permanent
damage.
Emission tested per EN 61000-6-4:2007 +
A1: 2011
Accuracy �� Better than 0.015° or 54 arc-sec from true
position
Diagnostic �� LED located on encoder housing and error
SH Mount SG Mount SJ Mount
report available via programming Interface.
Mechanical Metric dimensions are given in brackets [mm].
Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may be
Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel W i r i n g Ta b l e
Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional
Bore Tolerance �� -0.0000"/+0.001" For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
User Shaft Tolerances Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Gland Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 7-pin MS 7-pin MS 9-pin
Axial Endplay �� ±0.030 max
Function Wire Color M12** M12** 10-pin MS HV,H5 PU,PP,OC,P5 D-sub 12-pin M23
Starting Torque �� IP50 sealing: 3.0 oz-in typical
IP64 sealing: 4.0 oz-in typical Com Black 3 7 F F F 9 10
IP66 or IP67 sealing: 7.0 oz-in typical +VDC Red 1 2 D D D 1 12
Moment of Inertia �� 5.5 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 A White 4 1 A A A 2 5
Housing �� Black non, corrosive finish A' Brown -- 3 H C -- 3 6

Weight �� 10 oz. B Blue 2 4 B B B 4 8
Environmental B' Violet -- 5 I E -- 5 1
Operating Temp �� -20° to 85° C for standard models Z Orange 5 6 C -- C 6 3
-40° to 100° C for extended temp option Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- 7 4
NOTE: For IP66 or IP67 sealing derate max temperature of 100° C
by 4° C for every 1000 RPM above 2000 RPM. Case Green -- -- G G G 8 9
Humidity �� 95% RH non-condensing Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Vibration �� 10 to 2000 Hz A 20g (International Standard +VDC Sense -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2
IEC 60068-2-6) Com Sense -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 11
Shock �� 80g @ 6 ms Duration (International Standard
IEC 60068-2-27) *CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal case.
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64, IP66 or IP67 optional

M o d e l 5 8 t p - p r o g r a mm a b l e
E P C S ta n da r d Wav e f o r m (B5)
Additional waveforms available. See below for other options.


complementary signals A, B, Z apply to Line Driver (HV & H5) outputs only.
An EPC Thru-Bore Encoder in a common application,

mounted on a motor with an SJ Flex Mount
Wav e f o r m S
Choose any of these waveforms using the Field Programming Software, USB programming module, and interface
cable (see page 57).
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
Odd numbers - A leads B A and B - High Going Index A and W - 90 Degree Index
Even numbers - B leads A W and X - Low Going Index B and X - 180 Degree Index

F i e l d p r o g r a mm i n g s o f t w a r e
With the easy to use, point-and-click interface, programming is quick and straight-forward. The number of possible configurations
makes this Size 58 programmable thru-bore or hollow bore encoder incredibly versatile. Anywhere a Size 58 thru-bore or hollow bore
encoder goes, the Model 58TP can get the job done.
Available on USB drive or by download.
System requirements:
• Windows 7 or higher operating systems

• USB 2.0 port required for USB Programming Module (see below)
CPR – any resolution from 1 to 65,536

That's 262,144 counts using 4x quadrature counting
Waveform – choose from 32 options

See page 56 for waveform choices
Output type – 6 different output types US B p r o g r a m m i n g Ki t

Kit includes Field Programming Software, USB Programming
All output types are 5V to 30V in/out except H5 Line Driver and Module, and 2-meter Interface Cable with specified
connector. See Accessories for individual Interface Cables.
P5 Push-Pull output types, which are 5-30VDC in and 5VDC out.
Connector Type Item #

7-pin MS Pr1-001-07
10-pin MS Pr1-001-10
5-pin M12 Pr1-001-J
8-pin M12 Pr1-001-K
Interface Cable 9-pin D-Sub Pr1-001-09

Model 58TP with SE Flex Mount assembled USB Programming Module (black) Gland Cable Pr1-001-G
with programming accessories USB drive for Field Programming Software (blue)
12-pin M23 Pr1-001-R

M o d e l 5 8 tF
Features
58 mm Thru-Bore or Hollow Bore (Blind)
Standard and Metric Thru-Bore Sizes up to 5/8” and 15 mm
Resolution from 1 to 65,536 CPR
Several Flexible Mounting Options
Sealing Options up to IP67
Multiple Connector Options
The Model 58TF Accu-CoderPro™ is a 58 mm thru-bore encoder that is

specifically designed for the challenges of an industrial environment. Its
advanced set of electronics allow the encoder to be configured to meet
your exact application needs. Choose from 6 output types, 32 different
waveforms, and select any resolution from 1 to 65,536 CPR (that’s 262,144
counts in full quadrature). The Model 58TF is also highly mechanically
configurable, with bore options up to 5/8" or 15 mm, several flexible
mounting options, multiple connector options, and sealing up to IP67. This
versatile thru-bore encoder can go in almost any application.
Common Applications
Motor Control, Conveyors, Elevator Controls, Machine Control, Food
Processing, Process Control, Robotics, Material Handling, Textile Machines
Ø58 mm and all types of Motion Control Feedback
M o d e l 58t F O r d e r i n g G u i d e

-20º to 85ºC Std IP50 Std None Std
58TF 02 SE X 1000 B5 OC S MK
MODEL Operating CERTIFICATION

OUTPUT TYPE 1
58TF Thru-Bore Temperature None (Std)
CPR OC Open Collector2
58HF Hollow Bore -20º to 85º C (Std) CE CE Marked 6
1 - 65,536 PP Push-Pull
(Blind) T6 -40º to 100º C
Price Adder for > 16,384 HV Line Driver
PU Pull-Up Resistor2 SEALING
BORE SIZE H5 Line Driver CONNECTOR TYPE
IP50 (Standard)
01 1/4", 0.250" 04 6 mm P5 Push-Pull MY 7-pin MS3
S1 IP64
03 5/16", 0.3125" 14 8 mm MX 10-pin MS
S3 IP66
02 3/8", 0.375" 10 10 mm MJ 5-pin M12 (12 mm)4
waveform S4 IP67
05 1/2", 0.500" 09 11 mm MK 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
11 5/8", 0.625" 12 12 mm Select the index and F00 Gland, 24" Cable 5
13 14 mm waveform configuration. See M00 Gland, 2M Cable 5
15 15 mm page 56 for options. 9D 9-pin D-Sub
MR 12-pin M23
MOUNTING
SE 2.25" to 2.75" B.C.
3-point Flex Mount NOTES:
SH 2.72" to 3.42" B.C. 1 All output types are 5V to 30V in/out except H5 Line Driver and P5 Push-Pull output types, which
(Block & Pin) Tether Arm Kit are 5-30VDC in and 5VDC out.
SG 3.50" to 5.90" B.C. 2 Open Collector (OC) and Pull-Up Resistor (PU) outputs not recommended for CPR > 8192 and/or
(4.5" C-face) Tether Arm Kit frequencies > 150 KHz.
SJ 3.50" to 8.10" B.C. 3 7-pin MS Connector does not provide Index Pulse Z when selected output is Line Driver (HV or H5).
(8.5" C-face) Tether Arm Kit 4 5-pin M12 Connectors only available with Pull-Up, Open Collector, and Push-Pull output types.
Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable. For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length
expressed in meters. Example: M06 = 6 meters of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable
lengths only.

M o d e l 58 TF Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Electrical M o d e l 58t F / 58H F 3-p o i n t F l e x M o u n t (SE)
limitations
typical)
on page 56 for options.
frequency 1.0 MHz, 5 VDC max at 100° C or 24
VDC max at 85° C.
2.7 MHz, 5 VDC max at 100° C.
Open Collector (OC) – 100 mA max per M o d e l 58t F / 58HF c o n n e c to r o p t i o n s
options.
Max Frequency �� 2.7 MHz subject to RPM restrictions for high 5, 8-pin m12 9-pin D-SUB gland cable 12-pin m23 7-pin MS Style 10-Pin ms
resolution (CPR):
5000 RPM max for CPR 16385 to 32768 and 2500
type) to obtain high frequencies. M o d e l 58t F / 58HF m o u n t i n g o p t i o n s
damage.
Emission tested per EN 61000-6-4:2007 +
A1: 2011
position
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed �� 6000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may be SH Mount SG Mount SJ Mount
Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel
Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
Bore Tolerance �� -0.0000"/+0.001"
Radial Runout �� 0.005" max W i r i n g Ta b l e
Axial Endplay �� ±0.030 max For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Starting Torque �� IP50 sealing: 3.0 oz-in typical Trim back and insulate unused wires.
IP64 sealing: 4.0 oz-in typical
IP66 or IP67 sealing: 7.0 oz-in typical Gland Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 7-pin MS 7-pin MS 9-pin
Moment of Inertia �� 5.5 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 Function Wire Color M12** M12** 10-pin MS HV,H5 PU,PP,OC,P5 D-sub 12-pin M23
Com Black 3 7 F F F 9 10
Housing �� Black non, corrosive finish
+VDC Red 1 2 D D D 1 12
Weight �� 10 oz.
A White 4 1 A A A 2 5
Environmental
Operating Temp �� -20° to 85° C for standard models A' Brown -- 3 H C -- 3 6
-40° to 100° C for extended temp option B Blue 2 4 B B B 4 8
NOTE: For IP66 or IP67 sealing derate max temperature of 100° C B' Violet -- 5 I E -- 5 1
by 4° C for every 1000 RPM above 2000 RPM.
Humidity �� 95% RH non-condensing Z Orange 5 6 C -- C 6 3
Vibration �� 10 to 2000 Hz A 20g (International Standard Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- 7 4
IEC 60068-2-6) Case Green -- -- G G G 8 9
Shock �� 80g @ 6 ms Duration (International Standard Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- --
IEC 60068-2-27)
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64, IP66 or IP67 optional +VDC Sense -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2
Com Sense -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 11

Model 775
Features
Thru-Bore Design for Easy Mounting
Bore Options to 1.375"
Resolutions to 4096 CPR
100° C Operating Temperature Available
The sleek design of the Model 775 Thru-Bore Series Accu-Coder™ makes
form and function a successful reality. The slim profile and Thru-Bore design,
makes installation easy by simply slipping the bore over motor shafts up
to 1.375" in diameter. The advanced Opto-ASIC based electronics provide
the superior noise immunity necessary in many industrial applications.
With a variety of bore sizes, resolutions, and connector types, application
possibilities are endless.
Common Applications
Motor Feedback, Velocity & Position Control, Food Processing, Robotics,
Ø4.3" Material Handling
775 A H 1024 Q OC C Y N N CE
MODEL Operating ANTI-ROTATION CERTIFICATION
775 Slim Thru-Bore Temperature FLEX MOUNT N None
OUTPUT TYPE
S 0° to 70° C N None CE CE Marked 7
H 0° to 100° C 5 - 28V In/Out 2 A Style A
OC Open Collector
HOUSING STYLE PU Pull-Up Resistor MATING
CYCLES PER PP Push-Pull CONNECTOR
A Completely encloses motor shaft, CONNECTOR TYPE4
REVOLUTION HV Line Driver 3
and eliminates access to motor P Gland Nut with 24" Cable 5 N No Connector
shaft. For physical protection only. 1 - 4096 W 6-pin MS6 Y Yes
B Thru-Bore housing version. See CPR Options below for Y 7-pin MS3,6
Allows access to motor shaft. available resolutions. X 10-pin MS6
Price adder for CPR >1024 J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)3,6
K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)6
9D 9-pin D-subminiature
NUMBER OF CHANNELS1
Channel A Leads B
Q Quadrature A & B BORE SIZE
R Quadrature A & B with Index A 5/8", 0.625" collet style H 14 mm collet style
Channel B Leads A B 3/4", 0.750" collet style I 19 mm collet style
K Reverse Quadrature A & B C 7/8", 0.875" collet style K 24 mm collet style
D Reverse Quadrature A & B D 1", 1.000" collet style M 25 mm clamp style
with Index O 1-1/8", 1.125" clamp style L 28 mm clamp style
See http://www.encoder.com/ T 1-1/4", 1.250" clamp style Q 30 mm clamp style
literature/index-phasing.pdf for V 1-3/8", 1.375" clamp style R 32 mm clamp style
additional options, and waveforms.
NOTES:
1 Contact Customer Service for index gating options.
M o d e l 775 C P R Op t i o n s 2 5 to 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
3 Line Driver Outputs not available with 5-pin M12 or 6-pin MS connector.
0060 0100 0120 0240 0250 0256 0500 Available with 7-pin MS connector only without Index Z.
0512 1000 1024 2048 2500 4096 4 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions; encoder.com.
not all disk resolutions available with all output types 5 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet. Example: P/6
= 6 feet of cable.
6 Connector options other than 9D and P require extended housing. See drawing, next page.

M o d e l 775 C o l l e t C l a m p (A , B, C, D, H, I, K)
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures
up to 70° C
between 70° C and 100° C
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no output load
Output Types �� Open Collector – 100 mA max per channel
ohm internal resistor, 100 mA max M o d e l 775 C l a m p S t y l e (O, T, V, M , L , Q )
per channel
Index �� Once per revolution.
0475 to 4096 CPR: Gated to output A
Max Frequency �� 200 kHz
permanent damage.
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3;
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141;
DDENV 50204; BS EN55022 (with
European compliance option);
M o d e l 775 Ex t e n d e d H o u s i n g (W, X, Y, J, K) Connector Type
6- or 7-pin MS
Height
0.67"
10-pin MS 0.90"
BS EN61000-6-2; 5- or 8-pin M12 0.50"
BS EN50081-2
Mechanical
be achievable, contact Customer
Service.
Axial Endplay �� ±0.030" with appropriate flex mount
Moment of Inertia �� 3.3 X 10-3 oz-in-sec2 typical
Housing �� All metal construction
Weight �� 1.0 lb with gland nut or D-sub M o d e l 775 S h o w n wi t h A n t i- R otat i o n F l e x M o u n t
connector option 1.5 lb with MS
connector option
Note: All weights typical
Environmental
Sealing �� IP50
For wiring table and waveforms, see page 64.

Model 776
Features
Slim Profile – Only 1.36" In Depth
Thru-Bore Design For Easy Mounting
Resolutions to 4096
Bore Options to 1.875"
The Thru-Bore Series Accu-Coder™ Model 776 encoder is designed to fit
directly on either a motor or other shaft where position, direction, or velocity
information is needed. The advanced Opto-ASIC based electronics provide
the superior noise immunity necessary in many industrial applications.
The Model 776 conveniently features a clamp type mount for fast and easy
mounting over a large range of shaft sizes. An optional anti-rotation flex
mount maintains housing stability.
Common Applications
Motor Feedback, Velocity & Position Control, Robotics, Conveyors,
Ø4.3" Material Handling
776 A H 1024 Q OC C Y N N CE
Operating ANTI-ROTATION
Temperature FLEX MOUNT CERTIFICATION
MODEL
S 0° to 70° C N None N None
776 Slim Thru-Bore
H 0° to 100° C OUTPUT TYPE A Style A CE CE Marked 7
5 - 28V In/Out 2
CYCLES PER OC Open Collector MATING
HOUSING STYLE PU Pull-Up Resistor
REVOLUTION CONNECTOR
A Completely encloses motor shaft, PP Push-Pull
and eliminates access to motor 1 - 4096 HV Line Driver 3 N No Connector
shaft. For physical protection only. See CPR Options below for Y Yes
B Thru-Bore housing version. Allows available resolutions.
access to motor shaft. Price adder for CPR >1024
CONNECTOR TYPE4
BORE SIZE P Gland Nut with 24" Cable 5
NUMBER OF CHANNELS1 G 1-7/16", 1.4375" W 6-pin MS3,6
Channel A Leads B C 1-1/2", 1.500" Y 7-pin MS3,6
Q Quadrature A & B D 1-5/8", 1.625" X 10-pin MS6
R Quadrature A & B with Index F 1-3/4", 1.750" J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)3,6
Channel B Leads A E 1-7/8", 1.875" K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)6
K Reverse Quadrature A & B 9D 9-pin D-subminiature
L 35 mm
D Reverse Quadrature A & B
I 38 mm
with Index
J 40 mm
See http://www.encoder.com/
M 42 mm
literature/index-phasing.pdf for
additional options and waveforms. N 43 mm
NOTES:
M o d e l 776 C P R Op t i o n s 1 Contact Customer Service for index gating options.
0060 0100 0120 0240 0250 0256 0500 2 5 to 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
3 Line Driver not available with 5-pin M12 or 6-pin MS connector. Available with 7-pin MS connector only without Index Z.
0512 1000 1024 2048 2500 4096 4 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions; encoder.com. For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration
not all disk resolutions available with all output types Diagrams at encoder.com.
5 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet. Example: P/6 = 6 feet of cable.
6 Connector options other than 9D and P require extended housing. See drawing, next page.

REVISIONS
M o d e l 776 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 776 W i t h G l a n d N u t C a b l e (P )
LTR DESCRIPTON CHK DATE APPR DATE
E PROTOTYPE
F ECO 00519 DIM CHANGE
G ECO 00632 CHANGED ORIENTATION
Electrical H
I
ECO 01020 CHANGED ORIENTATION
ECO 01185
J ECO 01335
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures K ECO 01567 BSR 9/17/02
up to 70° C
between 70° C and 100° C
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to100 kHz
M o d e l 776 W i t h 9- P i n D - S u bTOLERANCEC o n n eENCODER
c toPRODUCTS
r (9 D )
ISSUE DATE P
1/25/99 COMPANY E C
channel NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channel .005 MODEL 776 CATALOG DRAWING

+
- DR GDB 9/17/00

DWG NUMBER REV.
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel .01

776CAT1
+
- QC
K
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) .1°

+
PRJ ENG DWG SIZE SCALE SHEET OF

permanent damage.
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141;
DDENV 50204; BS EN55022
(with European compliance option);
M o d e l 776 Ex t e n d e d H o u s i n g (W, X, Y, J, K) Connector Type
6- or 7-pin MS
Height
0.67"
BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2 10-pin MS 0.90"
5- or 8-pin M12 0.50"
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at temperatures
> 99° C
Mechanical
Axial Endplay �� +0.030" with appropriate flex mount
Moment of Inertia �� 3.3 x 10-3 oz-in-sec2 typical

Housing �� All metal construction
Weight �� 1.0 lb with gland nut or D-sub
connector option 1.5 lb with MS
connector option M o d e l 776 S h o w n wi t h A n t i- R otat i o n F l e x M o u n t
Note: All weights typical
Environmental
Sealing �� IP50
For wiring table and waveforms, see page 64.

ModelS 775 & 776
Func- Gland Cable† 5-pin M12++ 8-pin M12++ 10-pin MS 7-pin MS 7-pin MS 6-pin MS 9-pin D-sub
tion Wire Color PU, PP, OC HV PU, PP, OC PU, PP, OC
Com Black 3 7 F F F A, F 9
+VDC Red 1 2 D D D B 1
A White 4 1 A A A D 2
A' Brown -- 3 H C -- -- 3
B Blue 2 4 B B B E 4
B' Violet -- 5 I E -- -- 5
Z Orange 5 6 C -- C C 6
Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- -- 7
Case -- -- -- G** G** G** -- 8+
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- --
*CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal Case.

**CE Option: Pin G is connected to Case. Non-CE Option: Pin G has No Connection.
+CE Option: Pin G is connected to Case. Non CE Option: Pin 8 has No Connection.
++CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to M12 connector coupling nut.
Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s LTR DESCRIPTON

REVISIONS
CHK DATE APPR DATE
LTR
- INITIAL RELEASE
DESCRIPTON
REVISIONS
CHK DATE APPR DATE
- INITIAL RELEASE
Line Driver and Push-Pull Open Collector and Pull-Up
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT A OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
OUTPUT B
gated to A = 180˚
ungated 270˚
INDEX Z
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
OUTPUT B CLOCKWISE ROTATION
NOTE: ALL DEGREEASREFERENCES
VIEWED FROM
ARETHE MOUNTINGDEGREES
ELECTRICAL FACE
gated to A = 180˚ SE770LR NOTE: INDEX IS POSITIVE GOING
ungated 270˚ NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES
INDEX Z
INDEX IS POSITIVE GOING
INDEX Z gated to A = 180˚
ungated 270˚
CLOCKWISE ROTATIONCLOCKWISE ROTATION

AS VIEWED FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
LD770LR NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES
A, B, Z for HV output only. ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE P
02/11/03
E C ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
ISSUE DATE NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
02/11/03 TOLERANCE E
P
C ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY +
- DR BSR 02/11/03
77X SINGLE
ENDED OUTPUT WAVEFORM
NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
77X
SE770LR
DWG NUMBER REV.
-+
.005
-
+
- DR
BSR 02/11/03 LINE DRIVER OUTPUT WAVEFORM
QC
PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG

DWG NUMBER REV. +
.1˚ N/A
LD770LR - A 1 1
-
+
- .01 QC

+
- .1˚ PRJ ENG DWG SIZE
A SCALE
N/A SHEET
1 1OF

bore options
When to Specify a Hollow Bore (Blind) Encoder
vs. a Thru-Bore Encoder
When specifying a rotary encoder, should you opt for a hollow bore (also called a "blind encoder") or
a thru-bore housing? Often either design can work equally well. However, in some situations there
are important reasons to choose one over the other.
Generally, thru-bore (or through-bore) housings have a bore opening that passes completely through
the encoder body. The encoder is more or less a donut. With a hollow bore (or blind bore) housing
the bore does not pass completely through the encoder, with the shaft end residing inside the
housing. The depth of the bore varies from model to model, with some units only having a cap or
cover on one side of the housing.
ABOVE: Model 25T, a 2.5 inch thru-bore

NOTE: EPC offers many incremental encoders in both thru-bore and hollow bore (blind) incremental encoder. Also available in
configurations. Due to their electronics, magnetic absolute encoders are only offered as hollow bore (blind). See below.
BELOW: A Model 25H hollow bore mounted
hollow bore (blind). See Absolute Section, pages 10 - 25, for Absolute Encoder options.
on a conveyor belt system. See page 52 for
product specifications.
A thru-bore housing offers more flexibility for shaft attachment. Provided a means of securing the
anti-rotation tether is readily available, a thru-bore encoder can be affixed to any point on the shaft in
question.
Here are three factors that favor use of a hollow bore (blind) encoder:
1. Environmental Seal. If your encoder will be exposed to dirt, dust

and moisture, consider a hollow bore encoder. A thru-bore encoder
has two exposed shaft seals that offer potential paths of contaminant
ingress. With a hollow bore solution, one seal is protected from
contaminants and potential leakage. If the encoder is exposed to
washdown or direct water spray, we recommend a hollow bore housing if possible.
2. Starting Torque. Since a sealed thru-bore encoder has two shaft seals, the friction created by
the additional shaft-seal interface is usually greater than that of a hollow bore housing, which can
ABOVE: Model 15H, a 1.5 inch hollow translate into greater starting torque for thru-bore versus hollow bore encoders.
bore, or blind, incremental encoder. Also
available in thru-bore. See below. 3. Safety. With a hollow bore encoder, hazards presented by an exposed rotating shaft are
BELOW: A Model 15T mounted on the
end of a motor. See page 40 for product minimized.
specifications.
For most applications the items above may be relatively minor points to consider when specifying
a rotary encoder. However, failure to properly address them could contribute to less than optimum
encoder longevity and performance, especially when an application pushes encoder performance
requirements toward the limits.
If you have questions about which housing is right for your application, our Technical Services
Department is available to help you find the right solution. Call today.

Model 770
Features
Slim Profile – Only 1.00" Deep
Fits NEMA Size 56C Thru 184C Motor Faces (4.5" AK)
The Model 770 C-Face encoder is a rugged, high resolution encoder designed to
mount directly on NEMA C-Face motors. Both sides of the encoder are C-Face
mounts, allowing additional C-Face devices to be mounted to this encoder. Unlike
many C-Face kit type encoders, the Model 770 contains precision bearings and an
internal flex mount, virtually eliminating encoder failures and inaccuracies induced
by motor shaft runout or axial endplay. The advanced Opto-ASIC design provides
the advanced noise immunity necessary for many industrial applications. This
encoder is ideal for applications using induction motors and flux vector control.
The Model 770 provides speed and position information for drive feedback in
a slim profile – only 1.00" thick. The Thru-Bore design allows fast and simple
mounting of the encoder directly to the accessory shaft or to the drive shaft of
the motor, using the standard motor face (NEMA sizes 56C - 184C). The tough, all-
metal housing resists the vibration and hazards of an industrial environment.
Common Applications
Motor Feedback, Velocity & Position Control, Conveyors, Variable Speed
Ø6.5" Drives, Mixing & Blending Motors, Assembly & Specialty Machines
770 A H 1024 Q OC A Y N N CE
MODEL Operating C-FACE GASKET
770 4.5" NEMA Temperature KIT OPTION 1
OUTPUT TYPE CERTIFICATION
“AK" Dimension S 0° to 70° C "B" HOUSING ONLY
5 - 28V In/Out 3 N None
H 0° to 100° C N No
OC Open Collector CE CE Marked 7
Y Yes
PU Pull-Up Resistor
CYCLES PER
PP Push-Pull
REVOLUTION MATING CONNECTOR
HV Line Driver 4
1 - 4096 N No Connector
See CPR Options below for Y Yes
available resolutions. BORE SIZE
Price adder for CPR >1024 A 5/8", 0.625" CONNECTOR TYPE5
B 3/4", 0.750"
P 24" Cable with Gland Nut 6
HOUSING STYLE NUMBER OF CHANNELS2 C 7/8", 0.875"
B Terminal Strip in Conduit Box
D 1", 1.000"
A Cover completely encloses motor Channel A Leads B X 10-pin MS on Conduit Box
H 14 mm
shaft and eliminates access Q Quadrature A & B Y 7-pin MS on Conduit Box4
I 19 mm
to motor shaft; IP65 rated. R Quadrature A & B with Index J 5-pin M12 on Conduit Box4
K 24 mm
Includes C-face Gasket Kit. Channel B Leads A K 8-pin M12 on Conduit Box
B Thru-Bore housing version with K Reverse Quadrature A & B L 10-pin Industrial Clamp
IP50 dust seal 1 D Reverse Quadrature A & B
with Index
literature/index-phasing.pdf
for additional options, and
waveforms.
NOTES:
1 Thru-bore version may be IP65 sealed if mounted between two C-Face devices with optional gasket kit.
Select 'Yes' under C-Face Gasket Kit Option.
M o d e l 770 C P R Op t i o n s 2 Contact Customer Service for index gating options.
0060 0100 0120 0240 0250 0256 0500 3 5 to 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0512 1000 1024 2048 2500 4096 4 Line Driver Outputs not available with 5-pin M12 connector. Available with 7-pin MS connector only without Index Z.
5 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin Configuration
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions; not all Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
disk resolutions available with all output types. 6 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet.
Example: P/6 = 6 feet of cable.
7 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at encoder.com..

REVISIONS
C ECO #01335 BSR 10/01/01
D ECO #01978 GMA 05/14/04
E ECO #05696 JP 02/17/09
M o d e l 770 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 770 W i t h G l a n d N u t (P )
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures CABLE
up to 70° C 3/8 THRU CLEARANCE HOLE GLAND NUT
ASSEMBLY
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures between 4X 90° Ø5.875 B.C.
SHAFT
70° C and 100° C CLAMPING
COLLAR
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to 100 kHz 4.500 +0.000
-0.003 4.501 +0.002
-0.000 7.00
quadrature with channel A leading B BORE SIZE
SEE ORDER GUIDE
6.250

from the mounting face. 15°
See Waveform Diagrams. 3/8-16 UNC 0.125
0.175
4X 90° Ø5.875 1.00 770GLAND
Output Types ��Open Collector – 100 mA max per B.C.

REVISIONS
channel LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
C ECO #01645 GMA 01/07/03
ohm internal resistor, 100 mA max per M o d e l 770 W i t h C o n d u i t B ox (B, X, Y, J, K) ISSUE DATE
1/11/99
TOLERANCE D P ECO #01978 GMA
E E C
ECO #05696 JP ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
02/17/09
05/14/04
channel +
- .005 DR GDB 1/05/99 MODEL 770 GLANDNUT
SEE ORDER GUIDE FOR PREV ASSEMBLY
DECIMAL CK
1.65 3.2 MAX DWG NUMBER REV.
770GLAND
CONNECTOR OPTIONSTHIRD ANGLE PROJECTION +
.01
E
- QC
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG

-+ .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
Index �� Once per revolution. 3/8 THRU CLEARANCE HOLE
4X 90° Ø5.875 B.C. SHAFT
0001 to 0474 CPR: Ungated CLAMPING
COLLAR
9.40
See Waveform Diagrams. 4.500 +0.000
-0.003
Max Frequency �� 200 kHz 4.501+0.002

-0.000
BORE SIZE
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short SEE ORDER GUIDE
reverse voltage may result in 3/8-16 UNC 15°
4X 90° Ø5.875 B.C. 0.175
permanent damage. 0.125
1.00
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3; 0.875
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; 770-CONN

TERMINAL CONNECTION
W/ HOLE FOR CONDUIT
ISSUE DATE
European compliance option); 1/11/99
TOLERANCE E
P
NEXT ASSEMBLY
Op t i o n a l H o u s i n g S t y l e (A)
DECIMAL
BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
.005 +
- DR GDB 1/05/99 MODEL 770 CONNECTOR
P r ot e c t iv e C o v e r PREV ASSEMBLY
DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER REV.
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical, 770-CONN
.01 +
E
- QC
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at -+ .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZE
Connector Type
B
Height
SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
temperatures > 99° C 6- or 7-pin MS 0.67"

10-pin MS 0.90"
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond 5- or 8-pin M12 0.50"
Mechanical
be achievable; contact Customer
Service.
Bore Tolerance �� +0.0015"/-0.000"
Radial Runout �� 0.005" All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified. REVISIONS
Axial Endplay �� +0.050" - INITIAL RELEASE
Moment of Inertia �� 3.3 x 10 -3 oz-in-sec 2 typical Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e

Housing �� All metal construction Line Driver and Push-Pull For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Weight �� 2.60 lb with gland nut Trim back and insulate unused wires.
3.00 lb with all other connector options OUTPUT A
OUTPUT A
Note: All weights typical Gland 5-pin
7-pin
Cable† M12++ 7-pin MS
10-pin
Environmental OUTPUT B Wire PU, PP, 8-pin 10-pin MS PU, PP, Term Indust.
Storage Temp �� -25° to 100° C Function Color OC M12++ MS HV OC Block Clamp
Com Black 3 7 F F F 2 1
OUTPUT B +VDC Red 1 2 D D D 1 6
gated to A = 180˚ A White 4 1 A A A 3 3
Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration INDEX Z ungated 270˚
A' Brown -- 3 H C -- 4 8
Sealing ��IP65 for Option A housing style with INDEX Z gated to A = 180˚
B Blue 2 4 B B B 5 2
gasket kit; IP50 for Option B housing style ungated 270˚
REVISIONS
B' Violet -- 5 I E -- 6 7
CLOCKWISE ROTATIONCLOCKWISE
AS VIEWED
- INITIAL FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
ROTATION
RELEASE
LD770LR NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES Z Orange 5 6 C -- C 7 4
Waveform shown with optional complementary signals Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- 8 9
A, B, Z for HV output only.
Case -- -- -- G** G** G** -- --
ISSUE DATE
Open Collector and Pull-Up 9+ 10+
TOLERANCE P
02/11/03 Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- --
E C

77X
+
.005 BSR 02/11/03
- DR
LINE DRIVER OUTPUT WAVEFORM
DWG NUMBER REV.
OUTPUTPARTANUMBER
-+ .01
ANGULAR
QC
MFG LD770LR - **CE Option: Pin G is connected to Case. Non-CE Option: Pin G has No Connection.
+CE Option: Pins 9 and 10 are connected to Case. Non CE Option: Pins 9 and 10 have No
+
A SCALE
N/A SHEET
1 1OF
OUTPUT B
Connection.
gated to A = 180˚
ungated 270˚
INDEX Z
CLOCKWISE ROTATION ASCLOCKWISE
VIEWED FROM ROTATION
THE MOUNTING FACE
NOTE: ALL
NOTE: ALL DEGREE DEGREE REFERENCES
REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL
DEGREES
NOTE:
INDEX IS POSITIVE
SE770LR INDEX IS POSITIVE GOING
GOING

Model 771
Features
Large Bore Size to 1.875" or 43 mm
Fits NEMA Size 182TC Thru 256TC Motor Faces (8.5" AK)
The Model 771 C-Face encoder is a rugged, high resolution encoder designed
to mount directly on NEMA C-Face motors. Both sides of the encoder are
C-Face mounts, allowing additional C-Face devices to be easily mounted.
Many competitive C-Face units are kit type encoders, but the Model
771 contains precision bearings and an internal flex mount that virtually
eliminates encoder failures and inaccuracies induced by motor shaft runout
or axial endplay. The advanced Opto-ASIC design provides superior noise
immunity necessary for many industrial applications. This encoder is ideal
for applications using induction motors and flux vector control. A Thru-
Bore design allows fast and simple mounting of the encoder directly to the
accessory shaft or drive shaft of a motor using a NEMA standard motor face
(sizes 182TC - 256TC). The tough, all metal housing resists the vibration and
hazards of an industrial environment.
Common Applications
Motor Feedback, Velocity & Position Control, Servo Control Systems,
Ø9.0" Assembly & Specialty Machines, Elevator Controls
771 A H 1024 Q OC A Y N N
MODEL Operating OUTPUT TYPE C-FACE MATING

771 8.5" NEMA Temperature 5 - 28V In/Out 3 GASKET KIT CONNECTOR
“AK" Dimension S 0° to 70° C OC Open Collector OPTION1 N No Connector
H 0° to 100° C PU Pull-Up Resistor N No Y Yes
PP Push-Pull Y Yes
CYCLES PER HV Line Driver4
REVOLUTION
1 - 4096 BORE SIZE
CONNECTOR TYPE5
See CPR Options below for T 5/8", 0.625"
P Gland Nut with 24" cable 6
HOUSING STYLE available resolutions. V 7/8", 0.875"
B Terminal Strip in Conduit Box
A Cover completely encloses motor Price adder for CPR >1024 W 1", 1.000"
X 10-pin MS on Conduit Box
shaft and eliminates access to A 1-1/8", 1.125"
Y 7-pin MS on Conduit Box4
motor shaft; IP65 rated. NUMBER OF CHANNELS2 K 1-1/4", 1.250"
J 5-pin M12 (12 mm) on Conduit Box4
B Thru-Bore housing version with Channel A Leads B B 1-3/8", 1.375"
K 8-pin M12 (12 mm) on Conduit Box
IP50 dust seal 1 Q Quadrature A & B C 1-1/2", 1.500"
L 10-pin Industrial Clamp
R Quadrature A & B with Index D 1-5/8", 1.625"
F 1-3/4", 1.750"
Channel B Leads A
E 1-7/8", 1.875"
H 28 mm
D Reverse Quadrature A & B with
Q 30 mm
Index
R 32 mm
See http://www.encoder.com/ L 35 mm
literature/index-phasing.pdf for I 38 mm
additional options, and waveforms. J 40 mm
M 42 mm
M o d e l 771 C P R Op t i o n s N 43 mm
0060 0100 0120 0240 0250 0256 0500 NOTES:

0512 1000 1024 2048 2500 4096
1 Thru-Bore version may be IP65 sealed if mounted between two C-Face devices with optional gasket kit. Select ‘Yes’ under
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions; not all C-Face Gasket Kit Option.
disk resolutions available with all output types 2 Contact Customer Service for index gating options.
3 5 to 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
4 Line Driver Outputs not available with 5-pin M12 connector. Available with 7-pin MS connector only without Index Z.
For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at
encoder.com.
6 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet. Example: P/6 = 6 feet of cable.

M o d e l 771 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 771 W i t h G l a n d N u t C a b l e (P )
Electrical
up to 70° C
quadrature with channel A leading
B for clockwise shaft rotation, as
viewed from the mounting face. See
Waveform Diagrams.
channel
M o d e l 771 W i t h C o n d u i t B ox (B, X, Y, J, K)
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channe
permanent damage.
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141;
European compliance option);
BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
Op t i o n a l H o u s i n g S t y l e
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at (A) P r ot e c t iv e C o v e r
Connector Type Height
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond 6- or 7-pin MSw 0.67"
10-pin MS 0.90"
Mechanical 5- or 8-pin M12 0.50"
6000 RPM for 1.125", 1.250", 1.375",
28 mm, 30 mm, 32 mm bore diameter
Axial Endplay �� +0.1" All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
REVISIONS
- INITIAL RELEASE
Moment of Inertia �� 3.3 x 10-3 oz-in-sec2 typical
Housing �� All metal construction Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
Weight �� 7.0 lb typical Line Driver and Push-Pull For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Environmental OUTPUT A Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Storage Temp �� -25° to 100° C OUTPUT A
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing Gland 5-pin 7-pin
OUTPUT B Cable† M12++ 7-pin MS 10-pin
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz Wire 8-pin 10-pin Term Indust.
PU, PP, MS PU, PP,
Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration Function Color OC M12++ MS HV OC Block Clamp
Sealing ��IP65 for Option A housing style with OUTPUT B Com Black 3 7 F F F 2 1
gasket kit; IP50 for Option B housing style gated to A = 180˚ +VDC Red 1 2 D D D 1 6
ungated 270˚
INDEX Z A White 4 1 A A A 3 3
INDEX Z gated to A = 180˚ A' Brown -- 3 H C -- 4 8
ungated 270˚
REVISIONS B Blue 2 4 B B B 5 2
CLOCKWISE ROTATIONCLOCKWISE
AS VIEWED
LTR FROM
ROTATION THE MOUNTING
DESCRIPTON FACE
CHK DATE APPR DATE
LD770LR NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES
- INITIAL RELEASE ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES
B' Violet -- 5 I E -- 6 7
Waveform shown with optional complementary signals Z Orange 5 6 C -- C 7 4
Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- 8 9
Open Collector and Pull-Up 9+ 10+
ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE P
02/11/03 E C ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY Case -- -- -- G** G** G**
77X
+
.005 BSR 02/11/03
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- --
- DR
DWG NUMBER REV.
.01
LD770LR -
+
- QC
OUTPUTPART
A NUMBER
ANGULAR
+
.1˚
MFG
A N/A 1 1OF
**CE Option: Pin G is connected to Case. Non-CE Option: Pin G has No Connection.
- PRJ ENG DWG SIZE SCALE SHEET
OUTPUT B +CE Option: Pins 9 and 10 are connected to Case. Non CE Option: Pins 9 and 10 have No
Connection.
gated to A = 180˚
ungated 270˚ †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield.
INDEX Z
CLOCKWISE ROTATION ASCLOCKWISE
VIEWED FROM ROTATION
THE MOUNTING FACE
NOTE: ALLNOTE:
DEGREEALL DEGREE REFERENCES
REFERENCES ARE ARE ELECTRICALDEGREES
ELECTRICAL DEGREES
NOTE: INDEX
INDEX IS POSITIVE
SE770LR GOINGIS POSITIVE GOING

Incremental Shaft Encoders
Model 711
Features
The Original Industry-Standard Cube
Versatile Housing Styles
Unidirectional Output
Resolutions Available to 10,000 CPR
The Model 711 Accu-Coder™ is the original, industry standard cube encoder.
Designed for compatibility with most programmable controllers, electronic
counters, motion controllers, and motor drives, it is ideally suited for
applications that require a simple, symmetrical, unidirectional square wave
output in a single channel format. Critical performance specifications for the
most popular resolutions and advanced Opto-ASIC circuitry – a single chip
design that eliminates many board level components – increase the reliability
of an already dependable and durable encoder. With new options continually
being added, the Model 711 excels in a wide variety of industrial applications.
Common applications
Feedback for Counters, PLCs & Motors, Measuring for Packaging, Filling &
Material Handling Machines, Wire Winding, Film Extrusion
711 0256 S HD1 6 S S N
MODEL OUTPUT TYPE SHAFT DIAMETER 4 MATING

711 Unidirectional Cube S Pull-Up Resistor 4 1/4", 0.250" 5 CONNECTOR
(Single Channel) O Open Collector 5 5/16", 0.3125" 6 N No Connector
PP Push-Pull 6 3/8", 0.375" Y Yes
HV Line Driver 8 1/2", 0.500" 7
CYCLES PER REVOLUTION (CPR)
10 5/8", 0.625" 7 CONNECTOR TYPE 9
1-10,000
See CPR Options below for available S Standard 6-pin MS
HOUSING TYPE SHAFT TYPE Y 7-pin MS
resolutions.
(1271 and above is a price adder) S 2.25" Standard Housing S Single J 5-pin M12 (12 mm) 8
S1 2.25" Standard Housing with IP50 Felt D Double ended 8 K 8-pin M12 (12 mm) 8
Shaft Seal 1 G Gland Nut – 18" Cable 10
IND12 Industrial Housing with IP66 Shaft Seal T Solder or Screw Terminal 11
HD1 3" x 3" x 6" Heavy Duty Housing2 B Solder Terminal with Conduit Box
HD3 Heavy Duty Housing with Conduit
Connector & Terminal Strip
HD5 Heavy Duty Housing with 10 mm Outer
Bearing2
HD10 Heavy Duty Housing with Ultra Heavy
Duty Bearings, 0.625" or 0.500" Shaft2
HD12 Heavy Duty Housing with IP66 Outer
Shaft Seal2
HD14 Heavy Duty Housing with IP66 Shaft Seal
and with Conduit Connector & Terminal
Strip
5PY Standard Cube With 5PY Adaptor 3
EX Explosion-proof Housing
NOTES:
1 Available with 0.250" shaft only.
M o d e l 711 C P R Op t i o n s 2 Only available with 6-pin MS or Screw Terminal Connector Types.
3 Only available with 5/16", 0.3125" sha ft.
0001 thru 0189* 0193 0198 0200 0205 0210 0240 4 Contact Customer Service for custom shaft lengths and diameters.
0250 0256 0276 0298 0300 0305 0308 0315 0333 5 Standard housing only.
0336 0350 0360 0400 0480 0500 0512 0580 0597 6 Standard or 5PY housing only.
0600 0700 0720 0800 0840 0960 1000 1024 1200 7 HD10 housing only.
8 Not available for HD or EX housings.
1250 1270 1500 1800* 2000 2048 2500 3000 3600* 9 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
4096 5000 6000 7200* 8192 10,000 Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at
*Contact Customer Service for availability. encoder.com.
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions. Not all disk resolutions G/6 = 6 feet of cable.
available with all output types. For CPR > 2500. Standard cable length only.
11 Screw terminals available for HD and EX housings. Solder terminals available for S and S1 housings.

Common to all cube housing styles.
Electrical Max Frequency �� 1 to 2500 CPR 125 kHz
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures 2501 to 5000 CPR 250 kHz Housing �� Black non-corrosive finished 6063-T6
up to 85° C 5001 to 10,000 CPR 500 kHz aluminum
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures Electrical Protection. ..Reverse voltage and output short Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings
between 85° C and 100° C. circuit protected. NOTE: Sustained
reverse voltage may result in Environmental
permanent damage. Operating Temp �� 0° to 85° C
Symmetry �� 180° (±18°) electrical Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C
Output Format �� Incremental – Square wave with
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing
single channel
Accuracy ��Within 0.05° mechanical from one cycle Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
to any other cycle, or 3 arc minutes. Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration
ohm internal resistor, 250 mA max Mechanical
per channel Max Speed �� 6000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channel achievable, contact Customer Service.
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel
S ta n da r d C u b e H o u s i n g For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable. Term.
(S, S1) Sp e c ifi c at i o n s 7-pin 6-pin 6-pin Block Term.
Gland 7 pin MS MS MS HV, Block
Mechanical
Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 10-pin MS O,S HV, O,S No O,S
Shaft Type �� Single or double-ended (specify choice)
Function Wire Color M12 M12 MS HV PP No Index PP Index HV,PP
Radial Loading �� 15 lb maximum (0.250" diameter shaft)
40 lb maximum (0.375" diameter shaft) Com Black 3 7 F F F A A,F 1 1,6
Axial Loading �� 10 lb maximum (0.250" diameter shaft)
+VDC Red 1 2 D D D B B 2 2
30 lb maximum (0.375" diameter shaft)
Starting Torque �� 0.13 oz-in typical for 0.250" shaft A White 4 1 A A A C D 3 4
0.38 oz-in typical for 0.375" shaft
Moment of Inertia �� 6.5 x 10-6 oz-in-sec2 A' Brown -- 3 H C -- D -- 4 --
Weight �� 10 oz for standard housing
Case -- -- -- G G G -- -- -- --
Shield Bare -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield.
C u b e P ivot M o u n t i n g
S ta n da r d C u b e H o u s i n g (S, S1) Brackets
176430-01 Single Pivot
Cube Housing with 1/4" Shaft (4) Cube Housing with 3/8" Shaft (6) 176431-01 Double Pivot
176430-02 Spring Loaded Single Pivot
176431-02 Spring Loaded Double Pivot
Encoder sold separately.
Dual Wheel
Single Wheel
(shown with Torsion Spring)

Model 715
Features
Versatile Housing Styles
Bi-Directional, Constant Pulse Width
Resolutions Available up to 10,000 CPR
The Model 715 Accu-Coder™ is ideally suited for applications requiring
bi-directional feedback with a constant pulse width. The Model 715 is
available in two versions. The Model 715-1 provides output pulses for
clockwise shaft rotation on one channel and pulses for counterclockwise
rotation on another. The Model 715-2 provides output pulses for counting on
one channel while the other channel indicates direction of rotation. Critical
performance specifications for the most popular resolutions and advanced
Opto-ASIC circuitry – a single chip design that eliminates many board level
components – increases the reliability of an already dependable and durable
encoder. With new options continually being added, the Model 715 excels in
a wide variety of industrial applications.
Common Applications
Measuring for Cut-to-Length, Labeling & Filling, Position Control, Motion
Following, or Slaving Applications
715-1 0256 .2 N S HD1 6 S S N
MODEL PULSE WIDTH OUTPUT TYPE SHAFT SHAFT TYPE MATING

715-1 Two Channels Values from S Pull-Up Resistor DIAMETER 4 S Single CONNECTOR
715-2 One Channel and .01 to 100 milliseconds O Open Collector 4 1/4", 0.250" 5 D Double ended 8 N No Connector
Direction Line 5 5/16", 0.3125" 6 Y Yes
PULSE 6 3/8", 0.375"
POLARITY 8 1/2", 0.500" 7
P Positive 10 5/8", 0.625" 7 CONNECTOR TYPE 9
Pulses per Revolution
(PPR) 2 - 10,000 N Negative S Standard 6-pin MS
J 5-pin M12 (12 mm) 8
See CPR Options below HOUSING TYPE K 8-pin M12 (12 mm) 8
for available resolutions G Gland Nut – 18" Cable 10
(1202 and above is a price adder) S 2.25" Standard Housing
S1 2.25" Standard Housing with IP50 Felt T Solder or Screw Terminal 11
Shaft Seal1 B Solder Terminal with Conduit Box
IND12 Industrial Housing with IP66 Shaft Seal
HD1 3" x 3" x 6" Heavy Duty Housing2
HD3 Heavy Duty Housing with Conduit
Connector & Terminal Strip
HD5 Heavy Duty Housing with 10 mm Outer Bearing2
HD10 Heavy Duty Housing with Ultra Heavy Duty
Bearings, 0.625" or 0.500" Shaft2
HD12 Heavy Duty Housing with IP66 Outer Shaft Seal2
HD14 Heavy Duty Housing with IP66 Shaft Seal and
with Conduit Connector & Terminal Strip
5PY Standard Cube with 5PY Adaptor3
EX Explosion-proof housing
NOTES:
M o d e l 715 P P R Op t i o n s 1 Available with 0.250" shaft only.
0001 thru 0189* 0193 0198 0200 0205 0210 0240 0250 2 Only available with 6-pin MS or Screw Terminal Connector Types.
0256 0276 0298 0300 0305 0308 0333 0336 0350 0360 3 Only available with 5/16", 0.3125" sha ft.
4 Contact Customer Service for custom shaft lengths and diameters.
0400 0480 0500 0512 0597 0600 0700 0720 0800 0840
5 Standard housing only.
0960 1000 1024 1200 1250 1270 1800 2000 2048 2500 6 Standard or 5PY housing only.
2x and 4x, of all of the above resolutions are available 7 HD10 housing only.
*Contact Customer Service for availability. 8 Not available for HD or EX housings.
9 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions. Not all disk resolutions available Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams
with all output types at encoder.com.
G/6 = 6 feet of cable.

Common to All Cube Housing Styles S ta n da r d C u b e H o u s i n g
(S, S1) Sp e c ifi c at i o n s
Electrical Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures Accuracy �� Within 0.05° mechanical from one Mechanical
up to 85° C cycle to any other cycle, or 3 arc Shaft Type �� Single or double-ended (specify choice)
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures minutes Radial Loading �� 15 lb maximum (0.250" diameter shaft)
between 85° to 100°C 40 lb maximum (0.375" diameter shaft)
Mechanical Axial Loading �� 10 lb maximum (0.250" diameter shaft)
Max Speed �� 6000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds 30 lb maximum (0.375" diameter shaft)
achievable, contact Customer Service. Starting Torque �� 0.13 oz-in typical for 0.250" shaft
Output Format �� Incremental – Square wave with timed
Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel 0.38 oz-in typical for 0.375" shaft
output
Housing �� Black non-corrosive finished 6063-T6 Moment of Inertia �� 6.5 x 10 -6 oz-in-sec 2
Output Types ��Open Collector – 250 mA max per
aluminum Weight �� 10 oz for standard housing
channel
Bearings ��Precision ABEC ball bearings
Pull-Up – Open collector with 1.5K
ohm internal resistor, 250 mA max per Environmental
channel Operating Temp �� 0 to 85° C
Max Frequency �� 0 to 125 kHz Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing
circuit protected. NOTE: Sustained Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
reverse voltage may result in Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration
permanent damage.
S ta n da r d C u b e H o u s i n g (S, S1) W i r i n g Ta b l e
Cube Housing with 1/4" Shaft (4) Cube Housing with 3/8" Shaft (6) Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Gland Cable† Term.

Function Wire Color 5-pin M12 8-pin M12 6-pin MS Block
Com Black 3 7 A,F 1,6
+VDC Red 1 2 B 2
A White 4 1 D 4
B Blue 2 4 E 5
Shield Bare -- -- -- --
Model 715-1
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED COUNTER-CLOCKWISE

FROM THE MOUNTING FACE ROTATION AS VIEWED
Model 715-1 Bi-Directional Encoder

The 715-1 provides two output channels. A constant
pulse width is generated on one channel with clockwise
shaft rotation, and on the other channel with counter-
clockwise shaft rotation. Specify PPR in any even
numbered value between 2 and 10,000. Specify any
pulse width from 10 microseconds to 100 milliseconds
and pulse polarity. Some options require Heavy Duty
housing. The Line Driver output option is not available.
Model 715-2
C u b e P ivot M o u n t i n g
Brackets
176430-01 Single Pivot
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
176431-01 Double Pivot FROM THE MOUNTING FACE ROTATION AS VIEWED
176430-02 Spring Loaded Single Pivot FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
Model 715-2 Bi-Directional Encoder
Encoder sold separately. The 715-2 provides two output channels. One channel
has a constant pulse width output regardless of shaft
rotation direction. The other channel indicates direction
Dual Wheel Single Wheel with logic level “1” for clockwise shaft rotation, and level
(shown with Torsion Spring) “0” for counter-clockwise shaft rotation. Options are the
same as for the Model 715-1.

Model 716
Features
Five Versatile Housing Styles
Quadrature Output
New Resolutions Available to 10,000 CPR
The Model 716 Accu-Coder™ is ideally suited for applications requiring a
quadrature output. Designed for compatibility with most programmable
controllers, electronic counters, motion controllers, and motor drives, it
is ideally suited for industrial applications where it is important that the
direction of rotation be known. Critical performance specifications for the
most popular resolutions and advanced Opto-ASIC circuitry – a single chip
design that eliminates many board level components – increase the reliability
of an already dependable and durable encoder. With new options continually
being added, the Model 716 excels in a wide variety of industrial applications.
Common Applications
Feedback for Counters, PLCs & Motors, Cut-to-Length, Labeling, Measuring for
Packaging, Filling & Material Handling Machines, Wire Winding, Film Extrusion
716 0256 1 N S HD1 6 S S N
MODEL INDEX PULSE SHAFT MATING

716 Quadrature Cube Blank No Index OUTPUT TYPE DIAMETER 5 CONNECTOR
1 Index Pulse S Pull-Up Resistor 4 1/4", 0.250" 6 N No Connector
O Open Collector 5 5/16", 0.3125" 7 Y Yes
PULSE PP Push-Pull 6 3/8", 0.375"
HV Line Driver 8 1/2", 0.500" 8
POLARITY 1
CYCLES PER REVOLUTION (CPR) P Positive 10 5/8", 0.625" 8
1-10,000 CONNECTOR TYPE 10
N Negative S Standard 6-pin MS
See CPR Options below for available
SHAFT TYPE Y 7-pin MS
resolutions.
HOUSING TYPE S Single X 10-pin MS
(601 and above is a price adder)
S 2.25" Standard Housing D Double ended 9 J 5-pin M12 (12 mm) 9
S1 2.25" Standard Housing with IP50 Felt Shaft Seal 2 K 8-pin M12 (12 mm) 9
IND12 Industrial Housing with IP66 Shaft Seal G Gland Nut – 18" Cable 11
HD1 3" x 3" x 6" Heavy Duty Housing3 T Solder or Screw Terminal 12
HD3 Heavy Duty Housing with Conduit Connector & B Solder Terminal with Conduit Box
Terminal Strip
HD5 Heavy Duty Housing with 10 mm Outer Bearing3
HD10 Heavy Duty Housing with Ultra Heavy Duty
Bearings, 0.625" or 0.500" Shaft3
HD12 Heavy Duty Housing with IP66 Outer Shaft Seal3
HD14 Heavy Duty Housing with IP66 Shaft Seal and with
Conduit Connector & Terminal Strip
5PY Standard Cube With 5PY Adaptor 4
EX Explosion-proof Housing
m o d e l 716 c p r o p t i o n s NOTES:
0001 thru 0189* 0193 0198 0200 0205 0210 0240 1 Complete only if Index Pulse option is selected.
0250 0256 0276 0298 0300 0305 0308 0315 0333 2 Available with 0.250" shaft only.
0336 0350 0360 0400 0480 0500 0512 0580 0597 3 Only available with 6-pin MS or Screw Terminal Connector Types.
4 Only available with 5/16" (0.3125") shaft.
0600 0700 0720 0800 0840 0960 1000 1024 1200 5 Contact Customer Service for custom shaft lengths and diameters.
1250 1270 1500 1800* 2000 2048 2500 3000 3600* 6 Standard housing only.
4096 5000 6000 7200* 8192 10,000 7 Standard or 5PY housing only.
*Contact Customer Service for availability. 8 HD10 housing only.
9 Not available for HD or EX housings.
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions. Not all disk resolutions 10 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin
available with all output types. Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams
at encoder.com.
11 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet.
Example: G/6 = 6 feet of cable. For CPR > 2500. Standard cable length only.

Common to All Cube Housing Styles
Electrical Mechanical
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures Max Frequency...... �� 1 to 2500 CPR 125 kHz, 2501 to 5000 Max Speed �� 6000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds
up to 85° C CPR 250 kHz, 5001 to 10,000 CPR achievable, contact Customer Service.
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures 500 kHz Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel
between 85° C and 100° C. Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short Housing �� Black non-corrosive finished 6063-T6
Input Current �� 80 mA maximum with no output load circuit protected. NOTE: Sustained aluminum
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to 100 kHz reverse voltage may result in Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings
Output Format �� Incremental – Square wave with single permanent damage.
channel Index �� Once per revolution, 180° electrical Environmental
gated to Channel A. See Waveform Operating Temp �� 0° to 85° C
Diagrams. Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C
Pull-Up – Open collector with 1.5K
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical, 54° Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing
Edge Separation electrical minimum at Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz
channel
temperatures > 99° C Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) Accuracy �� Within 0.05° mechanical from one
cycle to any other cycle, or 3 arc
minutes
Standard Cube Housing For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
(S, S1) Specifications Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Gland
Mechanical Cable† 10-pin 7-pin 7-pin Term.
Wire 5-pin 8-pin MS MS MS 6-pin MS 6-pin MS Term. Block Block
Shaft Type �� Single or double-ended (specify choice)
Function Color M12 M12 HV HV O,S,PP HV,No Index O,S,PP HV,No Index O,S,PP
Radial Loading �� 15 lb maximum (0.250" diameter shaft)
40 lb maximum (0.375" diameter shaft) Com Black 3 7 F F F A A,F 1 1,6
Axial Loading �� 10 lb maximum (0.250" diameter shaft) +VDC Red 1 2 D D D B B 2 2
30 lb maximum (0.375" diameter shaft) A White 4 1 A A A C D 3 4
Starting Torque �� 0.13 oz-in typical for 0.250" shaft
0.38 oz-in typical for 0.375" shaft A' Brown -- 3 H C -- D -- 4 --
Moment of Inertia �� 6.5 x 10-6 oz-in-sec2 B Blue 2 4 B B B E E 5 5
Weight �� 10 oz for standard housing B' Violet -- 5 I E -- F -- 6 --
Z Orange 5 6 C -- C -- C -- 3
Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- -- -- -- --
Case Green -- -- G G G -- -- -- --
Shield Bare -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
S ta n da r d C u b e H o u s i n g (S, S1) C u b e P ivot M o u n t i n g B r a c k e t s

Cube Housing with 1/4" Shaft (4) Cube Housing with 3/8" Shaft (6) 176430-01 Single Pivot
176431-01 Double Pivot
176430-02 Spring Loaded Single Pivot
Encoder sold separately.
Line Driver and Push-Pull
Dual Wheel Single Wheel

(shown with Torsion Spring)
CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE MOUNTING FACE

Open Collector and Pull-Up

Cube Housings
I n d u s t r i a l C u b e H o u s i n g (I ND12)
This more robust unit meets requirements between Standard and Heavy Duty housings while retaining the Cube design. The Industrial 12 (IND12)
model features an IP66 shaft seal. The tough, sealed aluminum housing has a wall thickness of 0.187" and offers greater protection from wash
down, sprays, dust, moisture, shock, vibration, and other hazards found in industrial environments.
Industrial Cube Housing

(I ND12) Sp e c ifi c at i o n s
Refer to all Standard Cube Housing specifications
except as follows:
Mechanical
Shaft Size �� 0.375" diameter
Shaft Type �� Single- or Double-Ended Shaft Available
Radial Loading �� 40 lb Maximum
Axial Loading �� 30 lb Maximum
Starting Torque �� 3 oz-in Starting Torque w/IP66 Shaft Seal
All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified
H e avy D u t y C u b e H o u s i n g (HD 12)

The Heavy Duty housing uses a separate 0.375" diameter external shaft and bearing assembly H e avy D u t y C u b e H o u s i n g
to rotate the shaft of an internally mounted Cube Housing. This provides mechanical isolation (HD 12) Sp e c ifi c at i o n s
from external loads and stress. A flexible coupling between the external shaft and the Refer to all cube specifications except as follows:
encoder protects the internal unit from axial and radial loading. The 0.250" aluminum walls Mechanical
protect the encoder from external shock, vibration, and the outside environment. Max Speed �� 6000 RPM
Shaft Size �� 0.375"
Heavy Duty Housing Options Rotation �� Either direction
HD 1 Heavy Duty 3" x 6" housing Radial Loading �� 40 lb maximum (50 lb for HD 5)
HD 3 Heavy Duty w/conduit connector (threaded for 0.500" NPT Conduit) and terminal strip Axial Loading �� 30 lb maximum (35 lb for HD 5)
HD 5 Heavy Duty w/10 mm outer bearing Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings
HD 12* Heavy Duty w/IP66 rated outer shaft seal Starting Torque �� 1 oz-in; 3 oz-in w/IP66 seal
HD 14* Heavy Duty w/IP66 rated outer shaft seal, conduit connector Mounting �� Tapped holes face and base
(threaded for 0.500" NPT Conduit), and terminal strip Weight �� 3.25 lb
*These units have an outer boss diameter of 1.000"
U lt r a H e avy D u t y
C u b e H o u s i n g (HD 10)
U lt r a H e avy D u t y C u b e H o u s i n g (HD 10) Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Mechanical
The HD 10 Ultra Heavy Duty encoder is designed for use in applications with severe shaft Max Speed �� 6000 RPM
loading conditions. The HD 10 offers two shaft sizes: 0.500" and 0.625". Shaft material is 303 Shaft Size �� 0.500" or 0.625"
stainless steel. Bearings are conservatively rated at 95 lb radial and 60 lb axial shaft loading. Rotation �� Either direction
IP66 shaft seal is standard on all units. The HD 10 Ultra Heavy Duty housing uses a larger Radial Loading �� 95 lb operating
external shaft and R10 bearing assembly to rotate the shaft of an internally mounted Cube Axial Loading �� 60 lb operating
Housing. This provides mechanical isolation from external loads and stress. A flexible coupling Bearings �� ABEC precision ball bearings
between the external shaft and the encoder protects the internal unit from axial and radial Bearing Life �� 15,000 hours at rated load
Starting Torque �� 3 oz-in IP66 rated
loading. The 0.250" aluminum walls protect the encoder from external shock, vibration, and
Mounting �� Tapped holes face and base
the outside environment. Weight �� 3.85 lb

U lt r a H e avy D u t y C u b e H o u s i n g (HD 10)—c o n T 'D
All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005” or +0.01” unless otherwise specified
Exp l o s i o n- P r o o f H o u s i n g (E X)
An explosion-proof housing is available for installing the Cube Series Accu-Coder™ in hazardous Exp l o s i o n- P r o o f
locations. The Cube Series encoder is mounted within the explosion-proof housing and is H o u s i n g (E X)
coupled to the 0.375" shaft assembly by a flexible shaft coupling. This decreases radial and axial
loading on the internal encoder shaft and bearings to ensure long life. Electrical connection to Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
The explosion-proof housing is designed to meet the
the Accu-Coder™ is by an internal barrier terminal strip. A threaded hole for 0.500" NPT conduit following:
is provided. NEC Class 1, Groups C and D
NEC Class 2, Groups E, F, and G
UL Standard 1203
Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D
Class 2, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G
CSA Standard C 22.2 No. 30-M 1986
NEMA 7 and NEMA 9
Refer to all cube specifications except as follows:
Mechanical
Max Speed �� 4000 RPM
Radial Loading �� 30 lb operating
Axial Loading �� 10 lb operating
Weight �� 6 lb
Finish �� Unpainted Aluminum
C u b e S e r i e s Op t i o n a l 5P Y A da p t e r (175443)
The all aluminum optional 5PY adapter allows any standard housing Cube Series encoder to replace
DC tachometer technology. The 5PY adapter is interchangeable with any 5PY tach generator.
Order standard housing Cube Series

Accu-Coder™ with 5/16” shaft and
specify part #175443.
All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005” or +0.01” unless otherwise specified.

Model 15S
Features
High Performance Economical Encoder
Low Profile – Less Than 1.0" (25.4 mm) Height and 1.5" (38 mm) Diameter
Extended Temperature Operating Ranges Available
Up to 12 Pole Commutation Optional (for Brushless Motor Control)
The Model 15S Accu-Coder™ offers a high performance feedback solution
in a low profile package, making the Model 15S ideal for commercial and
light-duty industrial applications. This industry standard Size 15 (1.5"
diameter) encoder features a precision bearing set, sealing available to IP64,
a durable stainless steel shaft, and a selection of servo, flange, and face
mount options. The Model 15S may also be specified with features such as
extended operating temperatures from -40° C to 120° C, and up to 12 pole
commutation for brushless motor control. The Model 15S features EPC's
Opto-ASIC circuitry for a clean, reliable signal. Its durable yet economical
design makes it an ideal encoder for high precision OEM applications.
Common Applications
Servo Motor Control, Robotics, Medical Diagnostic Equipment, Specialty
Ø1.5" Assembly Machines, Digital Plotters, Printers, Typesetting Equipment
M o d e l 15 S O r d e r i n g G u i d e

-20° to 85° C Std IP50 Std
15S 19 M1 0500 N 5 A OC F00
MODEL CYCLES PER Input CONNECTOR TYPE6 Operating CERTIFICATION

15S Shaft Mount REVOLUTION Voltage F00 18" Cable 7 (Std) Temperature None (Std)
See CPR Options below 5 5 VDC F01 12" Cable -20° to 85° C (Std)
F02 24" Cable CE CE Marked11
SHAFT SIZE 1 Price adder >1800 V1 5 to 28 VDC T1 -40° to 85° C
F03 36" Cable T2 -20° to 100° C
21 3/16", 0.1875" M00 2M Cable 7
Commutation 2 T3 -20° to 120° C 10
23 4 mm J00 18" Cable with 5-pin M128
N No Commutation T7 -40° to 120° C10
19 1/4", 0.250" K00 18" Cable with 8-pin M128
20 6 mm A 4 Pole
B 6 Pole A00 15-pin Header with 18"Cable9 SEALING
MOUNTING C 8 Pole IP50 (Std)
M1 3 hole 28 mm BC Servo Mount E 10 Pole OUTPUT TYPE S1 IP64
MAXIMUM
M2 3 hole 1.210" BC Servo Mount D 12 Pole OC Open Collector FREQUENCY
M3 2.093" Square Flange PP Push-Pull Standard
NUMBER OF CHANNELS3 HV Line Driver
M4 2.096" Servo Mount F3 Extended
A Channel A PU Pull-Up Resistor5
M5 4 hole 1.100" Servo Mount See Specifications
M6 4 hole 1.000" Servo Mount Channel A Leads B OD Open Collector with
M7 4 hole 1.181" Servo Mount Q Quadrature A & B Differential Outputs
M8 3 hole 1.181/1.260" Servo Mount R Quadrature A & B with Index Available on special request.
M9 3 hole 1.210" BC Servo Mount Channel B Leads A4 Additional lead times may apply:
K Reverse Quadrature A & B LO Line Driver on ABZ,
D Reverse Quadrature A & B Open Collector on UVW5
with Index
NOTES:
2 Not available in all configurations, and not available with V1 Input Voltage. Contact Customer Service for availability.
M o d e l 15S C P R Op t i o n s 3 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating or phase relationship options, or see Quadrature Phasing
0001 thru 0189* 0198 0200 0250 0256 0300 and Index Gating Options at encoder.com.
0315 0360 0400 0500 0512 0580 0600 4 Reverse Quadrature not available with PU output type.
0750 0800 1000 1024 1200 1250 1500 5 With Input Voltage above 16 VDC, operating temperature is limited to 85° C.
1800 2000 2048 2500 2540 3000 3600 6 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams,
see Technical Information or see Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
4000 4096 5000 6000 7200 8192 10,000 7 For non-standard English cable lengths enter ‘F’ plus cable length expressed in feet.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable. For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length expressed in
Contact Customer Service to determine all currently available meters. Example: M06 = 6 meters of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.
values. Special disk resolutions are available upon request 8 Not available with commutation. 5-pin not available with Line Driver (HV, OD, LO) outputs. Additional cable lengths
and may be subject to a one-time NRE fee. available. Please contact Customer Service.
9 Pin Header available with 5 VDC Input Voltage, HV Line Driver and standard quadrature phasing only. Not available
with CE Certification. IP50 sealing option only.
10 Only available with 5 VDC Input Voltage.

M o d e l 15S Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 15S S ta n da r d S e r v o M o u n t M1
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 5 VDC +10% Fixed Voltage
4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures
up to 85° C
between 85° to 100° C
Input Current ��140 mA max (65 mA typical for most
configurations) with no output load
clockwise shaft rotation, as viewed from the
encoder mounting face.
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 2.2K ohm M o d e l 15S S e r v o M o u n t M 2 & M 9*
internal resistor, 20 mA max per channel *M9 mount includes a 0.750" boss
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel (Meets
RS 422 at 5 VDC supply.)
Index �� Once per revolution. CABLE LENGTH 0.079 [2.01]
18" [457] STANDARD 0.60 [15.2]
1 to 189 CPR: Ungated 0.040 [1.02]
4-40 UNC-2B 0.25 [6.35] DEEP
190 to 10,000 CPR: Gated to output A
3X 120° Ø1.210 [30.73] B.C.
Max. Frequency �� Standard Frequency Response is +0.000
1.375 -0.001
200 kHz for CPR 1 to 2540 1.5
[ 34.92 +0.00
-0.03 ]
500 kHz for CPR 2541 to 5000 [38]
1 MHz for CPR 5001 to 10,000 Ø0.2498 +0.0000
-0.0004
+0.00
Extended Frequency Response (optional) is [ 6.34 -0.01 ]
300 kHz for CPR 2000, 2048, 2500, and 2540. 0.547 +0.000 0.062 [1.57]
Ø1.625 -0.001
Electrical Protection ��Reverse voltage and output short circuit [Ø41.28] [ 13.89 +0.00
-0.03 ] 0.055 [1.40]
protected. NOTE: Sustained reverse voltage 15-serv2 0.93 [23.6]
may result in permanent damage.

Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-6-2;
BS EN50081-2; BS EN61000-4-2; M o d e l 15S S e r v o M o u n t M 5
BS EN61000-4-3; BS EN61000-4-6; BS EN500811
ISSUE DATE
Edge Separation 54° electrical minimum at temperatures > 99° C CABLE LENGTH +0.000
1.437 -0.005 TOLERANCE 1.04P[26.4] ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
18" [457] .132 [3.36]
[ Ø36.50 +0.00
-0.13 ]
Waveform Symmetry �� 180° (±18°) electrical (single channel encoder) STANDARD
.040 [1.02]
1.3115 ±0.0005
Accuracy �� Within 0.017° mechanical or 1 arc-minute [33.312 ±0.013] .50 [12.8]
from true position (for CPR >189). 0.8745 ±0.0005
Commutation �� Up to 12 pole. Contact Customer Service for [Ø22.212 ±0.013]
1.5
availability. [38]
Comm. Accuracy �� 1° mechanical Ø0.2498 +0.0000
-0.0004
[ Ø6.345 +0.000
-0.010 ]
Mechanical
Max Shaft Speed �� 8000 RPM. Higher speeds may be 4-40 UNC-2B .300 [7.62] DEEP .093 [2.36]
achievable, contact Customer Service. 4X @ 90° Ø1.100 [27.94] B.C. .078 [1.98]
Shaft Material �� Stainless Steel 15-serv5
Radial Shaft Load �� 5 lb max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for bearing
life of 1.2 x 1010 revolutions
Axial Shaft Load �� 5 lb max. Rated load of 2 to 3 lb for bearing M o d e l 15S S e r v o M o u n t M 6
life of 1.2 x 1010 revolutions
ISSUE DATE
Starting Torque �� IP50- 0.05 oz-in TOLERANCE P
CABLE LENGTH
IP64‑ 0.4 oz-in 18" [457] STANDARD 0.6875 +0.000
-0.001
Moment of Inertia �� 6.7 x 10-5 oz-in-sec2 (4.8 gm-cm2) [ 17.462 +0.00
-0.03 ]
0.60 [15.2]
Environmental 1.500
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing 1.5
[38]
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz Ø0.2498 +0.0000
-0.0004
Shock �� 80 g @ 11 ms duration [ 6.34 +0.00
-0.01 ]
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64 available
0.120 [3.04]
M3X0.5 -6H 0.187 DEEP 0.82 [20.8]
4X Ø1.000 B.C. 15-serv6

Model 15S
M o d e l 15S S e r v o M o u n t M7
CABLE LENGTH 0.100 [2.54]
18" [457] STANDARD 0.312 [7.92]
M3 0.18 [4.57] DEEP 0.500 [12.70]
4X 90° Ø1.181 [30.00] B.C.
1.5
[38]
0.020 [0.51]
+0.0000 +0.00
Ø0.2498 -0.0004 [ 6.34 -0.01 ]
+0.0000
0.7870 -0.0005 0.158 [4.01]
+0.000
[ 19.990 -0.013 ] 15-SERV7 0.78 [19.8]
CABLE LENGTH
+0.000
18" [457] STANDARD 0.6875 -0.001
[ 17.462 +0.00 0.60 [15.2]
-0.03 ]
ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE
2.093 P
[53.16]
1.5
[38]
Ø0.2498 +0.0000
-0.0004
+0.00
[ 6.34 -0.01 ]
0.120 [3.05]
4-40 UNC-2B 0.187 DEEP 0.100 [2.54]
4X Ø1.000 B.C. 0.72 [18.3]
15-serv4
M o d e l 15S Sq ua r e F l a n g e M3
ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE P
+0.000 +0.00
CABLE LENGTH 0.6875 -0.001 [ 17.463 -0.03 ]
18" [457] STANDARD Ø0.125 [3.18] 4X

0.60 [15.2]
2.093
[53.16]
1.750 1.5
[44.45] [38]
0.875 Ø0.2498 +0.0000
-0.0004
[22.23] [ 6.34 +0.00
-0.01 ]
0.875 0.120 [3.05]

[22.23]
0.150 [3.81]
1.750 [44.45]
2.093 [53.16] 15-serv3 0.67 [17.0]
CABLE LENGTH ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE P
ENCODER0.100
PRODUCTS
[2.54] COMPANY
18" [457] STANDARD
0.312 [7.92]
M3 0.18 [4.57] DEEP
0.500 [12.70]
3X 120° Ø1.260 [32.00] B.C.
0.7870 +0.0000
-0.0005
[ 19.990 +0.000
-0.013 ]
1.5
[38]
0.020 [0.51]
+0.0000 +0.00
Ø0.2498 -0.0004 [ 6.34 -0.01 ]
M3 0.18 [4.57] DEEP 0.158 [4.01]

3X 120° Ø1.181 [30.00] B.C. 0.78 [19.8]
15-SERV8

ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE E
P
REVISIONS
- INITIAL RELEASE
Incremental Signals
INCREMENTAL SIGNALS
15-pi n H e a d e r
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
OUTPUT B
gated to A = 180°
INDEX Z
INDEX Z
gated to A = 180°
Commutation Signals
COMMUTATION SIGNALS
±1° mechanical
OUTPUT U
Pin 1
OUTPUT U
120°
OUTPUT V
OUTPUT V
120°
OUTPUT W
OUTPUT W
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
CLOCKWISE AS VIEWED
ROTATION
15wave FROM THE
NOTE: ALL DEGREE MOUNTING
REFERENCES FACE
signals A, B, Z for HV and OD outputs only.
ISSUE DATE
04/22/04
TOLERANCE E
P
W-+ .005
i r i n g DRTaSKWb7/24/03
le LINE DRIVER AND COMM.
OUTPUT WAVEFORM
PREV ASSEMBLY For EPC-supplied
DECIMAL CK mating cables, refer
DWG NUMBER to wiring table provided with cable. REV.
15wave
-+ .01
Trim back andMFG
QC
insulate unused wires. -
PART NUMBER ANGULAR
+
- .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZE A SCALE N/A SHEET 1 1OF
Gland
Cable†
Function Wire Color 5-pin M12** 8-pin M12** 15-pin Header
Com Black 3 7 1
+VDC White 1 2 2
A Brown 4 1 4
A' Yellow -- 3 3
B Red 2 4 6
B' Green -- 5 5
Z Orange 5 6 7
Z' Blue -- 8 8
U Violet -- -- 10
U' Gray -- -- 9
V Pink -- -- 14
V' Tan -- -- 13
W Red/Green -- -- 12
W' Red/Yellow -- -- 11
†Standard cable for non-commutated models is 24 AWG; for commutated units, conductors are 28 AWG.

Model 755A
Features
Miniature Size (1.5" Diameter)
Up to 30,000 CPR
Servo or Flange Mounting
1 MHz Frequency Response Available
Extended Temperature Operating Range Available
The Model 755A Size 15 Accu-Coder™ is ideal for applications requiring a small,
high precision, high performance encoder. Approximately 1.5" in diameter
and 1.5" long, it will fit where many encoders cannot. Designed with all-metal
construction and shielded ball bearings, it will provide years of trouble-free use.
The standard servo mount (S) version is available with a variety of shaft sizes and
lengths. Three additional servo style mounts (S1, S2, S3) are also available. The
optional flange mounting (MF) is ideal for applications requiring a bolt-on, high
precision encoder. With its high reliability and quick delivery, the Model 755A
encoder is the perfect replacement encoder in this size category.
Common Applications
Robotics, Assembly Machines, Motor-Mounted Feedback,
Phototypesetters, Printers & Digital Plotters, Elevator Controls,
Ø1.5" Medical Diagnostic Equipment
M o d e l 755A O r d e r i n g G u i d e
755A 07 S 1000 R HV 1 S S CE
MODEL OUTPUT TYPE CERTIFICATION
755A Model 755A CYCLES PER 5 - 28V In/Out 5 N None
REVOLUTION OC Open Collector CE CE Marked 8,13
SHAFT SIZE 1 PU Pull-Up Resistor
1-30,000
07 1/4", 0.250" PP Push-Pull CONNECTOR TYPE10
See CPR Options below for
08 5 mm HV Line Driver6
available resolutions. S Standard 18" Cable 11
06 6 mm
Price adder for CPR >1270 8 - 28V In/5V Out 7 C01 8-pin Molex
32 1/4", 0.250" Servo
H5 Line Driver6,8 C02 Terminal Block
1,2,or 3 only
P5 Push-Pull7 j00 18" Cable with 5-pin M12 6,12
20 6 mm x 0.500"
K00 18" Cable with 8-pin M12 12
19 1/4", 0.250" x 0.500"
NUMBER OF CHANNELS4 MAXIMUM
Operating A Channel A FREQUENCY MOUNTING & HOUSINGS
Temperature Channel A Leads B 1 Standard 100 kHz S Standard Servo Mount
L -40° to 70° C2 Q Quadrature A & B 2 200 kHz ≤ 3000 CPR MF Square Flange
S 0° to 70° C R Quadrature A & B with Index 5 250 kHz, >3000 CPR S1 Servo Mount (Choose shaft 32)
H 0° to 100° C 3 Channel B Leads A 3 500 kHz, >6000 CPR 9 S2 Servo Mount (Choose shaft 32)
K Reverse Quadrature A & B 4 1 MHz, >10,000 CPR 9 S3 Servo Mount (Choose shaft 32)
with Index
M o d e l 755A C P R Op t i o n s NOTES:
0001* 0002* 0004* 0005* 0006* 0007* 0008* 0010* 0011* 1 Contact Customer Service for additional options.
0012* 0014* 0020 0021* 0024* 0025* 0028* 0030* 0032* 2 Low temperature option not available with resolutions of 3000 CPR or higher.
0033* 0034* 0035* 0038* 0040* 0042* 0045* 0050* 0060 3 0° to 85° C for certain resolutions, see CPR Options.
0064* 0100 0120 0125 0128* 0144* 0150* 0160* 0192* 5 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0200 0240* 0250 0254* 0256* 0300 0333* 0336* 0360 6 5-pin not available with Line Driver (HV, H5) outputs.
0400 0500 0512 0600 0625* 0635 0665* 0720 0768* 7 Standard temperature, 60 to 3000 CPR only. Not available with 2540 CPR.
0800 0889 1000 1024 1200 1201*a 1203*a 1204*a 1250a 8 H5 and P5 outputs are not available with CE option.
1270a 1440 1500 1800 2000 2048 2400a 2500 2540a 9 Standard cable lengths only. For details, please refer to Technical Bulletin
2880a 3000a 3600a 4000a 4096a 5000a 6000a 7200a 7500a TB116: Noise and Signal Distortion Considerations at encoder.com.
9000a 10,000a 10,240a 12,000a 12,500a 14,400a 15,000a 18,000a 20,000a 10 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.
20,480a 25,000a 30,000a com. For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see
*Contact Customer Service for High Temperature Option (H). 11 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in
aHigh Temperature Option (H) limited to 85° C maximum for these CPR options.
feet. Example: S/6 = 6 feet of cable.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Service to determine all 12 Additional cable lengths available. Please consult Customer Service.
currently available CPR values. Special disk resolutions are available upon request. A one-time 13 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at
NRE fee may apply. encoder.com.

REVISIONS
B ECO #00646
C ECO #01006
D ECO #01185
E ECO #01965 GMA 04/07/04
F ECO #06367 JP 05/16/12
M o d e l 755A Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 755A S ta n da r d S e r v o M o u n t (s)

Electrical M3 0.30 [7.6] DEEP
3X 120° Ø1.100 B.C.
1.35 [34.3]
0.157 [4.0]
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures 0.275 [7.0]
up to 70° C 1.570 +0.000
-0.002
0.500 [12.7]
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures [40]
OPTIONAL REVISIONS
Ø1.500
between 70° C to 100° C 0.7870 +0.0000
-0.0005 EXTENSION LTR DESCRIPTION
[38]
DATE
[20] FOR Ø1/4" A ECO #00833
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no output load SHAFTS B ECO #01185
FLATS
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to 100 kHz 2X 120°
C ECO #01965 GMA 04/06/04
0.100 [2.5]
Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in 0.193 [4.9]
CABLE LENGTH 18" STANDARD
quadrature with channel A leading B for 55A-ser 0.098 [2.5]
the encoder mounting face.
M o d e l 755A S e r v o M o u n t s (S1 & S2)
S2 Pictured below has
a 0.750" Boss. S1 has
ISSUE DATE a 0.547" Boss. See
internal resistor, 100 mA max per channel TOLERANCE P
E C
www.encoder.com to
Push-Pull – 20 mA max per channel NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
S1 download drawings
+ .005
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel - DR GDB 5/25/00 MODEL 755A SERVO MOUNT (S)
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) DWG NUMBER REV.
55A-ser
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION +
.01
F
- QC
Index �� Occurs once per revolution. The index for PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG
-+ .1° ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
units >3000 CPR is 90° gated to Outputs A
and B. See Waveform Diagrams.
S2
Max Frequency �� 100 kHz std; Up to 1 MHz optional.
(See Ordering Guide for availability) M o d e l 755A S e r v o M o u n t (S3)
voltage may result in permanent damage. ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE E
P
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3; NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; DDENV +

- .005 DR GDB MODEL 755A SERVO MOUNT (S1)
PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL
CK
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION DWG NUMBER REV.
+
.01
55A-SM1
- QC
compliance option); BS EN61000-6-2; PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG C

-+ .1°
BS EN50081-2
PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1

100 kHz output
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 180° (±36°) electrical
Quad Phasing �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 90° (±22.5°) electrical at
100 kHz output
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 90° (±36°)
M o d e l 755A 1.575" Sq ua r e F l a n g e (M F)
Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at 100 kHz output
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 54° electrical
>20,480 CPR: 50° electrical
Accuracy �� Instrument and Quadrature Error: For
200 to 1999 CPR, 0.017° mechanical
(1.0 arc minutes) from one cycle to any
other cycle. For 2000 to 3000 CPR, 0.01°
mechanical (0.6 arc minutes) from one
cycle to any other cycle. Interpolation
error (units > 3000 CPR only) within 0.005°
mechanical. (Total Optical Encoder Error = All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01".
unless otherwise specified metric dimensions are given in brackets [mm]. Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s
Instrument + Quadrature + Interpolation)
Mechanical W i r i n g Ta b l e
Max Speed �� 7500 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may be For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Radial Shaft Load �� 5 lb Gland Term. 8-pin 5-pin 8-pin
Axial Shaft Load �� 3 lb
Cable† Block Molex M12** M12** CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
Starting Torque �� 0.14 oz-in typical
Function Wire Color NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES.
4.0 oz-in typical for -40° C operation INDEX IS PO=SITIVE GOING.
Moment of Inertia �� 2.8 x 10 -4 oz-in-sec 2 Com Black 7 2 3 7

Housing �� Black non-corrosive finish +VDC White 8 1 1 2 Line Driver and Push-Pull
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings A Brown 1 8 4 1
Weight �� 3.10 oz servo mount, typical
A' Yellow 2 7 -- 3
Environmental
B Red 3 4 2 4
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing B' Green 4 3 -- 5
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz Z Orange 6 6 5 6
Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration Z' Blue 5 5 -- 8
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
*CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal case. Waveform shown with optional complementary
†Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield. signals A, B, Z for HV output only.

Model 702
Features
Standard Size 20 Package (2x2)
Flange and Servo Mounting
Up to 30,000 CPR
80 lb Maximum Axial and Radial Shaft Loading
The Model 702 Size 20 Accu-Coder™ is a heavy duty, extremely rugged,
reliable, yet compact industry standard 2" diameter encoder, designed for
harsh factory and plant floor environments. The double shielded ball bearings
are rated at 80 lb maximum axial and radial shaft loading to ensure a long
operating life. Made to withstand the harsh effects of the real world, both
the flange and servo models are rated IP67 with the optional heavy duty
shaft seal. With a variety of mounting options in both the flange and servo
models, the Model 702 is ideal for both new applications and replacements.
If you need an encoder that won't let you down, the Model 702 is it.
Common Applications
Motion Control Feedback, Conveyors, Elevator Controls, Machine Control, Food
Ø2.0" Processing, Process Control, Robotics, Material Handling, Textile Machines
702 20 S 1000 R HV 1 F 1 E X N CE
MODEL Operating OUTPUT TYPE SEALing CONNECTOR MATING CERTIFICATION
702 Size 20 (2.0") Temperature 5 - 28V In/Out 6 N No Seal LOCATION CONNECTOR N None
S 0° to 70° C OC Open Collector 1 IP66 E End N No CE CE Marked 13
L -40° to 70° C 3 PU Pull-Up Resistor 2 IP64 S Side Y Yes
H 0° to 100° C 4 PP Push-Pull 5 IP67
HV Line Driver 7
SHAFT SIZE 1 CYCLES 8 - 28V In/5V Out 8,9 CONNECTOR
PER REVOLUTION H5 Line Driver 7 MOUNTING TYPE 11
07 1/4", 0.250"
20 3/8", 0.375" 1-30,000 P5 Push-Pull Flange Mounts W 6-pin MS7
21 10 mm See CPR Options below F 1.181" Female Pilot Y 7-pin MS7
30 3/8", 0.375" 2 for available resolutions. L 0.687" Male Pilot X 10-pin MS
24 1/4", 0.250" No Flat Price adder for CPR >1270 MAXIMUM G 1.250" Male Pilot 9D 9-pin D-subminiature
FREQUENCY K Size 25 w/30 Shaft J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)7
1 100 kHz (Standard) Servo Mounts K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
NUMBER OF CHANNELS5 2 200 kHz ≤ 3000 CPR S w/1.181" Female Pilot G Gland, 24" Cable 12
5 250 kHz, > 3000 CPR U S w/0.687" Male Pilot H 10-pin Bayonet
A Channel A
3 500 kHz, > 6000 CPR10 T S w/1.250" Male Pilot
Channel A Leads B
4 1 MHz, > 10,000 CPR10 C w/1.181" Female Pilot
Q Quadrature A & B
R Quadrature A & B with Index E C w/0.687" Male Pilot
D C w/1.250" Male Pilot
Channel B Leads A P w/1.181" Female Pilot
Q P w/0.687" Male Pilot
R P w/1.250" Male Pilot
with Index
J Size 25 w/30 Shaft
M o d e l 702 C P R Op t i o n s NOTES:
0001* 0002* 0004* 0005* 0006* 0007* 0008* 0010* 0011* 1 Contact Customer Service for additional options.
0012* 0014* 0020 0021* 0024* 0025* 0028* 0030* 0032* 2 Shaft with Size 25 Mounting Adapter, J or K mounting only.
0033* 0034* 0035* 0038* 0040* 0042* 0045* 0050* 0060 3 Low temperature option not available with resolutions of 3000 CPR or higher.
0064* 0100 0120 0125 0128* 0144* 0150* 0160* 0192* 4 0° to 85° C for certain resolutions, see CPR Options.
5 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating options.
0200 0240* 0250 0254* 0256* 0300 0333* 0336 0360
6 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0400 0500 0512 0600 0625* 0635 0665* 0720 0768* 7 Line Driver not available with 5-pin M12 or 6-pin MS connector. Available with 7-pin MS connector
0800 0889 1000 1024 1200 1201*a 1203*a 1204*a 1250a only without Index Z.
1270a 1440 1500 1800 2000 2048 2400a 2500 2540a 8 Standard temperature, 60 to 3000 CPR only. Not available with 2540 CPR.
2880a 3000a 3600a 4000a 4096a 5000a 6000a 7200a 7500a 9 H5 and P5 outputs are not available with CE option, or any End Mount MS Connector.
9000a 10,000a 10,240a 12,000a 12,500a 14,400a 15,000a 18,000a 10 Standard cable lengths only. For details, please refer to Technical Bulletin
20,000a 20,480a 25,000a 30,000a TB116: Noise and Signal Distortion Considerations at encoder.com.
11 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For
*Contact Customer Service for High Temperature Option.
aHigh Temperature Option (H) limited to 85° C maximum for these CPR options. Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin
Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Service to deter- 12 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet.
mine all currently available CPR values. Special disk resolutions are available upon request. Example: G/6 = 6 feet of cable.
A one-time NRE fee may apply. 13 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at
encoder.com.
M o d e l 702 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 702 2.0" S e r v o M o u n t (S)
Electrical SIDE OR END MOUNT
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures CONNECTORS AVAILABLE
up to 70° C
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures between 0.87
70° C and 100° C 0.75

0.60
0.625
Ø2.000
Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in Ø2.00
0.050
quadrature with channel A leading B for 0.050
0.600
the encoder mounting face. 4-40 UNC-2B
0.075 0.50
0.25 DEEP 0.200
See Waveform Diagrams. 3X 120° Ø1.500 B.C. 0.100
Output Types �� Open Collector – 100 mA max per channel 2.00
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 2.2K ohm 702SER1

Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel M o d eISSUE
l 702DATE 2.0"
TOLERANCE
Servo M o u n t (C )
P
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) SIDE OR END MOUNT

Index �� Occurs once per revolution. The index for CONNECTORS AVAILABLE

0.87
0.75
Max Frequency �� Up to 1 MHz 0.625 0.60
Ø2.000
voltage may result in permanent damage. 0.050
Ø2.00
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3; 0.050
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141;

0.075 0.600
DDENV 50204; BS EN55022 0.200
0.50
10-32 UNF-2B
(with European compliance option); 0.25 DEEP 0.100
4X 90° 1.625 B.C.
BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2 2.00
Symmetry �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 180° (±18°) electrical at 100 702SER2
kHz output
Quad Phasing �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 90° (±22.5°) electrical at ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE
M o d e l 702 2.0" S e r v o MENCODER
o u n tPRODUCTS COMPANY P
100 kHz output (P )

Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at 100 kHz output SIDE OR END MOUNT
CONNECTORS AVAILABLE
>20,480 CPR: 50° electrical 0.87
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond 0.75
0.60
Accuracy �� Instrument and Quadrature Error: For 200 0.625
to 1999 CPR, 0.017° mechanical (1.0 arc

minutes) from one cycle to any other cycle. Ø2.000
Ø2.00
For 2000 to 3000 CPR, 0.01° mechanical 0.050
0.050
other cycle. Interpolation error (units > 0.075 0.600
0.50
6-32 UNC-2B
3000 CPR only) within 0.005° mechanical. 0.25 DEEP
0.200
3X 120° Ø1.750 B.C. 0.100
(Total Optical Encoder Error = Instrument + 2.00
Quadrature + Interpolation) 702SER3
Mechanical
achievable, contact Customer Service. Op t i o n a l DATE
ISSUE P i l ot s F o r F l aENCODER
TOLERANCE
n g e APRODUCTS
n d S e rCOMPANY
vo MountsP

Radial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for (G, T, D, R) (L , U, E, Q )
Axial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for 0.120 0.120
Starting Torque �� 1.0 oz-in typical with IP64 seal or no seal
Ø1.249 +.000
-.002 Ø0.6870 ±0.0005
702-BOSSB 702-BOSS2
Environmental
Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.

Model 702
M o d e l 702 2.0" F l a n g e M o u n t (F) Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s
M o d e l 702 W i t h 2.5" F l a n g e M o u n t (K)

A, B, Z for HV and H5 outputs only.
REVISIONS
M o d e l 702 W i t h 2.5" S e r vo M o u n t (J )
SIDE OR END MOUNT

10-32 UNF-2B
0.225 Deep 6x 60°
ON Ø1.875 B.C.
1.175 CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
0.750 NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES.
0.60
0.025
Ø2.00
Ø2.300
Ø0.3748+0.0000-0.0004
0.120 0.50
Ø1.249
± 0.000
0.002 0.100 0.87
0.200
702 SPEC503
Ø2.500 0.300
2.00
ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE
P
E C

+ 702 ENCODER WITH 2.5 SERVO MOUNT SPEC503
- DR
702SPEC503
DWG NUMBER REV.
-+ QC
PART NUMBER ANGULAR
+
-
MFG

7-pin 6-pin
7-pin MS MS
Gland Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 10-Pin MS PU,PP, PU,PP 9-pin 10-pin
Function Wire Color M12** M12** MS HV,H5 OC,P5 OC,P5 D-sub Bayonet
Com Black 3 7 F F F A,F 9 F *CE Option: Cable shield

(bare wire) is connected to
+VDC Red 1 2 D D D B 1 D internal case.
†Standard cable is 24 AWG
A White 4 1 A A A D 2 A conductors with foil and

braid shield.
**CE option: Use cable
A' Brown -- 3 H C -- -- 3 H cordset with shield
connected to M12
B Blue 2 4 B B B E 4 B connector coupling nut.
B' Violet -- 5 I E -- -- 5 J
Z Orange 5 6 C -- C C 6 C
Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- -- 7 K
Case Green -- -- G G G -- 8 G
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Model 702
Ultra Rugged 2.0" Encoder
Quick Specs
Mounting Options
• Rugged Industrial Encoder The 702 Motor Mount comes with
• 2” x 2” Housing a coupling and is available with a
• CPR to 30,000 Bossed Hub to attach directly to
• Flex Mount for Easy Installation fast revving motors.
• Several Output Types
• RPM to 8000 The 702 Shaft has many different
• Sealing to IP66 servo mounts and mounting flanges
• High Temperature Option available and is able to handle
heavy loads.
Related Products
The Model 802S Accu-Coder™ is an
industry standard Size 20 (2.0" diameter)
encoder housed in a heavy duty 316
stainless steel package. It's specifically
designed for harsh factory and plant floor
environments. A variety of flange and servo
mounting styles make it easy to use in a
broad range of applications. See page 100
for more information.
The Model 25SF Size 25 Accu-CoderPro™

shaft encoder is specifically designed for
the challenges of an industrial environment.
With its tough, industrial package, it still has
the performance to reach resolutions up
to 65,536 cycles per revolution, offers 32
waveform options, and has different output The Model 25SP Accu-CoderPro™ is an
types available. See page 92 for more industry standard Size 25 (2.5" diameter) and is
information. programmable with the easy to use, point and click
software. You can program:
The Model 858S European Size 58
• CPR – resolutions to 65,536
Accu-Coder™ is a heavy duty, extremely
• Waveform – 32 options
rugged, reliable encoder in a 316 stainless
• Output Type – 6 different output types available
steel package. Its compact design is well
suited for harsh factory and plant floor See page 88 for more information.
environments calling for a metric solution.
See page 102 for more information.

M o d e l 2 5 SP - P r o g r a mm a b l e
Features
Industry Standard Size 25 Package (2.5" x 2.5" / 63.5 mm)
Fully Programmable with Optional USB Module or Factory Configured
Optical Technology for High Accuracy
Resolutions from 1 to 65,536 CPR (262,144 quadrature counts)
The Model 25SP Programmable Size 25 Accu-CoderPro™ shaft encoder is
specifically designed for the challenges of an industrial environment. But don't
let the tough exterior fool you – contained within the rugged, industrial housing
is an advanced set of electronics that allow the encoder to be programmed to
your exact application needs. Using EPC's optional programming module, users
may select the output type, 32 different waveforms, and any resolution from
1 to 65,536 CPR – that's 262,144 counts using 4x quadrature counting. These
programming features allow a single encoder to be configured for multiple
applications, enabling one encoder to replace many different part numbers – and
that provides cost savings on inventory and down-time replacement. The 25SP
can also be configured and shipped with specs pre-programmed, with no on-site
programming needed. The Model 25SP Accu-CoderPro™ comes standard with
dual bearings rated 80lbs axial or radial, and may be specified with up to IP67
sealing.
Common Applications
Motion Control Feedback, Conveyors, Elevator Controls, Machine Control,
Food Processing, Process Control, Robotics, Material Handling, Textile
Ø2.5" Machines
M o d e l 25 S P O r d e r i n g G u i d e

25SP 38 MA B 1000 B5 OC S MW
MODEL CPR OUTPUT TYPE1 Operating CERTIFICATION

25SP Size 25 (2.5") PROGrAMMING Programmable feature. Temperature None (Std)
Range Select the initial output type to -20º to 85º C (Std) CE CE Marked 7
A 1 to 16,384 be programmed at factory. T6 -40º to 100º C
SHAFT SIZE B 1 to 65,536 Programmable Outputs
38 3/8", 0.375" (standard) OC Open Collector2 CONNECTOR TYPE SEALing
19 1/4", 0.250" PP Push-Pull MW 6-pin MS4
CPR1 IP50 (Standard)
03 5/16", 0.3125" MOUNTING HV Line Driver MY 7-pin MS5 S1 IP64
06 6 mm MA 2.50" Flange
Programmable
MX 10-pin MS
feature. Select the Limited Programmable3 S3 IP66
08 8 mm MC 2.50" Servo MJ 5-pin M12 (12 mm)4
initial CPR to be 5-30 VDC in & 5 VDC S4 IP67
10 10 mm MK 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
MG 2.62" Servo programmed at out
factory. F00 Gland, 24" Cable 6
H5 Line Driver
M00 Gland, 2M Cable 6
P5 Push-Pull
9D 9-pin D-Sub
waveform1 Non-Programmable
Programmable feature. Output Connector
Select the initial index and PU Pull-Up Resistor2 location
waveform configuration to E End
be programmed at factory. S Side
See options on page 90.
NOTES:
1 Programmable feature using Field Programming Software, USB Programming Module, and Interface Cable.
2 Open Collector (OC) and Pull-Up Resistor (PU) outputs not recommended for CPR > 8192 and/or frequencies > 150 KHz.
3 If ordered with initial output type of either H5 or P5, encoder cannot be programmed to OC, PP, or HV output types.
4 6-pin MS and 5-pin M12 Connectors only available with Pull-Up, Open Collector, and Push-Pull output types.
Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable.
For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length expressed in meters.
Example: M06 = 6 meters of cable. Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.

M o d e l 25 S P Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 25S P F l a n g e M o u n t (MA)
Electrical
limitations
typical)
on page 90 for options.
Line Driver* (H5) – 5-30 VDC in/5 VDC out, 20
mA max per channel, max freq 2.7 MHz,
frequency 1.0 MHz, 5 VDC max at 100° C or
M o d e l 25S P 2.5" s e r v o M o u n t (M c)
options.
Index Teach �� Index location adjustable via programming
interface.
resolution (CPR):
5000 RPM max for CPR 16385 to 32768 and 2500 M o d e l 25S P 2.62" S e r v o M o u n t (M G)
damage.
Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 16384 CPR: 36° electrical min, 63° or
better typical
16385 to 65536 CPR: 20° electrical min, 36° or
better typical
position
Diagnostic �� LED located on encoder housing and error All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
report available via programming Interface.
Mechanical e n c o d e r W i r i n g Ta b l e
Max Shaft Speed �� 8000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may be For EPC-supplied mating cables, wiring table is provided with cable.
achievable, contact Customer Service. Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel Gland 7-pin 7-pin MS 6-pin MS
Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 10-pin MS PU,PP, PU,PP, 9-pin
Radial Shaft Load. �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for rated
life of 1.5x109 revs
Function Wire Color M12** M12** MS HV,H5 OC,P5 OC,P5 D-sub
Axial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for rated Com Black 3 7 F F F A 9
Starting Torque �� 1.0 oz-in typical with IP64 seal or no seal +VDC Red 1 2 D D D B 1
Moment of Inertia �� 5.6 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 A' Brown -- 3 H C -- -- 3
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings B Blue 2 4 B B B E 4
B' Violet -- 5 I E -- -- 5
Environmental
Operating Temp �� -20° to 85° C for standard models
-40° to 100° C for extended temp option Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- -- 7
Vibration �� 20 g @ 5 to 2000 Hz Case Green -- -- G G G F 8
Shock �� 80 g @ 11 ms duration Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- --

E P C S ta n da r d Wav e f o r m (B5)
Additional waveforms available. See below for other options.
An EPC Size 25 Encoder in a common application

complementary signals A, B, Z apply to Line Driver (HV & H5) outputs
only.
Wav e f o r m S
Model 25SP: Choose any of these waveforms when ordering. May be changed using the Field Programming Software,
USB programming module, and interface cable (see page 91).
Model 25SF: Choose any of these waveforms when ordering.
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
Odd numbers - A leads B A and B - High Going Index A and W - 90 Degree Index
Even numbers - B leads A W and X - Low Going Index B and X - 180 Degree Index

F i e l d p r o g r a mm i n g s o f t w a r e
With the easy to use, point-and-click interface, programming is quick and straight-forward. The number of possible configurations
makes this Size 25 programmable shaft encoder incredibly versatile. Anywhere a Size 25 encoder goes, the Model 25SP can get the
job done.
Available on USB drive or by download.
System requirements:
• Windows 7 or higher operating systems

• USB 2.0 port required for USB Programming Module (see below)
CPR – any resolution from 1 to 65,536

That's 262,144 counts using 4x quadrature counting
Waveform – choose from 32 options

See page 90 for waveform choices
Output type – 6 different output types

All output types are 5V to 30V in/out except H5 Line Driver and US B p r o g r a m m i n g Ki t
P5 Push-Pull output types, which are 5-30VDC in and 5VDC out. Kit includes Field Programming Software, USB Programming Module,
and 2-meter Interface Cable with specified connector. See Accessories for
individual Interface Cables.
Connector Type Item #

6-pin MS Pr1-001-06
7-pin MS Pr1-001-07
USB Programming Module
10-pin MS Pr1-001-10
5-pin M12 Pr1-001-J
8-pin M12 Pr1-001-K
9-pin D-Sub Pr1-001-09
Gland Cable Pr1-001-G
Interface Cable
Model 25SP assembled with
programming accessories

M o d e l 2 5 SF
Features
Industry Standard Size 25 Package (2.5" x 2.5" / 63.5 mm)
Resolutions from 1 to 65,536 CPR (262,144 quadrature counts)
Optical Technology for High Accuracy
Standard with Heavy-Duty Dual Bearings Rated Load of 80 lbs axial & radial
The Model 25SF Size 25 Accu-CoderPro™ shaft encoder offers the
performance advantages of the programmable Model 25SP, but in an
economical, fixed resolution version. The versatile Model 25SF offers 32
different waveforms options, six output types, and any resolution from
1 to 65,536 CPR. Specifically designed for the challenges of an industrial
environment, the Model 25SF features a rugged, industrial housing and
comes standard with dual bearings rated 80 lbs axial or radial. Offering shaft
sizes up to 10 mm, multiple mounting options, and sealing up to IP67, this
encoder can take on your most demanding application.
Common Applications
Food Processing, Process Control, Robotics, Material Handling, Textile
Ø2.5" Machines
M o d e l 25SF O r d e r i n g G u i d e
Electrical Optional Features

Mechanical
25SF 38 MA X 1000 B5 OC S MW
MODEL Operating CERTIFICATION

25SF Size 25 (2.5") Temperature None (Std)
OUTPUT TYPE1
-20º to 85º C (Std) CE CE Marked 6
MOUNTING OC Open Collector2 T6 -40º to 100º C
MA 2.50" Flange PP Push-Pull
SHAFT SIZE HV Line Driver SEALING
MC 2.50" Servo
38 3/8", 0.375" (standard) MG 2.62" Servo PU Pull-Up Resistor2 IP50 (Standard)
19 1/4", 0.250" CONNECTOR TYPE S1 IP64
H5 Line Driver
03 5/16", 0.3125" MW 6-pin MS3 S3 IP66
P5 Push-Pull
06 6 mm CPR MY 7-pin MS4 S4 IP67
08 8 mm 1 - 65,536 MX 10-pin MS
10 10 mm Price Adder for > 16,384 MJ 5-pin M12 (12 mm)3
MK 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
Connector F00 Gland, 24" Cable 5
waveform location M00 Gland, 2M Cable 5
Select the index and E End 9D 9-pin D-Sub
waveform configuration. See S Side
page 90 for options.
NOTES:
1 All output types are 5V to 30V in/out except H5 Line Driver and P5 Push-Pull output types,
which are 5-30VDC in and 5VDC out.
2 Open Collector and Pull-Up Resistor outputs not recommended for CPR > 8192 and/or
frequencies > 150 KHz.
3 6-pin MS and 5-pin M12 Connectors only available with Pull-Up, Open Collector, and
Push-Pull output types.
Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable. For non-standard metric cable lengths enter ‘M’ plus cable length
expressed in meters. Example: M06 = 6 meters of cable.
Frequency above 300 kHz standard cable lengths only.

M o d e l 25S F F l a n g e M o u n t (MA)
M o d e l 25 SF Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Electrical
limitations
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no output load (65mA
typical)
Output Format �� Incremental. See Waveforms on page 90 for
options.
frequency 1.0 MHz, 5 VDC max at 100° C or
M o d e l 25S F 2.5" S e r v o M o u n t (MC )
Index �� Once per revolution. EPC standard is 180°
gated to output A (waveform B5). See
Waveforms on Model 25SP for options.
resolution (CPR):
5000 RPM max for CPR 16385 to 32768 and
2500 RPM max for CPR 32769 to 65536
NOTE: Use 5 VDC Line Driver (H5 or HV output M o d e l 25S F 2.62" S e r v o M o u n t (M G)
damage.
Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 16384 CPR: 36° electrical min, 63° or
better typical
16385 to 65536 CPR: 20° electrical min, 36°
or better typical
position
Mechanical All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel E n c o d e r W i r i n g Ta b l e
Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
Radial Shaft Load. �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for rated Trim back and insulate unused wires.
Gland 7-pin 7-pin MS 6-pin MS
Axial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for rated
life of 1.5x109 revs Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 10-pin MS PU,PP, PU,PP, 9-pin
Starting Torque �� 1.0 oz-in typical with IP64 seal or no seal Function Wire Color M12** M12** MS HV,H5 OC,P5 OC,P5 D-sub
3.0 oz-in typical with IP66 shaft seal Com Black 3 7 F F F A 9
Moment of Inertia �� 5.6 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 +VDC Red 1 2 D D D B 1
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings A White 4 1 A A A D 2
A' Brown -- 3 H C -- -- 3
Environmental
Operating Temp �� -20° to 85° C for standard models B Blue 2 4 B B B E 4
-40° to 100° C for extended temp option B' Violet -- 5 I E -- -- 5
Vibration �� 20 g @ 5 to 2000 Hz Z Orange 5 6 C -- C C 6
Shock �� 80 g @ 11 ms duration Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- -- 7
Case Green -- -- G G G F 8
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- --


Model 725
Features
Standard Size 25 Package (2.5" x 2.5")
Up to 30,000 CPR
Standard and Industrial Housings
The Model 725 Accu-Coder™ optical shaft encoder is specifically designed for the
challenges of an industrial environment. Even with its tough, industrial package, this
Size 25 encoder still has the performance to reach resolutions up to 30,000 cycles
per revolution. The Model 725 offers both flange and servo mounting options, and
is available in two distinctive housing styles: Standard Housing (N) and Industrial
Housing (I). The rugged Standard Housing isolates the internal electronics from the
shock and stress of the outer environment, while the extra heavy-duty Industrial
Housing features a fully isolated internal encoder unit. Isolating the unit prolongs
bearing life by using an internal flexible mount to protect the encoder from severe
axial and radial shaft loading. The Industrial Housing is the recommended solution
for applications subject to continuous side loads, such as those that drive the
encoder with a measuring wheel, pulley, or chain and sprocket.
Common Applications
Ø2.5" Food Processing, Process Control, Robotics, Material Handling, Textile Machines
725 N 4 S 1000 R HV 1 F 1 E X N CE
MODEL Operating OUTPUT TYPE MOUNTING CONNECTOR MATING
725 Size 25 (2.5") Temperature 5 - 28V In/Out 5 F Flange LOCATION CONNECTOR
S 0° to 70° C OC Open Collector S 2.50" Servo S Side N No
L -40° to 70°C2 PU Pull-Up Resistor R 2.50" Servo E End Y Yes
HOUSING STYLE
H 0° to 100° C 3 PP Push-Pull Q 2.50" Servo
N Standard Housing
HV Line Driver 6 L 2.62" Servo CONNECTOR
I Heavy Duty Industrial
with Internal Flex Mount CYCLES PER 8 - 28V In/5V Out 7,8 P 5PY TYPE 10
REVOLUTION H5 Line Driver 6 W 6-pin MS6
1-30,000 P5 Push-Pull Y 7-pin MS6
See CPR Options for X 10-pin MS
SHAFT SIZE SEALing
available resolutions. 9D 9-pin
S 3/8", 0.375" (standard) MAXIMUM N No Seal
Price adder for CPR >1270 D-subminiature
4 1/4", 0.250" FREQUENCY 1 IP66 J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)6
19 5/16", 0.3125" 1 Standard 100 kHz 2 IP64
NUMBER OF CHANNELS4 K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
25 3/8", 0.375" - No flat 1 A Channel A 2 200 kHz ≤ 3000 CPR 5 IP67 G Gland, 24" Cable 11
06 6 mm Channel A Leads B 5 250 kHz, >3000 CPR
18 8 mm Q Quadrature A & B 3 500 kHz, >6000 CPR 9
21 10 mm R Quadrature A & B with Index CERTIFICATION
4 1 MHz, >10,000 CPR 9
Channel B Leads A N None
K Reverse Quadrature A & B CE CE Marked 12
with Index
0001* 0002* 0004* 0005* 0006* 0007* 0008* 0010* 0011* 0012* 1 Available with Industrial Housing (I) only.
0014* 0020 0021* 0024* 0025* 0028* 0030* 0032* 0033* 0034* 2 Low temperature option not available with resolutions of 3000 CPR or higher.
0035* 0038* 0040* 0042* 0045* 0050* 0060 0064* 0100 0120 3 0° to 85° C for certain resolutions, see CPR Options.
0125 0128* 0144* 0150* 0160* 0192* 0200 0240* 0250 0254* 5 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0256* 0300 0333* 0336* 0360 0400 0500 0512 0600 0625* 6 Line Driver not available with 5-pin M12 or 6-pin MS connector. Available with 7-pin MS
0635 0665* 0720 0768* 0800 0889 1000 1024 1200 1201*a connector only without Index Z.
1203*a 1204*a 1250a 1270a 1440 1500 1800 2000 2048 2400a 7 Standard temperature, 60 to 3000 CPR only. Not available with 2540 CPR.
2500 2540a 2880a 3000a 3600a 4000a 4096a 5000a 6000a 7200a 8 H5 and P5 outputs not available with CE option, or any End Mount MS connector.
7500a 9000a 10,000a 10,240a 12,000a 12,500a 14,400a 15,000a 18,000a 20,000a 9 Standard cable lengths only. For details, please refer to Technical Bulletin
20,480a 25,000a 30,000a TB116: Noise and Signal Distortion Considerations at encoder.com.
10 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com. For
*Contact Customer Service for High Temperature Option (H). Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see Connector Pin
Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Service to determine 11 For Non-Standard Cable Lengths add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet.
all currently available CPR values. Special disk resolutions are available upon request. A one- Example: SG/6 = 6 feet of cable.
12 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at encoder.
time NRE fee may apply.
com.

Electrical
M o d e l 725 2.5" S e r v o M o u n t (S)
Input Voltage �� 4.75 to 28 VDC max for temperatures 10-32 UNF 0.35 DEEP SIDE OR END MOUNT
up to 70° C 6 X 60° Ø1.875 B.C.
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures between 0.160
70° C and 100° C 0.200
1.50 MAX
Input Current �� 100 mA max with no output load 0.100

Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in SEE SHAFT
OPTIONS
0.050
Output Types �� Open Collector – 100 mA max per channel 0.87
0.625
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 2.2K ohm Ø1.250 +0.000
-0.001 1.015
internal resistor, 100 mA max per channel 2.500
Ø2.500 3.000
25I-SER1
Index �� Occurs once per revolution. The index for
M o d e l 725 2.5" S e r v o M o u n t (Q )
Servo mount (R) has been discontinued and replaced by servo mount (Q)
units >3000 CPR is 90° gated to Outputs A ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE P
and B. See Waveform Diagrams. SERVO MOUNT (Q) SERVO MOUNT (R) SIDE OR END MOUNT
Max Frequency �� Up to 1 MHz 4-40 UNC 0.20 DEEP 6-32 UNC 0.20 DEEP CONNECTORS AVAILABLE
4X 90° Ø2.000 B.C. 3X 120° Ø2.000 B.C.
0.160
0.200 1.50 MAX
may result in permanent damage. 0.100
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; SEE SHAFT
DDENV 50204; BS EN55022 OPTIONS

BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
100 kHz output 0.050
+0.000 0.625 0.87
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 180° (±36°) electrical 1.250 -0.001
1.015
Quad Phasing �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 90° (±22.5°) electrical at 2.500
2.500
3.000
100 kHz output 725-SERQR

Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at
100 kHz output M o d e l 725 2.62" S e r v o M o u n t (L)
10-32 UNF 0.50 DEEP SIDE OR END MOUNT
>20,480 CPR: 50° electrical CONNECTORS AVAILABLE
3X 120° Ø1.875 B.C.
Accuracy �� Instrument and Quadrature Error: For 200
0.250
to 1999 CPR, 0.017° mechanical (1.0 arc 0.125
1.50 MAX
minutes) from one cycle to any other cycle.
SEE SHAFT
For 2000 to 3000 CPR, 0.01° mechanical OPTIONS
other cycle. Interpolation error (units >
3000 CPR only) within 0.005° mechanical.
(Total Optical Encoder Error = Instrument +
Quadrature + Interpolation) 0.050
0.625 0.87
Mechanical 2.625
0.875
+0.000 2.420
Max Shaft Speed �� 8000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may be 2.500 -0.002
25I-SERL1 2.920
Shaft Material �� 303 Stainless Steel
Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional M o d e l 725 F l a n g e M o u n t (F)
Radial Shaft Load. �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for
SIDE OR END MOUNT
bearing life of 1.5 x 109 revolutions Ø0.220 THRU CONNECTORS AVAILABLE
Axial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for 4X 90° Ø2.920 B.C.
Starting Torque �� 1.0 oz-in typical with IP64 seal or no seal +0.000
1.50 MAX
1.250 -0.001
SEE SHAFT
7.0 oz-in typical with IP67 shaft seal OPTIONS
1.031
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings 2.500
Weight �� 20 oz typical 0.050
Environmental 0.625
1.015 0.87
1.031
Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C 0.160
2.500
Humidity �� 95% RH non-condensing 0.250
2.500
Vibration �� 20 g @ 58 to 500 Hz 25I-FLG1 3.000

Model 725
M o d e l 725 Op t i o n a l 5P Y M o u n t i n g (P )
Ø0.290 THRU
4X 90° Ø3.978 B.C. 0.188
0.128
4.610
1.50 MAX
2.50
0.050
2.50
2.500 +0.000
-0.002 0.625
1.05 The optional 5PY adapter is made of all aluminum
725-5PY
construction and allows the Model 725 encoder to replace
DC tachometer technology. The 5PY adapter is mechanically
interchangeable with any 5PY tach generator.
Line Driver and Push-Pull Open Collector and Pull-Up


Gland
Cable† 5-pin 8-pin 7-pin MS 7-pin MS 6-pin MS
Function Wire Color M12** M12** 10-pin MS HV,H5 PU,PP,OC,P5 PU,PP,OC,P5 9-pin D-sub
Com Black 3 7 F F F A,F 9
+VDC Red 1 2 D D D B 1
A' Brown -- 3 H C -- -- 3
B Blue 2 4 B B B E 4
B' Violet -- 5 I E -- -- 5
Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- -- 7
Case Green -- -- G G G -- 8
Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- -- --

**CE Option: Use cable cord set with shield connected to M12 connector coupling nut.

EP C S i z e 2 5 e n c o d e r s
A Step Above the Rest
Size 25 encoders (2.5" diameter) are among the most popular
encoders in the world. As a result, nearly every encoder
Ø1.300
manufacturer in the world makes them. The problem is, not Disk Thickness
every Size 25 encoder is built to the same exacting standards (0.062")
of quality and reliability as the Encoder Products Company's Gap(0.004")

line of Size 25 encoders.
Sensor
So, what's the problem? If you have used other Size 25 Disk Support
encoders, you have probably experienced reliability problems, (30% of Area)
such as sensor crashes and disk breakage. The typical Bearing Spacing
construction of a Size 25 encoder uses a single set of closely to Increase
Shaft Support
Side Load
spaced shaft bearings and a large-diameter (typically 2.0")
glass disk mounted to the shaft. The glass disk is generally
supported on the shaft hub by just 15% of the surface area and
has a thickness of 0.030". doubled from 0.002" to 0.004", and the disk diameter was
reduced from 2.0" to 1.3".
In addition, these units commonly require a relatively narrow
air gap (typically 0.002") between the disk and sensor in order The next goal was to increase the durability of the disk itself.
to properly calibrate the signal. Because of this combination, Disk thickness was more than doubled (from 0.030" to 0.062"),
a small amount of side loading (force from installation manufactured using EPC's proprietary process, and supported
requirements, vibration, shock, or other conditions) to move by 30% of the disk surface area.
the shaft enough for the attached disk to make contact with the
sensor or some other portion of the stationary PCB. The result Finally, it was time to improve the resistance to side load
is damage to the disk or sensor, or even disk breakage. movement altogether, so the Size 25s were given dual heavy-
duty bearings, generously spaced to disperse the load over a
So what's the solution? When design engineers at EPC set out larger portion of the shaft.
to design a better Size 25 encoder, their goal was to solve the
typical problems. EPC Models 725, 25SF, and 25SP all share these features, and
are all rugged encoders that can work in the most challenging
The first goal was to make it more difficult for shaft movement environments. Review the chart below to note the differences
from side load to cause damage. Using EPC's advanced among these models and help you determine which one is right
sensor technology, the air gap between the disk and sensor for your application.
Number of Maximum
Model # Max CPR Max Frequency Bearing Load
Waveform Options Seal Rating
Dual bearings rated
725 30,000 1 MHz 5 IP67
80lbs axial or radial
Dual bearings rated
25SF 65,536 2.7 MHz 32 IP67
Dual bearings rated
25SP 65,536* 2.7 MHz 32* IP67
Options are programmable with Field Programming Software.

Ø1.300
Disk Thickness
(0.062") Self Contained
For the TRULY tough environment Gap(0.004")

Unit With internal
Bearings.
The Model 725I with the industrial 725 housing option is an encoder that is as robust as Sensor
possible within its price category. Using the improvements developed for our standard Disk Support
(30% of Area)
Flex mount
Attached Internally
Size 25s, EPC's engineering team developed the "encoder-within-an-encoder" design. In to 725I Hub
addition, the internal encoder is mounted to the 725I's housing using EPC's pioneering flex Bearing Spacing
to Increase
mount, further isolating the internal optics and electronics from outside forces. Side Load Shaft Support

Model 758
Features
Standard Size 58 Mounting (58 mm Diameter)
Up to 30,000 CPR
80 lb Max. Axial and Radial Shaft Loading
High Temperature Option (100° C)
The Model 758 Size 58 Accu-Coder™ is a heavy duty, extremely rugged,
reliable, yet compact European standard size 58 millimeter diameter
encoder, designed for harsh factory and plant floor environments. Shaft
loading is no problem for the double-shielded ball bearings; their 80 lb load
rating ensures a long operating life. With the optional heavy-duty shaft seal,
the Model 758 is rated IP67. Two European standard mounting options
are available: Clamping Flange (20 Type) or Synchro Flange (26 Type). The
Model 758 is the perfect replacement encoder for units requiring the
European mount.
Common Applications
Motion Control Feedback, Machine & Elevator Controls, Food Processing,
Ø58 mm Robotics, Material Handling, Conveyors, Textile Machines
758 A 21 S 1000 R HV 1 1 E R CE
MODEL Operating CONNECTOR
758 Model 758 Temperature OUTPUT TYPE LOCATION CERTIFICATION
S 0° to 70° C 5 - 28V In/Out 5 S Side N None
MOUNTING TYPE1 L -40° to 70° C 2 OC Open Collector E End CE CE Marked 12
A Clamping Flange (20 Type) H 0° to 100° C 3 PU Pull-Up Resistor
B Synchro Flange (26 Type) PP Push-Pull SEALing
CYCLES PER HV Line Driver 6,8 CONNECTOR TYPE 10
N No Seal
SHAFT SIZE1 REVOLUTION 8 - 28V In/5V Out 6,7 1 IP66 G Gland, 24" Cable 11
06 6 mm 1-30,000 H5 Line Driver 6,8 2 IP64 R 12-pin M23
21 10 mm See CPR Options below for P5 Push-Pull 5 IP67 J 5-pin M12 (12 mm)8
07 0.250", 1/4" available resolutions. K 8-pin M12 (12 mm)
20 0.375", 3/8" Price adder for CPR >1270 X 10-pin MS
MAXIMUM Y 7-pin MS 8
FREQUENCY
NUMBER OF CHANNELS4 1 100 kHz Standard
A Channel A 2 200 kHz ≤ 3000 CPR
Channel A Leads B 5 250 kHz, >3000 CPR
Q Quadrature A & B 3 500 kHz, >6000 CPR 9
R Quadrature A & B with Index 4 1 MHz, >10,000 CPR 9
Channel B Leads A
with Index
0001* 0002* 0004* 0005* 0006* 0007* 0008* 0010* 0011* 1 The shaft on 20 Type mountings includes a 15.58 mm flat. The shaft on 26 Type
mountings is provided without a flat.
0012* 0014* 0020 0021* 0024* 0025* 0028* 0030* 0032* 2 Low temperature option not available with resolutions of 3000 CPR or higher.
0033* 0034* 0035* 0038* 0040* 0042* 0045* 0050* 0060 3 0° to 85° C for certain resolutions, see CPR Options.
0064* 0100 0120 0125 0128* 0144* 0150* 0160* 0192* 4 Contact Customer Service for index gating options.
0200 0240* 0250 0254* 0256* 0300 0333* 0336* 0360 5 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0400 0500 0512 0600 0625* 0635 0665* 0720 0768* 6 H5 and P5 outputs are not available with CE option, or any End Mount MS Connector.
0800 0889 1000 1024 1200 1201*a 1203*a 1204*a 1250a 7 Standard temperature, 60 to 3000 CPR only. Not available with 2540 CPR.
1270a 1440 1500 1800 2000 2048 2400a 2500 2540a 8 Line Driver Outputs not available with 5-pin M12 connector. Available with 7-pin MS
2880a 3000a 3600a 4000a 4096a 5000a 6000a 7200a 7500a connector only without Index Z.
9 Standard cable lengths only. For details, please refer to Technical Bulletin
9000a 10,000a 10,240a 12,000a 12,500a 14,400a 15,000a 18,000a 20,000a TB116: Noise and Signal Distortion Considerations at encoder.com.
20,480a 25,000a 30,000a 10 For mating connectors, cables, and cordsets see Accessories at encoder.com.
*Contact Customer Service for High Temperature Option (H). For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see
aHigh Temperature Option (H) limited to 85° C maximum for these CPR options. Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
11 For Non-Standard Cable Lengths add a forward slash (/) plus cable length
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Service to determine expressed in feet. Example: SG/6 = 6 feet of cable.
all currently available CPR values. Special disk resolutions are available upon request. 12 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at
A one-time NRE fee may apply. encoder.com.

M o d e l 758 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 758 C l a m pi n g F l a n g e 20 Typ e (A)
Electrical
to 70° C
70° C to 100° C
Index �� Occurs once per revolution. The index for M o d e l 758 Sy n c h r o F l a n g e 26 Typ e (B)
Max Frequency �� Up to 1 MHz
voltage may result in permanent damage.
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141; DDENV
compliance option); BS EN61000-6-2;
BS EN50081-2
Symmetry �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 180° (±18°) electrical at 100
kHz output
100 kHz output
6001 to 20,480 CPR: 90° (±36°)
Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at All dimensions are in millimeters with a tolerance of +0.17 mm unless otherwise specified.
100 kHz output
Accuracy �� Instrument and Quadrature Error:
For 200 to 1999 CPR, 0.017° mechanical
(1.0 arc minutes) from one cycle to any Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
other cycle. For 2000 to 3000 CPR, 0.01° For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table provided with cable.
mechanical (0.6 arc minutes) from one
Open Collector and Pull-Up Trim back and insulate unused wires.
cycle to any other cycle. Interpolation
error (units > 3000 CPR only) within 0.005° Gland 7-pin
mechanical. (Total Optical Encoder Error = Cable† 10- 7-pin MS 12-
Wire 5-pin 8-pin pin MS PU,PP pin
Function Color M12** M12** MS HV,H5 P5,OC M23
Mechanical Com Black 3 7 F F F 10
+VDC Red 1 2 D D D 12
achievable, contact Customer Service. CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM
Shaft Rotation �� Bi-directional THE MOUNTING FACE A White 4 1 A A A 5
NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL
DEGREES. A' Brown -- 3 H C -- 6
Radial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for INDEX IS POSITIVE GOING.
bearing life of 1.5 x 109 revolutions B Blue 2 4 B B B 8
Axial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for Line Driver and Push-Pull B' Violet -- 5 I E -- 1
Z Orange 5 6 C -- C 3
3.0 oz-in typical with IP66 shaft seal Z' Yellow -- 8 J -- -- 4
7.0 oz-in typical with IP67 shaft seal Shield Bare* -- -- -- -- -- --
Moment of Inertia �� 5.2 x 10 -4 oz-in-sec 2 +VDC -- -- -- -- -- -- 2
Housing �� Black non-corrosive finish Sense
Com Sense -- -- -- -- -- -- 11
Case Green -- -- G G G 9
Environmental *CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected to internal case.
Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid shield.
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM **CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to M12 connector coupling nut.
THE MOUNTING FACE
Shock �� 75 g @ 11 ms duration NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL
DEGREES. Waveform shown with optional
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64, IP66 or IP67 optional complementary signals A, B, Z for HV and h5
outputs only.

Stainless Steel Encoders
Model 802S
Features
Industry Standard Size 20 (2" Diameter) Stainless Steel Package
Flange and Servo Mounting
Up to 30,000 CPR
The Model 802S Accu-Coder™ is a heavy duty, industry standard Size 20 (2.0"
diameter) encoder specifically designed for harsh factory and plant floor
environments. The Model 802S is available with a variety of flange and servo
mounting styles, making it easy to use in a broad range of applications. Its heavy
duty, double-shielded ball bearings are rated at 80 pounds maximum axial and
radial shaft load, ensuring long operating life. This ultra-rugged yet compact
encoder is housed in a Type 316 Stainless Steel enclosure, making it ideal for
applications where contamination or exposure to caustic chemicals is a concern.
Even with its tough exterior, the Model 802S provides the precise, reliable output
you've come to expect from Accu-Coder™.
Common Applications
Food Processing, Oil, Gas & Chemical Processing, Material Handling,
Ø2.0" Conveyors, Robotics, Elevator Controls, Textile Machines
802S 20 S 1000 R HV 1 F 1 E G CE
MODEL Operating OUTPUT TYPE SEALing CERTIFICATION

802S Size 20 (2.0") Temperature 5 - 28V In/Out 6 N No Seal N None
S 0° to 70° C OC Open Collector 1 IP66 CE CE Marked14
L -40° to 70° C3 PU Pull-Up Resistor 2 IP64
H 0° to 100° C4 PP Push-Pull 5 IP67
SHAFT SIZE 1
07 1/4", 0.250" HV Line Driver7
CYCLES PER CONNECTOR
20 3/8", 0.375" 8 - 28V In/5V Out 8,9
REVOLUTION LOCATION
21 10 mm H5 Line Driver (5V)7
1-30,000 E End
30 3/8", 0.375"2 P5 Push-Pull (5V)
Price adder for CPR>1270 S Side
(See table below) MAXIMUM MOUNTING CONNECTOR TYPE11
FREQUENCY Flange Mounts G Gland, 24" cable 12
NUMBER OF CHANNELS5 1 100 kHz (Standard) F 1.181" Female Pilot J 5-Pin M12 (12mm)7,13
A Channel A 2 200 kHz ≤ 3000 CPR L 0.687" Male Pilot K 8-Pin M12 (12mm)13
Channel A Leads B 5 250 kHz, >3000 CPR G 1.250" Male Pilot
Q Quadrature A & B 3 500 kHz, >6000 CPR 10 K Size 25 w/30 Shaft
R Quadrature A & B with Index 4 1 MHz, >10,000 CPR 10
Servo Mounts
Channel B Leads A S 1.181" Female Pilot
K Reverse Quadrature A & B U 0.687" Male Pilot
D Reverse Quadrature A & B T 1.250" Male Pilot
with Index J Size 25 w/30 Shaft
M o d e l 802 S C P R Op t i o n s NOTES:
0001* 0002* 0004* 0005* 0006* 0007* 0008* 0010* 0011* 0012* 1 Contact Customer Service for additional options.
0014* 0020 0021* 0024* 0025* 0028* 0030* 0032* 0033* 0034* 2 Shaft with Size 25 Mounting Adapter, J or K mounting only.
3 Low temperature option not available with resolutions of 3000 CPR or higher.
0035* 0038* 0040* 0042* 0045* 0050* 0060 0064* 0100 0120
4 0° to 85° C for certain resolutions, see CPR Options.
0125 0128* 0144* 0150* 0160* 0192* 0200 0240* 0250 0254* 5 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating options.
0256* 0300 0333* 0336* 0360 0400 0500 0512 0600 0625* 6 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0635 0665* 0720 0768* 0800 0889 1000 1024 1200 1201*a 7 Line Driver Outputs not available with 5-pin M12 connector.
1203*a 1204*a 1250a 1270a 1440 1500 1800 2000 2048 2400a 8 Standard temperature, 60 to 3000 CPR only. Not available with 2540 CPR.
2500 2540a 2880a 3000a 3600a 4000a 4096a 5000a 6000a 7200a 9 CE not available with H5/P5 output type options.
7500a 9000a 10,000a 10,240a 12,000a 12,500a 14,400a 15,000a 18,000a 20,000a 10 Standard cable lengths only. For details, please refer to Technical Bulletin
20,480a 25,000a 30,000a TB116: Noise and Signal Distortion Considerations at encoder.com.
*Contact Customer Service for High Temperature Option. For Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams, see Technical Information or see
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Service to deter- 12 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length expressed in feet.
mine all currently available CPR values. Special disk resolutions are available upon request. Example: G/6 = 6 feet of cable.
13 M12 connector available on side mount option only.
A one-time NRE fee may apply.
14 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at
encoder.com.

REVISIONS
- INITIAL RELEASE
A ECO #01955 GMA 03/31/04
M o d e l 802S S e r v o M o u n t (S)
M o d e l 802 S Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
Electrical
to 70° C
70° C and 100° C
Output Format �� Incremental – Two square waves in 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
REVISIONS
1

A INITIAL RELEASE PER ECO 07504 10/9/18

from the encoder mounting face. See D D
Waveform Diagrams.
M o d e l 802S F l a n g e M o u n t (F)
ISSUE DATE
Pull-Up – Open Collector with 2.2K ohm TOLERANCE E
P
internal resistor, 100 mA max per channel NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATE NAME AND TITLE

+
- .005 DR SBR 5/12/03
802 SERVO MOUNT
Line Driver – 20 mA max per channel C DWG NUMBER REV.

C
+
- .01
802cat3
QC
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG A

+
- .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1

Max Frequency �� Up to 1 MHz.
B B
voltage may result in permanent damage.
Noise Immunity �� Tested to BS EN61000-4-2; IEC801-3; M o d e l 802S Si z e 25 (2.5") S e r vo M o u n t (J)
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141;
DDENV 50204; BS EN55022 10 - 32 UNF-2B 0.23 DEEP
6 X 60° 1.875 B.C. THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
www.encoder.com
A
A
(with European compliance option); DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

APPROVALS
DRAWN
BW
DATE
08/15/18
NAME AND TITLE
802S FLANGE M12

BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
TOLERANCES
10/9/18
DWG. NO. REV.
-+
802CAT6
.005
A
-+ .01
PART NUMBER ANGULAR QUAL ENG
NONE B 1 1
-
+ 1 SCALE: DWG. SIZE: SHEET OF
100 kHz output

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

100 kHz output
Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at 100 kHz
output
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond M o d e l 802S Si zTOLERANCE
e 25 (2.5")ENCODER
F l a nPRODUCTS
ISSUE DATE g e M COMPANY
o u n t (K) P
Accuracy �� Instrument and Quadrature Error: For 200

E C
to 1999 CPR, 0.017° mechanical (1.0 arc +

- .005 DR SBR 5/12/03
802 WITH 2.5" SERVO MOUNT
minutes) from one cycle to any other cycle. PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK
DWG NUMBER REV.
+
- .01
802725s
QC
For 2000 to 3000 CPR, 0.01° mechanical PART NUMBER ANGULAR MFG A
-+ .1°
(0.6 arc minutes) from one cycle to
PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
any other cycle. Interpolation error

(units >3000 CPR only) within 0.005°
mechanical. (Total Optical Encoder Error =
Mechanical
achievable, contact Customer Service. Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s
All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01"
Radial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for Line Driver and Push-Pull
unless otherwise specified.
bearing life of 1.5 x 109 revolutions ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE E
P
Axial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL NAME AND TITLE
W i r i n g Ta bPREVlASSEMBLY
e
INITIAL DATE
bearing life of 1.5 x 109 revolutions .005

+
-
DECIMAL
DR SBR 5/12/03
802 WITH 2.5" FLANGE MOUNT
CK
For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer

.01 to wiring table provided with cable.
DWG NUMBER REV.
+
-
802725f
QC
PART NUMBER A
ANGULAR MFG
3.0 oz-in typical with IP66 shaft seal .1° -+ PRJ ENG DWG SIZE B SCALE NONE SHEET 1 OF 1
7.0 oz-in typical with IP67 shaft seal Gland

Moment of Inertia �� 5.2 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 Cable† 5-pin 8-pin
Housing �� Type 316 Stainless Steel Function Wire Color M12** M12**
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings *CE Option: Cable Shield (bare
Com Black 3 7
Weight �� 1.5 lb typical wire) is connected to internal CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED
+VDC Red 1 2 case.
†Standard cable is 24 AWG NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL
Environmental A White 4 1 DEGREES. Waveform shown with optional
Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C conductors with foil and braid complementary signals A, B, Z for HV or
A' Brown -- 3 shield. h5 outputs only.
**CE Option: Use cable cordset
Vibration �� 20 g @ 58 to 500 Hz B Blue 2 4 with shield connected to M12 Open Collector and Pull-Up
Shock �� 75 g @ 11 ms duration B' Violet -- 5 connector coupling nut.
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64, IP66, IP67 optional
Z Orange 5 6
Z' Yellow -- 8
Case Green -- -- CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED
Shield Bare* -- -- NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL
DEGREES. INDEX IS POSITIVE GOING.

Model 858S
Features
Industry Standard Size 58 (58 mm Diameter) Stainless Steel Package
Up to 30,000 CPR
100° C Operating Temperature Available
The Model 858S European Size 58 Accu-Coder™ is a heavy duty, extremely
rugged, reliable encoder, in a 316 stainless steel package. Its compact design
is well suited for harsh factory and plant floor environments that call for a
metric solution. The double-shielded ball bearings are rated at 80 pound
maximum axial and radial shaft loading, to ensure a long operating life. Shock
rating is 75 g for 11 milliseconds duration. With the optional heavy-duty
shaft seal installed, the Model 858S is rated at IP67. Two European standard
mounting options are available, the Clamping Flange (20 Type), or the
Synchro Flange (26 Type).
Common Applications
Food Processing, Oil, Gas & Chemical Processing, Material Handling,
Ø58 mm Conveyors, Robotics, Elevator Controls, Textile Machines
858S A 21 S 1000 R HV 1 1 E G CE
Operating OUTPUT TYPE SEALing CERTIFICATION
MODEL
Temperature 5-28V In/Out 5
858S Size 58 mm N No Seal N None
S 0° to 70° C OC Open Collector 1 IP66 CE CE Marked 13
L -40° to 70° C 2 PU Pull-Up Resistor 2 IP64
MOUNTING TYPE1 H 0° to 100° C 3 PP Push-Pull 5 IP67
A 20 Type Clamping
HV Line Driver6
B 26 Type Synchro CYCLES PER REVOLUTION CONNECTOR
8-28V In/5V Out 7,8 LOCATION
SHAFT SIZE1 1-30,000
Price adder for CPR >1270 H5 Line Driver (5V)6 E End
07 1/4", 0.250" (See table below) P5 Push-Pull (5V) S Side
20 3/8", 0.375"
06 6 mm CONNECTOR TYPE10
21 10 mm NUMBER OF CHANNELS4 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
G Gland, 24" cable 11
A Channel A 1 100 kHz (Standard) J 5-Pin M12 (12mm)6,12
Channel A Leads B 2 200 kHz ≤ 3000 CPR K 8-Pin M12 (12mm)12
Q Quadrature A & B 5 250 kHz, >3000 CPR
R Quadrature A & B with Index 3 500 kHz, >6000 CPR9
Channel B Leads A 4 1 MHz, >10,000 CPR9
with Index
NOTES:
M o d e l 858 S C P R Op t i o n s 1 The shaft on 20 Type mountings includes a 15.58mm flat. The shaft on 26 Type
0001* 0002* 0004* 0005* 0006* 0007* 0008* 0010* 0011* 0012* mountings is provided without a flat.
2 Low temperature option not available with resolutions of 3000 CPR or higher.
0014* 0020 0021* 0024* 0025* 0028* 0030* 0032* 0033* 0034*
3 0° to 85° C for certain resolutions, see CPR Options.
0035* 0038* 0040* 0042* 0045* 0050* 0060 0064* 0100 0120 4 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating options.
0125 0128* 0144* 0150* 0160* 0200 0240* 0250 0254* 0256* 5 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
0300 0333* 0336* 0360 0400 0500 0512 0600 0625* 0635 6 Line Driver Outputs not available with 5-pin M12 connector.
0665* 0720 0768* 0800 0889 1000 1024 1200 1201*a 1203*a 7 Standard temperature, 60 to 3000 CPR only. Not available with 2540 CPR.
1204*a 1250a 1270a 1440 1500 1800 2000 2048 2400a 2500 8 CE not available with H5/P5 output type options.
2540a 2880a 3000a 3600a 4000a 4096a 5000a 6000a 7200a 7500a 9 Standard cable lengths only. For details, please refer to Technical Bulletin
9000a 10,000a 10,240a 12,000a 12,500a 14,400a 15,000a 18,000a 20,000a 20,480a TB116: Noise and Signal Distortion Considerations at encoder.com.
25,000a 30,000a
*Contact Customer Service for High Temperature Option. Connector Pin Configuration Diagrams at encoder.com.
aHigh Temperature Option (H) limited to 85° C maximum for these CPR options. 11 For non-standard cable lengths, add a forward slash (/) plus cable length
expressed in feet. Example: G/6 = 6 feet of cable.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact Customer Service to 12 M12 connector available on side mount option only.
determine all currently available CPR values. Special disk resolutions are available 13 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark
upon request. A one-time NRE fee may apply. at encoder.com.

M o d e l 858 S Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 858 C l a m pi n g F l a n g e 20 Typ e (A)
Electrical
up to 70° C
(Meets RS 422 at 5 VDC supply) M o d e l 858 Sy n c h r o F l a n g e 26 Typ e (B)
Max Frequency �� Up to 1 MHz.
may result in permanent damage.
BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141;
DDENV 50204; BS EN55022
BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
Symmetry �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 180° (±18°) electrical at 100
kHz output
100 kHz output
6001 to 30,000 CPR: 90° (±36°) electrical All dimensions are in millimeters with a tolerance of +0.17 mm unless otherwise specified.
Min Edge Sep �� 1 to 6000 CPR: 67.5° electrical at 100 kHz
output
>20,480 CPR: 50° electrical Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table
Accuracy �� Instrument and Quadrature Error: provided with cable.
For 200 to 1999 CPR, 0.017° mechanical Trim back and insulate unused wires.
other cycle. For 2000 to 3000 CPR, 0.01°
mechanical (0.6 arc minutes) from one Gland Cable† 5-pin 8-pin
cycle to any other cycle. Interpolation Function Wire Color M12** M12**
error (units > 3000 CPR only) within 0.005° Com Black 3 7
mechanical. (Total Optical Encoder Error =
Instrument + Quadrature + Interpolation) +VDC Red 1 2
Mechanical A White 4 1
Max Shaft Speed �� 8000 RPM. Higher shaft speeds may be A' Brown -- 3
B Blue 2 4
Radial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM
bearing life of 1.5 x 109 revolutions THE MOUNTING FACE B' Violet -- 5
Axial Shaft Load �� 80 lb max. Rated load of 20 to 40 lb for NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL
DEGREES. Waveform shown with optional Z Orange 5 6
bearing life 1.5 x 109 revolutions complementary signals A, B, Z for HV and H5
Starting Torque �� 1.0 oz-in typical with IP64 seal or no seal outputs only. Z' Yellow -- 8
3.0 oz-in typical with IP66 shaft seal Shield Bare* -- --
Moment of Inertia �� 5.2 x 10-4 oz-in-sec2 Open Collector and Pull-Up
Case Green -- --
Housing �� Type 316 Stainless Steel *CE Option: Cable Shield (bare wire) is connected to
Bearings �� Precision ABEC ball bearings internal case.
Weight �� 1.5 lb typical †Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and
braid shield.
Environmental **CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to
Storage Temp �� -25° to 85° C M12 connector coupling nut.
Vibration �� 20 g @ 58 to 500 Hz CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED FROM
THE MOUNTING FACE
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP64, IP66, IP67 optional NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL
DEGREES.

Model 865T
Features
A C-Face Thru-Bore Encoder with Stainless Steel Housing
Fits NEMA Size 56C Thru 184C Motor Faces (4.5" AK)
Slim Profile – Only 1.00" Deep
The Model 865T C-Face encoder is a rugged, high resolution encoder designed
to mount directly on NEMA C-Face motors. Both sides of the encoder are
C-Face mounts, allowing additional C-Face devices to be mounted to this
encoder. Unlike many C-Face kit type encoders, the Model 865T contains
precision bearings and an internal flex mount, virtually eliminating encoder
failures and inaccuracies induced by motor shaft runout or axial endplay. The
advanced Opto-ASIC design provides advanced noise immunity necessary
for many industrial applications. This encoder is ideal for applications using
induction motors and flux vector control. The 1.00" thick model 865T provides
speed and position information for drive feedback in a slim profile. The thru-
bore design allows fast and simple mounting of the encoder directly to the
accessory shaft or to the drive shaft of the motor, using the standard motor
face (NEMA sizes 56C - 184C). The tough Type 316 Stainless Steel housing
resists the corrosion and hazards of a caustic industrial environment.
Common Applications
Motor Feedback, Velocity & Position Control, Conveyors, Variable Speed
Ø6.5" Drives, Mixing & Blending Motors, Assembly & Specialty Machines
M o d e l 865 T O r d e r i n g G u i d e

0° to 70° C std None Std
865T 34 H1 0500 N V1 R OC F02

MODEL
CYCLES PER Input OUTPUT TYPE Operating CERTIFICATION
865T 4.5" NEMA “AK" REVOLUTION Voltage Temperature
OC Open Collector None (Std)
Dimension, Stainless
See CPR Options below V1 5 to 28 VDC2 PU Pull-Up Resistor 0° to 70° C (Std) CE CE Marked 7
Steel Thru-Bore
Price adder for PP Push-Pull T4 0° to 100° C
CPR >1024 HV Line Driver4
BORE SIZE
11 5/8", 0.625" NUMBER OF CHANNELS3
34 3/4", 0.750" HOUSING STYLE Channel A Leads B
18 7/8", 0.875" CONNECTOR TYPE5
H1 Thru-Bore housing Q Quadrature A & B F02 24" Cable with
80 1", 1.000"
version with IP50 R Quadrature A & B with Index Gland Nut6
13 14 mm
dust seal 1 Channel B Leads A SMJ 5-Pin M124
19 19 mm
H2 Cover completely K Reverse Quadrature A & B SMK 8-Pin M12
24 24 mm
encloses motorshaft D Reverse Quadrature A & B with
and eliminates Index
access to motor See http://www.encoder.com/
shaft; IP66 rated. literature/index-phasing.pdf for
additional options, and waveforms.
M o d e l 865 T C P R Op t i o n s NOTES:
0060 0100 0120 0240 0250 0256 0500 1 Housing style H1 Thru-Bore version equipped with IP50 dust seal.
Unit must be mounted between two C-Face devices with supplied gasket kit to be IP66 sealed.
0512 1000 1024 2048 2500 4096
2 5 to 24 VDC max for high temperature option.
Contact Customer Service for other disk resolutions; not all disk 3 Contact Customer Service for index gating options.
resolutions available with all output types. 4 Line Driver Output not available with 5-Pin M12 connector.
6 For non-standard cable lengths enter ‘F’ plus cable length expressed in feet.
Example: F06 = 6 feet of cable.

M o d e l 865 T Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 865T C o n n e c to r Op t i o n s
Electrical
CABLE
GLAND NUT
up to 70° C 3/8 THRU CLEARANCE HOLE
4X 90° Ø5.875 B.C. ASSEMBLY
4.75 to 24 VDC for temperatures SHAFT
CLAMPING
between 70° C and 100° C COLLAR
Input Ripple �� 100 mV peak-to-peak at 0 to 100 kHz Ø4.500 +0.000
-0.003 4.501 +0.002
-0.000 7.00
quadrature with channel A leading B BORE SIZE 6.250
SEE ORDER GUIDE
See Waveform Diagrams. 15°
0.175
3/8-16 UNC 0.125
Output Types ��Open Collector – 100 mA max per channel 4X 90° Ø5.875 1.00 865TGLAND
B.C.
Pull Up – Open Collector with 2.2K
channel
0001 to 0474 CPR: Ungated Model 865T shown with
0475 to 4096 CPR: Gated to output A M12 connector option. Specify 5-pin
or 8-pin using Ordering Guide.
M o d e l 865T Op t i o n a l H o u s i n g C o v e r (H2)
8 7 6 5 4 3
REV.
-- INITIAL RELEASE
2
DESCRIPTION
REVISIONS
1
DATE APPROVED
permanent damage. D D

BS EN61000-4-4; DDENV 50141;
DDENV 50204; BS EN55022 C C

BS EN61000-6-2; BS EN50081-2
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical, B B

temperatures > 99°C 2.6
870-COV1
Rise Time �� Less than 1 microsecond A

E
P
C ENCODER PR0DUCTS COMPANY
A
APPROVALS DATE
DRAWN
NAME AND TITLE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TRH 10/27/05
ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
PROTECTIVE COVER - CATALOG
11 /28 /05 TOLERANCES
Mechanical
DWG. NO. REV.
PREV. ASSEM.
-+ .005
DECIMAL
-+ .01
MFG ENG 8 70 -COV1 --
SCALE: NONE DWG. SIZE: B 1 OF 1
870 -+ 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
be achievable, contact Customer LTR DESCRIPTON
REVISIONS
CHK DATE APPR DATE
- INITIAL RELEASE
Service. Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
Bore Tolerance �� +0.0015"/-0.000" For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to wiring table
User Shaft Tolerances Line Driver and Push-Pull provided with cable.
Radial Runout �� 0.005" Trim back and insulate unused wires.
OUTPUT A
Axial Endplay �� +0.050"
OUTPUT A
Moment of Inertia �� 3.3 x 10-3 oz-in-sec2 typical Gland 5-pin
Housing �� Type 316 Stainless Steel OUTPUT B Cable† M12* 8-pin
Weight �� 6 lb typical Function Wire Color PU, PP, OC M12*
Environmental Com Black 3 7
OUTPUT B
Storage Temp �� -25° to 100°C gated to A = 180˚ +VDC Red 1 2
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing INDEX Z ungated 270˚
A White 4 1
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz INDEX Z gated to A = 180˚

ungated 270˚ A' Brown -- 3
CLOCKWISE
Sealing �� IP66 when mounted between two LD770LR
NOTE: ALL DEGREELTRREFERENCES
ROTATION
REVISIONS
ARE ELECTRICAL
DESCRIPTON CHK DATE DEGREES
APPR DATE
B Blue 2 4
C-Face devices with supplied gasket NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES.
- INITIAL RELEASE
Waveform shown with optional complementary B' Violet -- 5
kit, or with H1 cover. IP50 if not signals A, B, Z for HV output only.
installed in either manner. ISSUE DATE
Z Orange 5 6
02/11/03 TOLERANCE E
P
Open Collector and

.005 Pull-Up
+
BSR 02/11/03
- DR
77X
Z' Yellow -- 8
DWG NUMBER REV.
PART NUMBER
-+ .01
ANGULAR
QC
MFG LD770LR - Shield Bare -- --

+
A SCALE
N/A SHEET
1 1OF
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B *CE Option: Use cable cordset with shield connected to M12
connector coupling nut.
gated to A = 180˚
†Standard cable is 24 AWG conductors with foil and braid
INDEX Z
ungated 270˚
shield.
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
CLOCKWISENOTE: ALL DEGREE
ROTATION REFERENCES
AS VIEWED FROMARE ELECTRICAL
THE MOUNTINGDEGREES
FACE
SE770LR NOTE: INDEX IS POSITIVE GOING
NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES
INDEX IS POSITIVE GOINGS
ISSUE DATE
TOLERANCE
P
02/11/03
E C ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
+
- 77X SINGLE
DR BSR 02/11/03 ENDED OUTPUT WAVEFORM
SE770LR
DWG NUMBER REV.
-+
-
QC

+
A SCALE
N/A SHEET
1 OF1
Incremental Module and Modular Encoders
Model 30M
Features
Large Air Gap and Tolerance to Misalignment
Resolutions of 1 to 1024 CPR (4096 PPR with Quadrature Counting)
Optional 2-Pole to 32-Pole Commutation
Sealing Options to IP69K
Operating Temperature Range -40° to 120° C
Easy Alignment and Installation
The Model 30M is a compact, incremental encoder module with advanced
magnetic sensing and signal processing technology. Featuring resolutions
from 1 to 1024 CPR, commutation channels, several output types and two
supply voltage options, it can be configured for a wide range of industrial,
commercial and consumer feedback applications. With a non-contact
magnetic sensor and optional sealing up to IP69K, the Model 30M can be
applied in environments where dirt, dust and liquids are present.
Common Applications
Servo/stepper motor feedback, Mobile equipment speed and steering
sensing, Timber processing machinery, Studio lighting and stage equipment
control, Rotary valve position monitoring and control, Solar panel
positioning, Vending machines, Punch presses, Tank level monitoring,
Ø30 mm/1.181" Robotics
M o d e l 30M O r d e r i n g G u i d e
30M 00 0256 N V5 R3 HV C
MODEL
CPR Input
30M Incremental Encoder Voltage OUTPUT TYPE SEALING
0001 - 1024
Module HV Differential Line Leave Blank for
V5 5 VDC4 Standard Option
V1 5 to 28 VDC Driver
OC Open IP50 (Std)
Magnet Collector4 S6 IP69K6
00 No Magnet1 PP Push-Pull
Commutation 2
RM Ø4 mm magnet
Commutation only
Over Shaft Magnet Holders available with V5 Option CONNECTOR TYPE
w/Bore Size (includes magnet) N No Commutation3 C 8-Pin Molex Header2
21 3/16", 0.1875" F 2 Pole V 16-Pin Molex Header3
01 1/4", 0.250" A 4 Pole K 8-Pin M122,5
B 6 Pole CHANNEL
03 5/16", 0.3125"
02 3/8", 0.375" C 8 Pole R3 Quadrature A&B w\ Index
05 1/2", 0.500" E 10 Pole D3 Reverse Quad A&B w\ Index
11 5/8", 0.625" D 12 Pole
06 5 mm G 14 Pole
04 6 mm H 16 Pole
14 8 mm J 18 Pole
10 10 mm K 20 Pole
13 14 mm L 22 Pole
M 24 Pole
Press In/On Magnet Holder O 26 Pole
(Includes magnet) P 28 Pole
48 0.250" Bore/0.125" Shaft R 30 Pole
T 32 Pole
NOTES:
1 A high-quality magnet is required to generate a reliable signal; magnet options provided by EPC have
been pre-qualified to provide a clear and reliable signal.
2 Commutation is not available with 8-pin M12 or 8-pin Molex Header.
3 16-pin Molex Header is only available with Commutation.
4 OC Output Type and 8-pin M12 are not available with V5 Input Voltage option.
5 8-pin M12 only available in V1 Input Voltage option. Nominal Magnet Position
6 IP69K sealing available with 8-Pin M12 Connector Type only.

M o d e l 30M Sp e c i f i c at i o n s 8-pi n m o l e x H e a d e r Op t i o n (C )
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 5 VDC ±10% Fixed Voltage
4.5 to 28 VDC (4.5 to 20 VDC over 105°C)
Input Current �� 80 mA max, 50 mA or less typical with no output
load
Output Format �� Two square waves in quadrature with channel A
leading B for clockwise magnet rotation as viewed
from the encoder mounting face. Index gated to
A and B.
Output Types �� Open Collector
Open Collector with Differential Outputs
Differential Line Driver (Meets RS422 at 5 VDC)
Push-Pull 16-pi n m o l e x H e a d e r Op t i o n (V )
All outputs 20 mA max per channel
protected. NOTE: Sustained reverse voltage may
result in permanent damage.
Min Edge Sep �� 20° electrical typical @ 25° C
Accuracy �� Typically within ±0.7° mechanical from true
position. Accuracy improves at nominal air
gap with minimized magnet runout, offset and
endplay.
Mechanical/Environmental
Operating Temp �� -40º C to 120º C; reduced to 110º C max above
200 KHz with 20V input and 20mA/channel
output 8- pi n M 12 Op t i o n (K)
Air Gap �� 0.022" nominal recommended
Axial Offset �� 0.008" max
Mounting Bolts �� Max Ø0.200" Head, 2-56 or M2.5 Button, Socket
or Pan Head or 4-40 Socket Head
Housing Material �� High Temp, Toughened Nylon Composite
Weight �� 0.5 oz typical or less
Vibration �� 20 g @ 10 to 2000 Hz (MIL-STD-202G Method
204D)
Shock �� 100 g @ 11 ms duration (MIL-STD-202G Method
213B)
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP69K available with M12 Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s
connector option
Trim back and insulate unused wires
8-pin 8-pin 16-pin
Function M12 Header Header
Com 7 4 8
+VDC 2 2 6
A 1 8 12
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
A' 3 6 10 NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES. Waveform shown with
optional complementary signals A, B, Z for HV output only.
B 4 5 9
B' 5 7 11
Z 6 1 5
Z' 8 3 7
U -- -- 2
U' -- -- 1
V -- -- 14
V' -- -- 13
W -- -- 4
W' -- -- -3

Model 30MT
Features
Large Air Gap and Tolerance to Misalignment
Resolutions of 1 to 1024 CPR (4096 PPR with Quadrature Counting)
Sealing Options to IP69K
Operating Temperature Range -40° to 120° C
Easy Alignment and Installation
The Model 30MT Accu-Coder™ is a compact, incremental encoder module

with advanced magnetic sensing and signal processing technology. With a
built-in alignment feature, the threaded housing allows for quick, accurate
air-gap setting. Featuring resolutions from 1 to 1024 CPR, several output
types, and a wide range for supply voltage, it can be configured for a variety
of industrial, commercial and consumer feedback applications. The non-
contact magnetic sensor and optional sealing up to IP69K allows the Model
30MT to be applied in environments where dirt, dust and liquids are present.
Common Applications
Motor Feedback, Mobile Equipment Speed and Steering Sensing, Timber
Processing Machinery, Studio Lighting and Stage Equipment Control, Rotary
Valve Position Monitoring and Control, Solar Panel Positioning, Vending
Ø30 mm/1.181" Machines, Punch Presses, Tank Level Monitoring, Robotics
M o d e l 30 m t O r d e r i n g G u i d e
30MT 00 0256 N V1 R3 HV K
MODEL CYCLES PER Input

SEALING
REVOLUTION Voltage
30MT Threaded Incremental OUTPUT TYPE Leave Blank for
Encoder Module V1 5 to 28 VDC Standard Option
0001 to 1024 HV Differential Line
IP50 (Std)
Driver
S6 IP69K
OC Open Collector
Magnet
PP Push-Pull
00 No Magnet1
RM Ø4 mm magnet
Over Shaft Magnet Holders CHANNEL

w/Bore Size (includes magnet) R3 Quadrature A&B w\ Index
21 3/16", 0.1875" D3 Reverse Quad A&B w\ Index
01 1/4", 0.250"
03 5/16", 0.3125" CONNECTOR TYPE
02 3/8", 0.375"
05 1/2", 0.500" K 8-Pin M12
11 5/8", 0.625"
06 5 mm
04 6 mm
14 8 mm NOTES:
10 10 mm 1 A high-quality magnet is required to generate a reliable signal;
13 14 mm magnet options provided by EPC have been pre-qualified to provide
a clear and reliable signal.
Press In/On Magnet Holder
(Includes magnet)
48 0.250" Bore/0.125" Shaft

M o d e l 30M T Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M e c h a n i c a l d r awi n g
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 4.5 to 28 VDC (4.5 to 20 VDC over 105°C)
Input Current �� 80 mA max, 50 mA or less typical with no output
load
Output Format �� Two square waves in quadrature with channel A
leading B for clockwise magnet rotation as viewed
from the encoder mounting face. Index gated to
A and B.
Output Types �� Open Collector
Open Collector with Differential Outputs
Differential Line Driver (Meets RS422 at 5 VDC)
Push-Pull
All outputs 20 mA max per channel
protected.
Min Edge Sep �� 20° electrical typical @ 25° C
Accuracy �� Typically within ±0.7° mechanical from true
position. Accuracy improves at nominal air Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
gap with minimized magnet runout, offset and For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer
endplay. to wiring table provided with cable.
M e c h a n i c a l/E n vi r o n m e n ta l 8-pin
Operating Temp �� -40º C to 120º C; reduced to 110º C max above
Function M12
200 KHz with 20V input and 20mA/channel
output Com 7
Air Gap �� 0.022" nominal recommended
+VDC 2
Axial Endplay �� ±0.020" max A 1
Axial Offset �� 0.008" max A' 3
Mounting Bolts �� Two m2.5 x 8mm screws with washers provided B 4
Housing Material �� High Temp, Toughened Nylon Composite
Weight �� 0.7 oz typical or less (with clamping nut) CLOCKWISE ROTATION B' 5
Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing NOTE: ALL DEGREE REFERENCES ARE ELECTRICAL DEGREES. Waveform shown with
Z 6
optional complementary signals A, B, Z for HV output only.
Vibration �� 20 g @ 10 to 2000 Hz (MIL-STD-202G Method
204D) Z' 8
Shock �� 100 g @ 11 ms duration (MIL-STD-202G Method
213B)
Sealing �� IP50 standard; IP69K available
u n iv e r s a l m o u n t i n g a da p to r
Stock #176672
Provides the following mounting
patterns, 2x @ 180°:
Ø1.142 [Ø29.0] B.C.
Ø1.280 [Ø32.5] B.C.
Ø1.500 [Ø38.1] B.C.
Ø1.575 [Ø40.0] B.C.
Ø1.811 [Ø46.0] B.C

.

00 ENGINEERING PROTOTYPE 9/8/15

M o d e l S 3 0 M & 3 0 M T Acc e s s o r i e s
pREFERRED i NSTA LL ATION
Contact EPC Application Support for assistance with additional installation options.
USE STRAIGHT EDGE INSTALL ENCODER &

STEP 1 TO POSITION MAGNET STEP 3 30MM PILOT
MOUNTING SCREWS
FLUSH TO SURFACE ADAPTER PLATE/ CENTERED TO
MOTOR MOTOR SHAFT
.088 PILOT
DEPTH
TIGHTEN SET MAGNET

STEP 2 SCREW HOLDER
MOTOR SHAFT
Ov e r S h a f t M a g n e t H o l d e r s

www.encoder.com
APPROVALS DATE
DRAWN
NAME AND TITLE
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES SBR 09/08/15
MODEL 30M PREFERRED INSTALLATION
ISSUE DATE: CHECKED
xx/xx/xx TOLERANCES
- OverMFG
Shaft
DWG. NO. R
XXX + .005
PREV. ASSEM.
Magnet
DECIMAL
Holder
ENG 30M-PreferredInstallation 0
XXX -+ .01
NONE B 1 OF 1
-+
<> 1 SCALE: DWG. SIZE:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P r e s s i n/o n M a g n e t H o l d e r
Stock # 176607-01
Press In/On
Magnet Holder
M at i n g Ca b l e s/c o r d s e t s
Molex Mating Cables (24 AWG Wires) M12 Mating Cordsets
Stock # Description Stock # Description
075230 8-pin Molex Mating Connector w/ 24" Cable 075100 8-Pin M12 Mating Cordset, 0.5 Meters
075232 16-Pin Molex Mating Connector w/ 24" Cable 075101 8-Pin M12 Mating Cordset, 2 Meters
075102 8-Pin M12 Mating Cordset, 4 Meters

Wh e n t o C h o o s e a M a g n e t i c
Encoder Module
Magnetic encoder modules can be used in a wide range of applications, including,

but certainly not limited to, the following:
• Servo/stepper motor feedback • Rotary valve position monitoring
• Mobile equipment speed and and control
steering sensing • Solar panel positioning
• Timber processing machinery • Vending machines
• Studio lighting and stage • Punch presses
equipment control • Tank level monitoring
• Robotics The Model 30M Incremental Magnetic Encoder Module has 3 connector options.
There are many points to consider when trying to determine if an encoder module is the best solution for your application.
1. You need an encoder with a bearingless design. In the vast majority of applications, an encoder with bearings is the best
choice, because it provides an easier installation and a more stable platform for the encoder to run on. However, there are instances
where a bearingless encoder is a better option:
• In your application, there are factors that are hard on bearings. Magnetic encoder modules tend to be more tolerant to shock and
vibration – factors that typically shorten bearing life. If your encoder will be subjected to factors that are hard on bearing life, a
magnetic encoder module might be the right encoder solution for your application.
• You need an encoder that can work in a high-speed application. An encoder’s bearings often limit operational speed to 12,000
RPMs or less. If you need to run at higher speeds, a bearing-less module might be the solution.
• Cost is a major factor. Since encoder modules have no bearings and associated support parts, they often cost less and can be
more economical. If cost is a factor, an encoder module might be the right solution.
2. You have limited space. It can happen for different reasons. Maybe the encoder was overlooked in the design phase, and you
suddenly find yourself with very little space for a key component in your configuration. Maybe the constraints of your machine’s
design simply won’t allow more space. In any case, magnetic encoder modules tend to be compact in size, but – when designed
well – will still give you the accurate feedback and motion control you need.
3. You need versatile mounting options. The “magnetic” in “magnetic encoder module” gives you some options you may not
have with typical encoders. Even with the tolerance for a large air gap and tolerance for misalignment, you may still have a tricky
installation that requires a creative solution. Both the Model 30M and the Model 30MT have been designed with that in mind, and
they are easy to mount and install.
4. You need a heavy-duty seal on your encoder. Not all magnetic encoder modules offer heavy-duty
sealing options, so be sure to check the IP Ratings (see page 137 for more information). If you need
protection from washdown, you cannot settle for IP50. Conversely, if your encoder will be fairly well
protected, it might not make sense to pay for a higher IP Seal than you need. EPC’s Model 30M and
Model 30MT are compact magnetic encoder modules with sealing options up to IP69K and an operating
temperature range of -40° to 120° C, so it can handle the most extreme industrial environments.
The Model 30MT Incremental
Magnetic Encoder Module comes
With a large air gap and tolerance to misalignment, up to 1024 CPR (4096 PPR with Quadrature
with a threaded housing.
Counting), optional 2, 4 or 8 pole commutation, and easy alignment and installation, the Model 30M or
the threaded Model 30MT are excellent solutions when you need a magnetic encoder module. Contact EPC today and you’ll talk to
real engineers who can help you incorporate the 30M or 30MT into your application.

Incremental Modules and Modular Encoders
Model 121
Features
Simple, Hassle Free Mounting
Accepts Larger Shafts up to 5/8" (or 15 mm)
Up to 12 Pole Commutation Available
0° to 100° C Operating Temperature Available
Patented Design
Includes IP50 Dust Seal Kit
EPC has taken the performance of modular encoders to a new level with the
Model 121 Auto-Aligning Modular Encoder. This new and innovative design
requires no calibration, gapping or special tools for hassle-free installation.
The Model 121 incorporates the latest Opto-ASIC technology for enhanced
performance. Common problems with other modular encoder designs are
warping and deflection, caused by their extensive use of plastic, both of
which are virtually eliminated by the Model 121’s all metal construction. For
brushless servo motor applications, the Model 121 can be specified with
three commutation tracks to provide motor feedback. The optional 100°
C temperature capability allows servo motors to operate at higher power
outputs and duty cycles.
Common Applications
Ø2.1" Servo Motor Control, Robotics, Specialty Assembly Machines, Digital
Patent #6,608,300B2 Plotters, High Power Motors
121 N A 5 01 S 0256 Q OC 1 S N
MODEL INPUT CYCLES PER MAXIMUM CERTIFICATION

121 Auto-Aligning VOLTAGE REVOLUTION FREQUENCY N None
Modular Thru-Bore 5 5 VDC See CPR Options 1 100 kHz CE CE Marked 6
below 2 200 kHz
Commutation 1 Price adder >1999 3 300 kHz 4
N No Commutation Bore Size2
C4 4 Pole OUTPUT TYPE
01 1/4", 0.250" Connector
C6 6 Pole Operating OC Open Collector
03 5/16", 0.3125" Type
C8 8 Pole Temperature
02 3/8", 0.375" PP Push-Pull
S 18" Cable 5
C12 12 Pole 10 1/2", 0.500" S 0° to 70° C HV Line Driver
11 5/8", 0.625" H 0° to 100° C
Mounting & 06 5 mm NUMBER OF CHANNELS3
Housing Style 04 6 mm
Channel A Leads B
A Mounting Style A 14 8 mm
Q Quadrature A & B
05 10 mm
R Quadrature A & B with Index
12 12 mm
13 14 mm Channel B Leads A
15 15 mm K Reverse Quadrature A & B
with Index
literature/index-phasing.pdf for
M o d e l 121 C P R Op t i o n s additional options, and waveforms.
0200 0250 0254 0256 0300 0360 0500
0512 0600 0720 0800 0840 1000 1024
NOTES:
1200 1250 1800* 2000* 2048* 2500*
*Contact Customer service for application analysis. 1 Not available in all configurations. Contact Customer Service for availability.
New CPR values are periodically added to those listed. Contact 3 Contact Customer Service for non-standard index gating options.
Customer Service to determine all currently available values. 4 Standard 0° to 70° C operating temperature only.
Special disk resolutions are available upon request and may be 5 For Non-Standard Cable Lengths add a forward slash (/) plus cable length
subject to a one-time NRE fee. expressed in feet. Example: S/6 = 6 feet of cable.
6 Please refer to Technical Bulletin TB100: When to Choose the CE Mark at encoder.
com.

REVISIONS
LTR DESCRIPTION
- INITIAL RELEASE
A ECO #01365 SBR 11/21/01
M o d e l 121 Sp e c i f i c at i o n s M o d e l 121 A u to -A l ig n i n g M o d u l a r (A)
B
C
ECO #01393 BSR 12/17/01
ECO #01430 BSR 01/23/02
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 5 VDC +10% Fixed Voltage
Input Current �� 130 mA max (< 100 mA typical) with no
output loadwith no output load
the mounting face. Index optional.
Output Types �� Open Collector – 20 mA per channel max
Push-Pull – 20 mA per channel max
Index �� Once per revolution gated to channel A.
Contact Customer Service for additional
gating options.
Max Frequency �� 100 kHz standard, 200 kHz, and 300 kHz
optional
protected. NOTE: Sustained reverse All dimensions are in inches with a tolerance of +0.005" or +0.01" unless otherwise specified.
voltage may result in permanent damage. Metric dimensions are given in brackets [mm].
Quadrature �� 67.5° electrical or better is typical, 54°
Edge Separation ��electrical minimum at temperatures > 99° C
Accuracy �� Within 0.1° mechanical from one cycle to
ISSUE DATE
any other cycle, or 6 arc minutes 11/16/01 TOLERANCE E PC ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY
Commutation �� Optional – three 120° electrical phase tracks NEXT ASSEMBLY DECIMAL INITIAL DATENAME AND TITLE
for commutation feedback. (4, 6, 8, or 12 +
- .005 DRSBR 11/15/01 MODEL 121, STYLE A
poles. Others available upon request.) THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION PREV ASSEMBLY DECIMAL CK DWG NUMBER
-+ .01 QC
Comm. Accuracy �� 1° mechanical 121-ASTYLE
Mechanical +
MODEL 121 - .1° PRJ ENG DWG SIZEB SCALENONE
Max. Shaft Speed �� Determined by maximum frequency
response
Bore Tolerance �� +0.0007" (max) -0.0000" (Based on H7
bore fit for g6 shaft Class LC5 per ANSI
B-4.1 standard)
User Shaft Tolerance Wav e f o r m Di a g r a m s W i r i n g Ta b l e
Radial Runout �� 0.002" max For EPC-supplied mating cables, refer to
Axial End Play �� ±0.015" for CPR <= 512 wiring table provided with cable.
±0.010" for CPR 513 to 1250 Trim back and insulate unused wires.
±0.005" for CPR > 1250
Flying Leads Cable†
Max. Acceleration �� 5 x 105 rad/sec2
Function Wire Color
Housing �� All Metal Aluminum and Zinc Alloy
Weight �� 4 oz typical Com Black
Environmental +VDC White
A Brown
Vibration �� 10 g @ 58 to 500 Hz CLOCKWISE ROTATION AS VIEWED A' Yellow
Shock �� 50 g @ 11 ms duration FROM THE MOUNTING FACE
B Red
Waveform shown with optional complementary B' Green
Z Orange
Z' Blue
U Violet
U' Gray
V Pink
V' Tan
W Red/Green
W' Red/Yellow
Shield Bare*
*CE Option: Cable shield (bare wire) is connected
to internal case.
†Standard cable for non-commutated models is
24 AWG For commutated units, conductors are
28 AWG.

Does Your Encoder Signal
Need Some Help?
One Is Better than Four: One Unit Can Convert,

Split, Repeat and Test Your Encoder Signal
Generally, when you hook up your encoder, it's already configured to provide the correct
digital outputs. Those outputs then feed directly to a counter, controller, or other device. In
some applications, however, the encoder signal needs optimization to reach the receiving
device over long distances. Or you need to provide the encoder signal to more than one
device. Or you need to change the type of output signal. That's where EPC’s RX/TX
products come in: product variations are available to convert, repeat, or split the signal
(see pages 118 – 120).
Our RX/TXD, however, combines all of these capabilities into a compact DIN rail
mountable unit – plus, it can test your signal. The RX/TXD all-in-one:
• Can be configured as a level changer, signal converter, line repeater, splitter, or tester.
• Splits one input signal into two or three outputs.
• Has LED indicators for encoder power and signal presence.
• Accommodates a variety of digital signal types (RS422, NPN, PNP, TTL, etc.) and
voltages (5VDC or 5-24VDC) as both input and output options, allowing for use with all EPC encoders.
• Is compact and lightweight. The DIN Rail mountable PC/ABS housing makes for easy and versatile installation.
• Has LED indicators for encoder power and signal presence.
• Is easy to use. All connections can be made via easily accessible screw terminals to a detachable 17-pin connector.
When to Use the RX/TXD

Signal Converter
In many retrofit or upgrade projects, your encoders may need to interface with newer devices – and they may have mismatched input
requirements. That's when the RX/TXD’s level changer/conditioner capability is ideal. For example, a 24VDC open collector output
can be converted to a 5VDC RS422 compatible differential line-driver – an output type better suited for long cable runs or electrically
noisy environments. It keeps your signal clean and consistent.
Signal Splitter
When a single encoder has to provide signals to multiple devices, the RX/TXD can split one signal into two or three identical outputs.
Using the splitter capability can eliminate the need for multiple encoders, which gives you greater design flexibility.
Signal Repeater
When your encoder signal needs to transmit over long distances, the RX/TXD can be configured as a signal repeater. This not only
eliminates the risk of voltage drop, it also ensures your signal integrity.

TMNL SIGNAL TMNL SIGNAL
1 Z' 18 N/C
2 Z 19 Z’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 B' 20 Z
4 B Output 3 21 B'
5 A' Signals 22 B Output 1
6 A 23 A' Signals
7 COM 24 A
8 N/C 25 COM
9 Z' 26 N/C
10 Z 27 Z'
11 B' 28 Z
12 B Output 2 29 B' Input Signals
13 A' Signals 30 B from Encoder
14 A 31 A'
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 15 COM 32 A
16 COM Input 33 COM Encoder
17 +VDC Power 34 +VDC Supply
All inputs and outputs may not be present, depending on the RX/TXD version.
When you're troubleshooting a closed-loop control system, you need to know if the encoder is functioning properly so you don't
waste time looking at the wrong components. The RX/TXD does that for you; it has a series of LED lights on the front panel that tell
you if the power is on, and if it is still receiving a signal.
The RX/TXD also accommodates voltages in a regulated range of 5-24VDC or fixed 5VDC as both input and output options, as well
as a variety of digital signal types, including RS422, NPN, PNP, and TTL (and more – contact us for more options).
Get it FAST
As with all our products, EPC’s standard lead time on the RX/TXD is just 4 to 6 business days, with expedite options available. And
of course, it's covered by EPC’s industry-leading 3-year warranty. View the datasheet on pages 116 – 117, or go to encoder.com to
configure and download a 3D model to drop into your application drawing.
For more information on how the RX/TXD can fit into your application, contact EPC today. When you call EPC, you'll talk to real
engineers and encoder experts who can answer your toughest, most technical encoder questions. Give us a call.

Accessories
RX / T XD Receiver-Transmitter Unit Versatile Encoder Interface
Features
DIN Rail Mount
Level Changes from Vcc to 5V
Signal Conditioner or Repeater for Distance Transmission
2 or 3 Way Splitter/Level Changer
Encoder Tester/Verifier
This lightweight DIN rail mountable unit, Line Driver and Line Receiver is
composed of a PC/ABS self-extinguishing material blend. Configurable as a
level changer, line repeater, splitter or encoder tester, the RX/TXD will accept
TTL, RS422, RS485, PP, NPN, NPN OC, or PNP encoder inputs at 5V, or HTL,
PP, NPN, NPN OC & PNP at 5-24V. It will provide up to three outputs in any
combination of TTL, RS422, RS485, PP, at 5V, or HTL, PP at 5-24V. A series of
LEDs on the front panel indicates power and signal presence. Connections
are made via the easily accessible screw terminals as standard. This device
may be used as both a Line Driver and Line Receiver.
R X/T X D O r d e r i n g G u i d e
Electrical
RXTXD 1 V3 5V 5H 4P 4H 5P
VERSION ENCODER/SENSOR One Two Three

1 Receiver/Transmitter Output Outputs Outputs
POWER
(one set of outputs) 5V 5V Only
2 Receiver/Transmitter 24V 5-24 Vcc 2
(two sets of outputs)
3 Receiver/Transmitter
(three sets of outputs) INPUT SIGNAL FINAL OUTPUT SIGNAL
5H 5V Differential Driver3 5H 5V Differential Driver3
5N 5V NPN Open-Collector 5P 5V Push-Pull S/Ended4
MODEL INPUT 5P 5V Push-Pull S/Ended2,4 4H 24V Differential Driver5
RXTXD Receiver/ VOLTAGE 24H 24V Differential Driver5 4P 24V Push-Pull S/Ended6
Transmitter V5 5V Only 24N 24V NPN Open-Collector
V3 5-24V1 24P 24V Push-Pull S/Ended6
NOTES:
1 24V Maximum Voltage.
2 Encoder/Sensor and output signal voltages are limited to the input voltage supplied.
5P Input Signal not available with 5-24Vcc option.
3 TTL, RS422 & RS485 Compatible.
4 TTL, NPN (Sink), PNP (Source), PP.
5 HTL Compatible.
6 NPN (Sink), PNP (Source), PP.

R X/T X D Sp e c ifi c at i o n s R X/ T X D R e c e iv e r- T r a n s m i t t e r
Electrical
Input Voltage �� 5V to 24V Max
Current
Consumption �� 250 mA Typical
Repeater Output
Voltage �� 5V or Vcc
Frequency
Response �� Up to 800 Khz
Output Current �� 30 mA/ Channel Max
Mechanical
Weight �� 250g
Enclosure �� PC/ABS, IP20
Terminal �� Screw Type 30/12 AWG
TMNL SIGNAL TMNL SIGNAL

1 Z' 18 N/C
2 Z 19 Z’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 B' 20 Z
4 B Output 3 21 B'
5 A' Signals 22 B Output 1
6 A 23 A' Signals
7 COM 24 A
8 N/C 25 COM
9 Z' 26 N/C
10 Z 27 Z'
11 B' 28 Z
12 B Output 2 29 B' Input Signals
13 A' Signals 30 B from Encoder
14 A 31 A'
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 15 COM 32 A
16 COM Input 33 COM Encoder
17 +VDC Power 34 +VDC Supply
All inputs and outputs may not be present, depending on the RX/TXD version.
Final Output A
Signal 1 B Receiving
Input Voltage
Z Device 1
Encoder/Sensor Power
A
Encoder/Sensor B Final Output
RX/TXD A
Signal 2 Receiving
Z B
Input Signals Z Device 2
NOTES: 1. All RX/TXD versions can receive, transmit, repeat, Final Output
refresh, condition, and level change digital signals. Signal 3
A
2. All RX/TXD have LED indicator lights that can be Receiving
used to verify/test digital signals. B
Z Device 3

Accessories
RX / T X C o n v e r t e r
Features
The RX/TX Converter converts a Push-Pull or NPN encoder output to an
RS422 compatible differential Line Driver output. In addition, it will also
convert Line Driver/RS422 encoder output to single ended signals (Push-Pull)
for compatibility with certain PLC's.
Each converter has two independent channels: Channel 1 is equipped with
a differential Line Receiver on the input. It then converts these differential
signals (A, A’, B, B’, Z, Z’) to Push-Pull output signals (A, B, Z), with an
amplitude equivalent to Vcc.
Channel 2 will convert single ended signals from a Push-Pull or NPN Open
Collector encoder to Differential Line Driver signals. Differential Line Driver
signals include complementary o utputs A’, B’, and Z’ which offer greater
immunity to electrical noise, signal distortion, and interference, especially
with long cable runs.
Applications
R X/Tx C o n v e r t e r
O r d e r i n g I n f o r mat i o n To provide differential signals for data transmission over long distances
(Specify stock # when ordering) between a push-pull, or NPN open collector transmitter and receiver. To
enable devices with different output/input circuits to be connected. To
Differential = A,A’, B,B’, Z,Z’
Single Ended = A, B, Z properly terminate differential signals to eliminate/reduce signal distortions.
Specifications
Channel 1 Channel 2
Supply Source (Vcc) �� 5 to 24 VDC
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT Current Consumption �� 20 mA max (plus encoder and output load requirements)
Differential Single Ended Single Differential
Line Reciever Push Pull Ended Line Driver Enclosure �� IP54 (dust proof)
Stock # MAX 3095 Output 7272 7272 7272 Earth Circuit �� Grounded to Case
Input Voltage �� Channel 1: 24 VDC Max Diff
100020-1 5V Vcc 5V, OC1 Vcc
Channel 2: 5 VDC Max
100020-2 5V Vcc 5V, OC 1 5V Output Voltage �� Channel 1: Vcc
100020-3 5V Vcc 5V2 Vcc Channel 2: 5 VDC or Vcc
Output Current �� 30 mA/Channel Max
100020-4 5V Vcc 5V2 5V
100020-5 6-12V Vcc 5V, OC 1 Vcc
100020-6 6-12V Vcc 5V, OC1 5V
100020-7 6-12V Vcc 5V2 Vcc
100020-8 6-12V Vcc 5V2 5V
100020-9 13-24V Vcc 5V, OC1 Vcc
100020-10 13-24V Vcc 5V, OC1 5V
100020-11 13-24V Vcc 5V 2 Vcc
100020-12 13-24V Vcc 5V2 5V

REVISIONS
1
OC- Open Collector input designed with a 2k pull-up resistor for an open collector LTR DESCRIPTION DATE
- INITIAL RELEASE
output encoder or device.
2
Inputs can be from devices with pull-up, push-pull or TTL type outputs.
3
Vcc should range between 5-24 VDC
5.472 [139.00]
1.181 [30.00]
5.000 [127.00]
4.488 [114.00]
Ø0.197 [Ø5.00]
1.732 [44.00]
1.181 [30.00] 2.520 [64.00]
RXTX-ENC

RX / T X R e p e a t e r
Features
The RX/TX Repeater retransmits signals from an encoder output in order
to drive signals over a longer distance with reduced noise and distortion
free waveforms. The input is equipped with a Differential Line Receiver and
a Differential Line Driver. It takes the differential signals (A, A’, B, B’, Z, Z’) ,
squares the signals up, and then repeats the signals at the outputs.
Benefits are greater immunity from electrical noise, signal distortion, and
interference, especially with long cable runs. The output signal can be 5 VDC or
an amplitude equivalent to Vcc.
Applications
Repeat differential signals for data transmission over long distances. To properly
terminate differential signals to eliminate/reduce signal distortions. Increase
output current drive capability in order to drive multiple receivers
Specifications
R X/Tx r e p e at e r Supply Source (Vcc)......... 5 to 24 VDC
O r d e r i n g I n f o r mat i o n Current Consumption...... 20 mA max (plus encoder and output load requirements)
(Specify stock # when ordering) Max Frequency �� Up to 1 MHz
Enclosure �� IP54 (dust proof)
For differential signals only Earth Circuit �� Grounded to Case
Input Voltage �� 24 VDC Max Diff
Output Voltage �� 5 VDC or Vcc
INPUT OUTPUT Output Current �� 30 mA/Channel Max
Differential Line Differential Line
Stock # Receiver - MAX 3095 Driver 7272
100020-13 5V 5V
100020-14 5V Vcc2
100020-15 6-12V 5V
100020-16 6-12V Vcc2
100020-17 13-24V 5V-
100020-18 13-24V Vcc2

1
Vcc should range between 5-24 VDC.
2
Outputs will be equivalent to voltage applied to Vcc (Pin P1-15)
REVISIONS
LTR DESCRIPTION
- INITIAL RELEASE
5.472 [139.00]
1.181 [30.00]
5.000 [127.00]
4.488 [114.00]
Ø0.197 [Ø5.00]
1.732 [44.00]
1.181 [30.00] 2.520 [64.00]
RXTX-ENC
1-800-366-5412 • ISSUE
www.encoder.com
DATE
TOLERANCE
• [email protected]
P
E C
119
ENCODER PRODUCTS CO
12/27/05
+
Accessories
RX / T X S p l i tt e r
Features
The RX/TX Splitter has one input and two separate output channels. There
are two different types of inputs available. One input type is a differential
line receiver where differential input signals (A, A’, B,B’,Z,Z’) are split into two
identical differential output channels. Alternatively, the input can be configured
for a single ended Push-Pull, NPN, Open Collector, or Pull-Up encoder (A,B,Z),
which will split the signal into two independent differential line driver outputs
(A, A’, B,B’,Z,Z’). Refer to the block diagram below for the signal flow through
the device. Line Driver signals include complementary outputs A’, B’, and Z’, and
offer greater immunity from electrical noise, signal distortion, and interference
especially with long cable runs. The output signal can be approximately 5 VDC
or a voltage amplitude equivalent to the RXTX supply (Vcc).
NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

1. TERMINATE CABLE SHIELD/DRAIN WIRES
5. P1-15 (5-24VDC IN (Vcc)) IS FOR CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
4. P2-14 (Vcc) or P2-15 (5V) CAN BE USED TO POWER ENCODER.
3. SEE CONFIGURATION ORDERING GUIDE FOR INPUT/OUTPUT
2. RECOMMENDED CABLE FOR DIFFERENTIAL/

To order, choose the type of input (differential or single ended), the expected
IF APPLICABLE. BARE CONDUCTORS MUST

TO THE CASE TERMINAL OF P1 AND P2,
HEAT SHRINK TUBING.
BOARD WITH A NONCONDUCTIVE SLEEVE SUCH AS
BE ELECTRICALLY INSULATED FROM THE CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE PER THE SELECTED RXTX MODEL NUMBER
"LOW CAPACITANCE, TWISTED-SHIELDED PAIR:

COMPLEMENTARY ENCODER SIGNALS:
POWER TO OPERATE RXTX.
THROUGH CABLE ENTRY GLANDS.

OUTER INSULATION STRIPPED OFF IN ORDER TO FIT
CABLES/CONNECTORS. 4XXC CABLES MUST HAVE
SEE ACCESSORIES SECTION FOR 4XXC
encoder signal voltage and the voltage output options. Use the RXTX Splitter
R X/Tx s p l i t t e r ordering guide below to establish the stock number.
O r d e r i n g I n f o r mat i o n
(Specify stock # when ordering) Applications
Single Ended = A, B, Z
To split differential, or single ended signals for data transmission over long
Output Voltages or short distances to two different devices. To properly terminate differential
(single ended or signals to eliminate/reduce signal distortion. To increase output current drive
differential-7272)
Input Voltage
capability in order to drive multiple receivers. To split the input signal and
Stock # INPUT TYPE (From Encoder) CH1 CH.2 provide the two output channel drivers with differing voltage outputs.
100020-20 Differential 5V 5V 5V
Sp e c i f i c at i o n s
PART NUMBER
NEXT ASSEMBLY
PREV ASSEMBLY
ISSUE DATE
100020-21 Differential 5V Vcc Vcc

12/07/05
10002022 Differential 5V Vcc 5V Supply Source (Vcc) �� 5 to 24 VDC

Current Consumption �� 20 mA max (plus encoder & output load requirements)
100020-23 Differential 6-12V 5V 5V
100020-24 Differential 6-12V Vcc Vcc Enclosure �� IP54 (dust proof)
DECIMAL
DECIMAL
ANGULAR
TOLERANCE
-+
-+
-
+
Earth Circuit �� Grounded to Case

.005
.1˚
.01
100020-25 Differential 6-12V Vcc 5V

Input Voltage �� 24 VDC Max Diff
100020-26 Differential 13-24V 5V 5V
Output Voltage..........................5 VDC or Vcc
Output Current...........................30 mA/Channel Max
QC
CK
DR GMA 08/26/04
PRJ ENG
100020-27 Differential 13-24V Vcc Vcc

MFG
INITIAL
100020-28 Differential 13-24V Vcc 5V

E
P
RXTX_SPLITTER_CONN
C
100020-29 Single Ended 5V OC 5V 5V SPLITTER

DATE
LTR
PIN 1
100020-30 Single Ended 5-24V OC Vcc Vcc

DWG SIZE
COM IN 5V OUT
15
DWG NUMBER
NAME AND TITLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INITIAL RELEASE
RXTX_SPLITTER_CONN
14 13 12 11 10
CASE Vcc OUT

100020-31 Single Ended 5V OC Vcc 5V
SINGLE-ENDED
A
Z
INPUT
100020-32 Single Ended 5V PP, PU, TTL 5V 5V

A
B
DIFFERENTIAL
OUTPUT 2
DESCRIPTION
B
100020-33 Single Ended 5-24V PP, PU, TTL Vcc Vcc

B
NC
RXTX SPLITTER
NC
Z
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
100020-34 Single Ended 5V PP, PU, TTL Vcc 5V

P2
P1
CONNECTIONS
REVISIONS
1
A
Choose an input channel of signal type differential or single ended that is to

Z
DIFFERENTIAL
SCALE
10 11 12 13 14 15
be split into two output channels. These input signals are typically from an
A
B
DIFFERENTIAL
INPUT
OUTPUT 1
incremental encoder. Refer to the block diagram below for the input and output
B
signal flow.
NONE
2
For OC type inputs, 2K ohm resistors are used for pull-up internally.
Z
3
The output channels may be used in the differential mode (A,A’, B,B’, Z,Z’) or as CASE
Z
REVISIONS
A, B, Z (PP) referenced to circuit common. 5-24V IN COM OUT
4 DATE
Vcc is the RXTX Splitter supply voltage and ranges from 5 to 24 VDC.
(Vcc) LTR DESCRIPTION
PIN 1
- INITIAL RELEASE
5
Single ended input voltage must be less than or equal to the output voltage (Vcc
SPLITTER
SHEET
or 5V), Whichever is applicable. A

6 A
Vcc (5-24VDC) or a PCB generated 5V is supplied to the output drivers Differential Differential
1
A'
DATE
Output:
(channels).
A' Input:
Channel 1
OF
B B
Typically Typically to
REV.
B' B'
1
-
from an a controller
Z or counter Z
encoder
5.472 [139.00] Z'
Z'
1.181 [30.00]
5.000 [127.00]
4.488 [114.00] OR
Ø0.197 [Ø5.00]
A A
Single Differential
Ended Output: A'
Input: Channel 2
1.732 [44.00] B B
1.181 [30.00] 2.520 [64.00] Typically to B'
Typically a controller
Z from an or counter Z
encoder Z'
RXTX-ENC

Encoder Power Supply
Features
A clean source of dedicated power for your encoder is an important factor when designing
a reliable system. Now available from EPC are small, easily mounted DIN Rail power supplies
specifically chosen to power encoders. Designed for space efficiency, these compact power
supplies are available in 5, 12, or 24 VDC.
Easy to see LED indicators show the power supply is working properly. Screw type terminals
easily accommodate wires from AWG 24 to 14 while snap-on DIN-Rail mounting (TS35/7.5
or TS35/15) allows the unit to sit safely and firmly on the rail with no tools required even to
remove. The shock proof housing is both UL and CE approved. These supplies have been tested
to work with all our Accu-Coders™.
Specifications e n c o d e r P o w e r s u pp ly
Electrical O r d e r i n g I n f o r mat i o n
Nominal Input Voltage ��100 to 240 Vac / 47 to 63 Hz (Specify stock # when ordering)
Input Voltage Range ��90 to 265 Vac / 47 to 63 Hz or Differential = A,A’, B,B’, Z,Z’
120 to 370 VDC Single Ended = A, B, Z
Frequency �� 100 kHz min Stock #
Inrush Surge Current ��< 10 A @ 115Vac, < 18A @ 230 Vac 100043............................5V Output (EPS-5V)
Input Fuse ��T2A / 250 Vac 100044............................12V Output (EPS-12V)
100045............................24V Output (EPS-24V)
EPS-5V EPS-12V EPS-24V
Nominal Output Voltage........... 5 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC
Tolerance................................... ± 1 % ± 1 % ±1%
Nominal Output Current........... 3 A 1.5 A 0.75 A Approvals and Standards
Efficiency................................... > 75% > 77 % > 77 % UL/cUL ��UL 508 / UL 1310 Listed, Class 2
Ripple and Noise....................... 50 mV 50 mV 50 mV TUV ��EN 60950
CE ��EN 50081-1 / EN 55022 Class B,
Mechanical EN 61000-3-2
Dimensions �� 3.54” L x 0.89” W x 4.5” D EN 61000-3-3, EN 50082-1 / EN 55024
(90 mm L x 22.5 mm W x 115 mm D) FCC ��Class B
Connection Type �� Screw Clamp Connection
Mounting �� DIN-Rail TS35/7.5 or TS35/15
Environmental
Operating Temperature-10O C to +50O C
Storage Temperature �� -25O C to +85O C
Relative Humidity �� 95% RH
p r o g r a mm a b l e E n c o d e r Acc e s s o r i e s
US B p r o g r a m m i n g Ki t
Kit includes software, USB Programming Module, and 2-meter Interface Cable with specified connector. See Accessories for individual Interface Cables.
PR1-001-10 �� 10-Pin MS Style Programming Kit
PR1-001-J �� 5-Pin M12 Programming Kit
PR1-001-K �� 8-Pin M12 Programming Kit
PR1-001-09 �� 9-Pin D-Sub Programming Kit
PR1-001-G �� Gland Cable Programming Kit
USB P ROGR A M M ING M ODULE

PR1-001 �� USB Programming Module
P ROGR A M M ING INTERFA CE C A BLE Interface Cable

(2 METER)
075233-02 �� 10-Pin MS Style Interface Cable
075234-02 �� 7-Pin MS Style Interface Cable Field Programming Software
075235-02 �� 6-Pin MS Style Interface Cable
075236-02 �� 5-Pin M12 Interface Cable
075237-02 �� 8-Pin M12 Interface Cable USB Programming Module
075238-02 �� 9-Pin D-Sub Interface Cable
075240-02 �� Gland Interface Cable

Accessories
C o n n e ct o r s & C a b l e s
M at i n g C o n n e c to r s E l e c t r i c a l Ca b l e
Stock # Description Stock # Description
080014................................MS3106A14S-6S-619................... 6-pin MS 070148................................Standard Cable
080174................................MS3106A16S-1S-618................... 7-pin MS 070244................................Twisted Pair Cable - Line Driver outputs only
080113.................................MS3106A18-1S-618...................... 10-pin MS 070063................................High Temperature Cable
080325-01...........................AIM 40-9709S............................... 9-pin D-sub Miniature 070264................................Cable for Absolute Encoders - Models 925 and 958
080359...................................................................................... 12-pin M23
080364...................................................................................... 16-pin 23, CE
080365...................................................................................... 16-pin M23
080023................................KPT06F14-19S............................. 19-pin Bayonet
080376-01................................................................................. 10-pin Industrial Clamp
080021................................KPT06F12-10S............................. 10-pin Bayonet
P r e-W i r e d C a b l e a n d M at i n g C o n n e c to r A s s e m b l i e s
To order a pre-wired cable and connector assembly complete the boxes to indicate the connector style, cable length, and output configuration.
Incremental Encoder Cable Assemblies

(Cable is 24 AWG foil and braid shielded and is rated to 105º C)
Cable Type C - - - - CE Compatible

3 Standard Y Yes
4 Twisted Pair N No
Connector Type
06 6-pin MS1 Output Type
07 7-pin MS1 Channel
ST OC, PU, PP, S, O Configuration
09 9-pin D-Sub Mini1 HV HV
10 10-pin MS A Single Channel
12 12-pin M23 Q Quadrature or Dual
A6 6-Pin MS 90° Channel
Cable Length R Quadrature with
A7 7-pin MS 90° Number of Feet
A1 10-pin MS 90° Index Z
H1 10-pin Bayonet
Absolute Encoder Cable Assemblies

(Cable is 28 or 30 AWG foil and braid shielded and is rated to 70° C)
Cable Type
5 Absolute
4 Twisted Pair
C- -
Notes:
Connector Type CE 1 Available with standard cable (3XX) only.
Cable
10 10-pin MS 2 Compatible 2 8 bit only. CE option not available.
Length
16 16-pin M233 Y Yes 3 For use with ≤ 12 bit outputs.
Number of Feet
19 19-pin Bayonet N No
Molex header CordSets for use with Model 30M

Stock # Description Length
075230........................... 8-pin Molex Mating Connector..................... 24 inches
075232........................... 16-pin Molex Mating Connector................... 24 inches
M 12 (12 m m) C o r d S e t s (Always use a shielded cordset)
8-Conductor Cordsets (For use with 8-pin M12 connectors) 3, 4, and 5-Conductor Cordsets (For use with 5-pin M12 connectors)
Shield not connected to Coupling Nut Shield not connected to Coupling Nut
Stock # Description Length Stock # Description Length
075100................................RKC8T-0.5/S618................. 0.5 Meters (1.64 ft) 075205........................... 3-Conductor RK 4T-1/S618.......................... 1 Meter (3.28 ft)
075101................................RKC 8T-2/S618................... 2 Meters (6.56 ft) 075206........................... 4-Conductor RK 4.4T-1/S618....................... 1 Meter (3.28 ft)
075102................................RKC 8T-4/S618................... 4 Meters (13.12 ft) 075204........................... 5-Conductor RK 4.5T-1/S618....................... 1 Meter (3.28 ft)
075103................................RKC 8T-6/S618................... 6 Meters (19.69 ft.)
075104................................RKC 8T-10/S618................. 10 Meters (32.81 ft) Shield connected to Coupling Nut (use for CE option)
Shield connected to Coupling Nut (use for CE option) 075211.................................5-Conductor............................................ 1 Meter (3.28 ft)
075200................................RKS 8T-2............................. 2 Meters (6.56 ft)
075201................................RKS 8T-4............................. 4 Meters (13.12 ft)
075202................................RKS 8T-6............................. 6 Meters (19.69 ft)
075203................................RKS 8T-10........................... 10 Meters (32.81 ft)

C o n n e ct o r s & C a b l e s
P o w e r a n d C o m m u n i c at i o n C a b l e s f o r E t h e r n e t E n c o d e r s
Stock # Description Length Stock # Description Length
075241........................... DC Power Cable, A Code............................................. 2 M 075247........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to RJ-45.................. 10 M
075242........................... DC Power Cable, A Code............................................. 5 M 075248........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to RJ-45.................. 20 M
075243........................... DC Power Cable, A Code............................................. 10 M 075249........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to M12 4-pin........... 2 M
075244........................... DC Power Cable, A Code............................................. 20 M 075250........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to M12 4-pin........... 5 M
075245........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to RJ-45.................. 2 M 075251........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to M12 4-pin........... 10 M
075246........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to RJ-45.................. 5 M 075252........................... Signal Cable, D Code, M12 4-pin to M12 4-pin........... 20 M
b o r e & Sh a f t a cc e s s o r i e s
B o r e A dap to r s A CCESSORIES FOR M A GNETIC
I n d ivi d ua l B o r e A da p to r s ENCODER M ODULES
Stock # Description
176252............................... 1.000” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T Ov e r S h a f t M a g n e t H o l d e r S
176253............................... 7/8” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T Stock# Description
176254............................... 5/8” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T
176255............................... 25 mm ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T 176596-01.......................... 3/16” Bore ID
176256............................... 24 mm ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T 176597-01.......................... 5mm Bore ID
176277............................... 3/4” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T 176600-01.......................... 5/16” Bore ID
176283............................... 1/2” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T 176601-01.......................... 8mm Bore ID
176604-01.......................... 1/2” Bore ID Over Shaft
176325............................... 12 mm ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T Magnet Holder
176328............................... 1/4” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T 176605-01.......................... 14mm Bore ID
176335............................... 8 mm ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T
176336............................... 10 mm ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T Various Bore
176337............................... 11 mm ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T Adaptors Magnet
176338............................... 5/16” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T Stock# Description
176339............................... 3/8” ID Bore Adaptor for Model 25T 030141............................... Raw Magnet
B o r e A da p to r Ki t s P r e s s I n/O n M a g n e t H o l d e r
Stock# Description Stock# Description
260-BK97............................ Small Metric Bore Adaptor Kit for 260. Includes 6, 8, & 10 mm 176607-01.......................... Press In/On Magnet Holder
260-BK98............................ Large Metric Bore Adaptor Kit for 260. Includes 11, 12, & 14 mm (0.250” bore/0.125” shaft) Press In/On
260-BK99............................ Inch Standard Bore Adaptor Kit for 260. Includes 0.250”, 0.375 Magnet Holder
and 0.500”
25T-BK98............................ Metric Bore Adaptor Kit for 25T. Includes 19, 20, 24, 25 & 28 mm
25T-BK99............................ Inch Standard Bore Adaptor Kit for 25T. Includes 0.500”, 0.625”
0.750”, 0.875” and 1.000”
58T-BK98............................ Metric Bore Adaptor Kit for 58T. Includes 6, 8, 10, 11, 12 & 14 mm
58T-BK99............................ Inch Standard Bore Adaptor Kit for 58T. Includes 0.250”, 0.3125”
0.375” and 0.500”
Field Replaceable SealS Shafts

Stock # Description Stock # Description Tapered
161247............................... Field Replaceable IP66 seal for 725, 925, IND12 & TR3 176406............................... 10:1 Tapered Shaft with Internal Threads Shafts
161248............................... Field Replaceable IP67 seal for 725, 925, TR3 176407............................... 10:1 Tapered Shaft without Internal Threads
161254............................... Field Replaceable IP67 seal for 702, 802, 758, 858 176154-01.......................... Model TR1 Replacement Pivot Shaft Kit, 1/4-20 Threaded
161264............................... Field Replaceable IP66 seal for 702, 802, 758, 858 176155-01.......................... Model TR1 Replacement Pivot Shaft Kit, M6 Threaded
176224-01.......................... Model TR1 Torsion Spring Assembly
Shaft Couplings
Stock # Length From shaft size To shaft size
161307............................... 1.00"................................... 0.250".................................. 0.250"
Magnetic CouplingS
161308............................... 1.00"................................... 6 mm................................... 6 mm Stock # Description
161309............................... 1.00"................................... 6 mm................................... 0.250" 176282-01..........For Models 260 & 25T with
161314............................... 1.00"................................... 6 mm................................... 0.375" a 5/8”(0.625”) bore
161313............................... 1.00"................................... 0.250".................................. 0.375" 176409-01..........For Models 260 & 25T with
Flexible Shaft
161317............................... 1.00"................................... 0.375".................................. 0.375" Couplings a 3/8” (0.375”) bore Magnetic
161319............................... 1.50"................................... 0.375".................................. 0.500" Couplings

Accessories
Mounting brackets & options
Mounting Brackets
Pivot Brackets
Stock #
176430-01 (Replaces 140039)......................... Single Pivot for Cube Housing*
176430-02........................................................ Spring Loaded Single Pivot for Cube Housing*
176431-01 (Replaces 140040)......................... Double Pivot for Cube Housing*
176431-02........................................................ Spring Loaded Double Pivot for Cube Housing*
176727-01........................................................ Single Pivot Bracket for Size 25 Shaft Encoders*
176727-02........................................................ Spring Loaded Single Pivot Bracket for Size 25 Shaft Encoders*
140113.............................................................. Spring Loaded Pivot Mounting Bracket for 702, 725, and 925
*Mounting bracket included. Heavy Duty Mounting Plate
#176396-01
Tru-Trac™ Optional Mounting Brackets
Stock #
140104............................................................. Angled Mounting Bracket for Models TR1 Tru-Trac™ and TR2 Tru-Trac™
176389-01........................................................ Mounting Plate and Pivot Arm Kit for Model TR3 Tru-Trac™
176391-01........................................................ Double Pivot Bracket Kit for Model TR3 Tru-Trac™
LCE Optional Mounting Plate

Stock #
176064-01........................................................ Attaches to Standard or Industrial LCE in three different orientations
Foot Mounting Plates & Brackets

Stock # Foot Mount Bracket
140121............................................................. Use with Clamping Flange 20 Type - 758, 858, 958 #140122
140122............................................................. For Use with 702, 802S, 725 & 925
176396-01........................................................ Heavy Duty Mounting Plate Kit for HD Cube Housing
Uni-Brackets
Adapts the Model 260 or Model 702 Flex-Mount to fit a standard motor mount with a mounting bolt circle up to 5.875”,
such as a NEMA 4.5” AK mount or IEC equivalent.
Stock #
175997-01........................................................ Uni-Bracket Kit
M o u n t i n g Op t i o n s
Anti-Rotation Flex Mounts
Stock # Three Point Anti-Rotation Flex Mount
140054-01........................................................ 775, 776, Anti- Rotation Flex Arm Mounting Kit. #140114-01
140106-01........................................................ 225 Flex Arm Mounting Kit
140108-01........................................................ 260 and 702 Flex Arm Mounting Kit
140055-01........................................................ 260 SF Mounting Kit
140107-01........................................................ 260 SD Mounting Kit
140071-01........................................................ 260 FA Flex Arm Mounting Kit
140114-01......................................................... 25T SE 3-Point Mount Kit
140115-01......................................................... 25T SG Tether Arm Kit
140116-01......................................................... 25T SJ Tether Arm Kit
140123-01........................................................ 25T SH Tether Arm Kit
Mounting Hubs with Couplings for Size 15

Stock #
175488-01........................................................ NEMA Size 34, 6 mm coupling Angled Mounting Bracket
175489-01........................................................ NEMA Size 23, 6 mm coupling #140104
175488-02 ....................................................... NEMA Size 34, 1/4” coupling
Mounting Flanges and Adaptors

Stock #
175124............................................................. Square Flange Adaptor for Model 755A
175125............................................................. Adapts Standard Cube Housing to fit in Explosion Proof Housing
175126............................................................. Standard Cube Universal Round Flange Uni-Bracket
175494............................................................. 5PY Adaptor for Size 25 Series #175997-01
175443............................................................. 5PY Adaptor for 2.25” Standard Cube Housing
175557-01........................................................ Cube Mounting Adaptor for Size 20 Series
176672............................................................. Universal Mounting Adaptor for the Model 30MT

Motor Kits/Covers/gasket kits
M oto r Ki t s
Model 25T Encoder with 5-28 VDC Input, A/B/Z Line Driver Outputs, 10-pin MS Style connector, -20° to 105° C
Temp, IP66 Sealing, SG Tether Arm Kit, 10-pin MS Mating Connector, and 56C Protective Cover.
MK-56C-25T-001 �� 5/8” Bore 1024 CPR
MK-56C-25T-002 �� 5/8” Bore 2048 CPR
MK-56C-25T-003 �� 5/8” Bore 4096 CPR
MK-56C-25T-004 �� 1.0” Bore 1024 CPR
MK-56C-25T-005 �� 1.0” Bore 2048 CPR
MK-56C-25T-006 �� 1.0” Bore 4096 CPR
Model 25T Encoder with 5-28 VDC Input, A/B/Z Line Driver Outputs, 10-pin Bayonet connector, -20° to 105° C
Temp, IP66 Sealing, SG Tether Arm Kit, 10-pin Bayonet Mating Connector and 56C Protective Cover.
Motor Kit for Model 25T
MK-56C-25T-051 �� 5/8” Bore 1024 CPR
MK-56C-25T-052 �� 5/8” Bore 2048 CPR
MK-56C-25T-053 �� 5/8” Bore 4096 CPR
MK-56C-25T-054 �� 1.0” Bore 1024 CPR
MK-56C-25T-055 �� 1.0” Bore 2048 CPR
MK-56C-25T-056 �� 1.0” Bore 4096 CPR
P r ot e c t iv e C o v e r s
Stock #
175996-01 �� Uni-Cover Kit (includes bolts and washers). Compatible with Models Uni-Cover
121, 225, 260, 755A, 702, 775, 776, and 960 #175996
770-000-02 �� 770 Protective Cover Kit (includes mounting hardware, IP65 Sealing)
771-000-07 �� 771 Protective Cover Kit (includes mounting hardware, IP65 Sealing)
865-000-02 �� 865T Protective Cover Kit (includes mounting hardware, IP65 Sealing)
176301-01 �� 56C Cage Style Cover Kit for Model 25T and Model 260 (includes
bolts and washers)
C - Fa c e G a s k e t Ki t s f o r M o d e l s 770 a n d 771
Stock #
770-Gasket-Kit �� C-Face Gasket Kit for Model 770
771-Gasket-Kit �� C-Face Gasket Kit for Model 771
121-Seal-Kit �� 121 Base Dust Seal (IP50)
770 Protective Cover 771 Protective Cover

#770-000-02 #771-000-07
t r u - t r a c ™ & l i n e a r e n c o d e r a cc e s s o r i e s
L i n e a r Ca b l e A c c e s s o r i e s
50” Linear Cable Adaptor for standard or industrial cube housings. Mounting hardware is included for easy installation
directly over the shaft of your existing cube encoder. See Technical Bulletin TB-517 for specific installation instructions.
Stock #
LCA01................................. 50” Linear Cable Adaptor for Standard Cube Housing with 1/4” shaft
LCA02................................. 50” Linear Cable Adaptor for Industrial Cube Housing with 3/8” shaft
176064-01.......................... Optional Mounting Plate and hardware for cube style Linear Cable Encoders
LCE Linear Cable Adaptor
TR2 R a c k s & A c c e s s o r i e s #LCA01
Stock #
140104............................... Angle Mounting Bracket
176216............................... 12” for Stainless Steel
176217............................... 24” for Stainless Steel Pinion Gears for TR2 Tru-Trac™
176218............................... 36” for Stainless Steel stainless steel rack
176219............................... Spacer Block for Stainless Steel #176220
161546............................... 2 meter Flexible Rack
161548............................... Flexible Rack Clamps 10 pk (with M4 x 0.7 x 1 mm)
Phillips Pan Head Machine Screws
161547............................... 1 meter Guide Rail for Flexible Rack (does not work with 176220 gear)
176220............................... 40 Tooth Pinion Gear for use with Stainless Steel Rack
176302............................... 40 Tooth Pinion Gear for use with Flexible Rack
For lengths over 36”, order multiple pieces of rack or the flexible plastic option. A spacer block must be used to
accurately join two or more pieces of rack. At encoder.com, see Technical Bulletins TB-522: TR2 – Tru-Trac™ TR2 Tru-Trac™ flexible rack, #161546.
Installation Instructions or TB-523: TR2 – Tru-Trac™ Flexible Rack Installation Instructions for details.

B r a c k e t s w i th m e a s u r i n g w h e e l s
For most linear measurement applications, our line of Tru-Trac™ encoders are a great option (see pages 26 – 35). These integrated
linear measurement solutions are easy to install and deliver reliable, accurate feedback for applications such as cut-to-length,
spooling, length measurement, and print registration. Occasionally, though, there is a linear measurement application that requires
something our Tru-Trac™ encoders don't offer. Maybe you need absolute feedback. Maybe you need additional bearing load. Maybe
you need the encoder to be programmable. If your application calls for any of those options, we have another solution: a bracket that
turns a Size 25 shaft encoder into a linear measurement solution.
Get Absolute Feedback

Our new bracket is specifically designed to fit our Size 25 shaft encoders,
and that includes our absolute Model A25SB (see page 20), a multi-turn
absolute encoder. The Model A25SB is ideal for industrial applications that
require an encoder with the capability of absolute positioning output, even
in power-off scenarios. Offering either SSI or CANopen communication
protocols, the Model A25SB features absolute feedback with resolution up
to 16 bits single turn and 43 bits multi-turn.
Need Additional Bearing Load?

For applications requiring additional bearing load, the Model 725I Accu-
Coder™ (see page 97) features an extra-heavy-duty industrial housing. In
addition to the rated bearing load of 80 lbs, the fully isolated encoder-within-
an-encoder design provides an additional layer of protection by using an
internal flexible mount and independent set of bearings to further protect the Single Pivot Bracket for Size 25 Shaft Encoders: #176727-01
encoder from the effects of severe axial and radial shaft loading. Spring-Loaded Single Pivot Bracket for Size 25 Shaft
Encoders: #176727-02
Mounting bracket is included with both options.
Also available as a kit with a Model 25SP programmable
Program Your Encoder for Your Application encoder. Call our Sales Department for more information.
If you need resolutions beyond 10,000 CPR, the programmable Model 25SP
Accu-CoderPro™ is your answer (see page 88). Like the Model 725I, this shaft encoder is also designed for the challenges of an
industrial environment and offers the same variety of shaft sizes, a range of connectors, and sealing up to IP67. However, the Model
25SP offers programmable output type, waveform, and resolution. There are 6 output options, 32 waveforms to choose from, and
you can choose any resolution from 1 to 65,536 CPR – that's 262,144 counts using 4x quadrature counting. The Model 25SP Accu-
CoderPro™ comes standard with dual bearings rated 80 lbs axial or radial, and offers up to IP67 sealing. Some configurations are in
stock and ready to ship.
Two Options for Your Bracket

Both types of bracket allow for convenient mounting of an encoder and measuring wheel over the surface being measured, and both
allow the assembly to adjust pitch for variations in material height.
The Single Pivot Bracket is gravity loaded and uses the combined weight of the encoder, measuring wheel, and bracket to provide
surface torsion.
The Spring Loaded Single Pivot Bracket uses a spring-loaded bracket, which provides an adjustable surface torsion. This allows the
encoder and measuring wheel to be mounted in almost any orientation, even upside down.
For more information on choosing the right measuring wheel, see page 35. If you’re which linear measurement solution is right for
your application, give us a call. When you call EPC, you talk to real engineers and encoder experts who can help you specify the
right encoder solution for your application.

M e a s u r i n g Wh e e l s
Li n e a r M e a s u r i n g W h e e l s
Faced Measuring Wheels For more inofrmation on how to choose the
Stock # Circumference Rim Type Bore Width right measuring wheel for your application,
161428 (TR3)................. 12”.................................. 60 Polyurethane.................3/8”....................................... 0.75”
161442 (TR3)................. 300 mm.......................... 60 Polyurethane.................3/8”....................................... 0.75” see page 35.
161336........................... 12”.................................. 80 Polyurethane.................1/4”....................................... 0.70”
161337........................... 12”.................................. 80 Polyurethane.................3/8”....................................... 0.70”
161360 (TR1)................. 6".................................... 85 Polyurethane.................1/4"....................................... 0.25"
161399 (TR1)................. 200 mm.......................... 85 Polyurethane.................1/4”....................................... 0.25” Measuring Wheel Dimensions
161338........................... 12”.................................. 90 Polyurethane.................1/4”....................................... 0.70” Rim Facing Circumference (A) Rim Width
161339........................... 12”.................................. 90 Polyurethane.................3/8”....................................... 0.70” Knurled 12" 1"
161349........................... 12”.................................. 90 Polyurethane.................5/8”....................................... 0.70” Rubber 12" 1"
161370........................... 6".................................... Knurled...............................1/4"....................................... 0.4" 80 Polyurethane 12" 0.70"
161376........................... 6".................................... Knurled...............................3/8"....................................... 0.4" 90 Polyurethane 12" 0.70"
161401 (TR1)................. 6”.................................... Knurled...............................1/4”....................................... 0.25” Rubber 12" 1/2"
161332........................... 12”.................................. Knurled...............................1/4”....................................... 1” Knurled 1/3 meter 5/8" or 1"
161333........................... 12”.................................. Knurled...............................3/8”....................................... 1” Rubber 1/3 meter 5/8" or 1"
161362........................... 12".................................. Knurled...............................1/4"....................................... 0.4" Urethane 1/3 meter 1"
161379........................... 12".................................. Knurled...............................3/8"....................................... 0.4"
161432 (TR3)................. 12”.................................. Knurled...............................3/8”....................................... 0.75”
161361........................... 1/3 Meter........................ Knurled...............................1/4"....................................... 10 mm
161380........................... 1/3 Meter........................ Knurled...............................3/8"....................................... 10 mm
161371........................... 200 mm.......................... Knurled...............................1/4”....................................... 10 mm Temperature Specifications
161400 (TR1)................. 200 mm.......................... Knurled...............................1/4"....................................... 0.25" Rubber Faced Urethane Faced
161424 (TR1)................. 200 mm.......................... Knurled...............................1/4”....................................... 0.25” -40° F to +275° F -40° F to +155° F
161372........................... 300 mm.......................... Knurled...............................1/4"....................................... 10 mm
*90 polyurethane is a more durable material and per-
161377........................... 300 mm.......................... Knurled...............................3/8"....................................... 10 mm forms better for tracking rough or hard fibers than the
161443 (TR3)................. 300 mm.......................... Knurled...............................3/8”....................................... 0.75” slightly softer 80 polyurethane material. The above
161373........................... 400 mm.......................... Knurled...............................1/4"....................................... 10 mm recommendations are only guidelines. Performance
161378........................... 400 mm.......................... Knurled...............................3/8"....................................... 10 mm may vary depending on your application. Contact
161374........................... 500 mm.......................... Knurled...............................1/4"....................................... 20 mm Customer Service for specification assistance.
161381........................... 500 mm.......................... Knurled...............................3/8"....................................... 20 mm
161423 (TR1)................. 6”.................................... Knurled Hard Anodized......1/4”....................................... 0.25”
161419........................... 12”.................................. Knurled Hard Anodized......3/8”....................................... 0.4”
161436 (TR3)................. 12”.................................. Knurled Hard Anodized......3/8”....................................... 0.75”
161438 (TR3)................. 300 mm.......................... Knurled Hard Anodized......3/8”....................................... 0.75”
A
161420........................... 12” . ............................... Knurled Hard Anodized......3/8”....................................... 1”
161310........................... 12”.................................. 65 Polyurethane.................1/4”....................................... 1”
161331........................... 12”.................................. 65 Polyurethane.................3/8”....................................... 1”
161346........................... 12”.................................. 65 Polyurethane.................1/4”....................................... 1/2”
161347........................... 12”.................................. 65 Polyurethane.................3/8”....................................... 1/2”
161344........................... 1/3 Meter........................ 65 Polyurethane.................1/4”....................................... 5/8”
161359........................... 1/3 Meter........................ 65 Polyurethane.................3/8”....................................... 5/8”
Rubber Insert Measuring Wheels

Stock # Circumference # of Inserts Bore Width Bore 1/4 or 3/8
161363........................... 200 mm.......................... 1..........................................1/4"....................................... 10 mm Typical Measuring Wheel
161382........................... 200 mm.......................... 1..........................................3/8"....................................... 10 mm
161364........................... 300 mm.......................... 1..........................................1/4"....................................... 10 mm
161384........................... 300 mm.......................... 1..........................................3/8"....................................... 10 mm
161365........................... 400 mm.......................... 1..........................................1/4"....................................... 10 mm
161385........................... 400 mm.......................... 1..........................................3/8"....................................... 10 mm
161366........................... 500 mm.......................... 2..........................................1/4"....................................... 20 mm
161388........................... 500 mm.......................... 2..........................................3/8"....................................... 20 mm
161369........................... 1/3 Meter........................ 1..........................................1/4"....................................... 10 mm
161387........................... 1/3 Meter........................ 1..........................................3/8"....................................... 10 mm
161367........................... 6".................................... 1..........................................1/4"....................................... 10 mm
161383........................... 6".................................... 1..........................................3/8"....................................... 10 mm
161368........................... 12".................................. 1..........................................1/4"....................................... 10 mm
161386........................... 12".................................. 1..........................................3/8"....................................... 10 mm
Recommended Use for Measuring Wheels

knurled faced 80 POLYUrethane 90 POLYUrethane Rubber Insert
Course Fabric Carpet Faced* Faced Fine Fabric Film
Cloth Tape Foam Soft Materials Cardboard Sandpaper Paper Foil
Rough Wood Insulation Smooth Materials Matting Insulated Wire Cable Metal (cease-free)
Rubber Metal Hard Plastic

B r a c k e t s w i th m e a s u r i n g w h e e l s
For most linear measurement applications, our line of Tru-Trac™ encoders are a great option (see pages 26 – 35), but sometimes
using a Cube Encoder (see pages 70 – 77) with a bracket is the better choice. If you need help determining the best linear
measurement solution for your application, give us a call. When you call EPC, you talk to real engineers and encoder experts who
understand how encoders work, and can help you specify the right encoder solution for your application.
Single Pivot Bracket or Spring Loaded Single Pivot Bracket

The Single Pivot Bracket allows for convenient mounting of an encoder and measuring wheel
over the surface being measured.
With the Single Pivot Bracket, the gravity-loaded bracket uses the combined weight of the
encoder, measuring wheel, and bracket to provide surface torsion, while the single pivot
action allows the assembly to adjust pitch for variations in material height.
The Spring Loaded Bracket provides an adjustable surface torsion, which allows the encoder
and measuring wheel to be mounted in almost any orientation, even upside down.
For use with Standard and Industrial Cube housing options with single- or double-ended
shafts. Right angle bracket and 5/8” diameter bar also included
Single Pivot Bracket Stock #176389-01
Spring Loaded Single Pivot Bracket Stock #176389-01
Spring Loaded Single Pivot Bracket
Double Pivot Bracket or Double Loaded Single Pivot Bracket

The Double Pivot Bracket allows for convenient mounting of an encoder and measuring
wheel over the surface being measured.
With the Double Pivot Bracket, gravity loaded bracket uses the combined weight of
the encoder, measuring wheel and bracket to provide surface torsion, while the double
pivot action allows the assembly to adjust both pitch and roll for variations in the surface
being measured.
The Spring Loaded Double Pivot Bracket provides an adjustable surface torsion, which
allows the encoder and measuring wheel to be mounted in almost any orientation, even
upside down.
For use with Standard and Industrial Cube housing options with double-ended shafts.
Right angle bracket and 5/8” diameter bar also included
Double Pivot Bracket Stock #176431-01
Double Loaded Single Pivot Bracket Stock #176389-01
Double Pivot Bracket without spring

Technical Information
c o n n e ct o r p i n c o n f i g u r a t i o n D i a g r a m s
M23 s t y l e c o n n e c to r s B ayo n e t s t y l e c o n n e c to r s
12-Pin 16-Pin 19-Pin 10-Pin

M23 M23 Bayonet Bayonet
MS s t y l e c o n n e c to r s M 12 s t y l e c o n n e c to r s
10-Pin MS 7-Pin MS 6-Pin MS
8- P i n Ca b l e G l a n d
9-P i n D-SU B Molex Header
8-P i n M o l e x h e a d e r 16- P i n M o l e x h e a d e r
f o r t h e 30M f o r t h e 30M

quadrature phasing and index gating options
Standard Quadrature Phasing -

A leads B during clockwise rotation when viewed from the shaft end or mounting face.
If your And your And you need... For number For

model is... output type is... of channels waveform
enter... see...
15, 25, 121, oc, pu, hv, od, Single channel only A Figure 1
260, TR1, TR2, lo, PP Quadrature A and B Q Figure 2
TR3
Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to A R Figure 3
Quadrature A and B with 90° index gated to A and B R3 Figure 4
Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to A R5 Figure 5
Quadrature A and B with inverted 90° index gated to A and B R7 Figure 6
755A, 702, 725, HV, PP Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to A R Figure 3
758, 802S, Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to B R2 Figure 7
858S
Quadrature A and B with ungated index centered on A between 360° and 180° R4 Figure 8
Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to B R6 Figure 9
Quadrature A and B with ungated inverted index centered on A between 360° and 180° R8 Figure 10
755A, 702, 725, OC, PU Quadrature A and B with ungated index centered on A low between 360° and 180° R Figure 11
758, 802S, Note: Interpolated Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to B low R2 Figure 12
858S units CPR>3000
will use HV/PP Quadrature A and B with 90° index gated to A low and B low R3 Figure 13
waveforms. Quadrature A and B with ungated index centered on A low between 360° and 180° R4 Figure 14
Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to A low R5 Figure 15
Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to B low R6 Figure 16
Quadrature A and B with inverted 90° index gated to A low and B low R7 Figure 17
Quadrature A and B with ungated inverted index centered on A low between 360° and 180° R8 Figure 18
770, 771, 775, HV, PP Quadrature A and B Q Figure 2

776, 865T Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to A R Figure 3
770, 771, 775, OC, PU Quadrature A and B Q Figure 2

776, 865T Quadrature A and B with ungated index centered on A low between 360° and 180° R Figure 11
Quadrature A and B with 90° index gated to A low and B low R3 Figure 13

Reverse Quadrature Phasing -
B leads A during clockwise rotation when viewed from the shaft end or mounting face.
If your And your And you need... For number For

model is... output type of channels waveform
is... enter... see...
15, 25, 121, oc, pu, hv, Reverse Quadrature A and B K Figure 19
260, TR1, TR2, od, lo, PP Reverse Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to B low D Figure 20
TR3
Reverse Quadrature A and B with 90° index gated to A low and B low D3 Figure 21
Reverse Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to B low D5 Figure 22
Reverse Quadrature A and B with inverted 90° index gated to A low and B low D7 Figure 23
755A, 702, 725, HV, PP Reverse Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to B low D Figure 20
758, 802S, Reverse Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to A low D2 Figure 24
858S
Reverse Quadrature A and B with ungated index centered on B low between 360° and 180° D4 Figure 25
Reverse Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to A low D6 Figure 26
Reverse Quadrature A and B with ungated inverted index centered on B low between 360° and 180° D8 Figure 27
755A, 702, 725, OC, PU Reverse Quadrature A and B with ungated index centered on B low between 360° and 180° D Figure 28
758, 802S, Note: Reverse Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to A low D2 Figure 24
858S Interpolated
units Reverse Quadrature A and B with 90° index gated to A low and B low D3 Figure 21
CPR>3000 Reverse Quadrature A and B with ungated index centered on B low between 360° and 180° D4 Figure 25
will use HV/PP Reverse Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to B low D5 Figure 22
waveforms.
Reverse Quadrature A and B with inverted 180° index gated to A low D6 Figure 26
Reverse Quadrature A and B with ungated inverted index centered on B low between 360° and 180° D8 Figure 27
770, 771, 775, HV, PP Reverse Quadrature A and B K Figure 19

776, 865T Reverse Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to B low D Figure 20
770, 771, 775, OC, PU Reverse Quadrature A and B K Figure 19

776, 865T Reverse Quadrature A and B with 180° index gated to B low D Figure 20

Channel AA A
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel A A
Channel
Channel B B
waveform diagrams
R3 R5
QA AQA RQRQQ RRR
R3R3 R5R5 R7R7
R A Channel
Channel
Channel A A Channel A Channel
Channel A A Channel A
Channel
Channel
Channel AA AA
A Channel
Channel Channel
Channel A A Channel
Channel A A Channel
Channel A A
lhannel
A A
hannel A Channel A
Channel B Channel
Channel B B B Channel
Channel
Channel B B Channel B
Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B
hannel B Channel B
Z Channel
Channel
Channel Z Z Channel Z
Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z
Figure 1: Single channel onlyChannel Z Figure 2: Quadrature A and B Figure 3: Quadrature A and B with 180° Figure 4: Quadrature A and B with 90° Index
Index gated to A gated to A and B
R3R3
R3R5 R5R5R5 R7R7R7 R2 R4
R5 R7R7 R2R2 R4R4 R6R6
Channel
hannel A A R7 A Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel A
A A
A
A Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel A
A A
A
A Channel
Channel
Channel A A
Channel
Channel A A
R8
Channel A
Channel
Channel A A
R
annel A Channel A
Channel B Channel
Channel B B B Channel
Channel
Channel B B Channel B Channel
Channel B B Channel
ChannelBA
Channel
annel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B
hannel B Channel B
Channel Z Channel
Channel Z Z Z Channel
Channel
Channel Z Z Channel Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
ChannelZB
Channel
hannel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z
hannel Z Channel Z
Channel Z
Figure 5: Quadrature A and B with inverted Figure 6: Quadrature A and B with inverted 90° Figure 7: Quadrature A and B with 180° Figure 8: Quadrature A and B with ungated
180° Index gated to A Index gated to A and B Index gated to B Index centered on A between 360° and 180°
R2R2
R2R4
R4 R6R4
R4R4
R6 R6R6R6
R6 R8 R R8R8
R8 R2RR2R
RR2 R2R2
R2
A Channel
Channel
Channel A A Channel A Channel
Channel A A A Channel
Channel
Channel A A
Channel
hannel
annel A
A A
R8R8 Channel
Channel A
Channel A
A
RR Channel
Channel A A
Channel A AA
Channel
Channel Channel A AA
Channel
Channel R3 Channel A AA
Channel
Channel R4
Channel A Channel
Channel
Channel B A BA
BChannel
Channel Channel B Channel
Channel
Channel BA A
A B Channel
Channel AChannel
Channel
Channel B AB A
B Channel
Channel Channel
Channel A
Channel
hannel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B
Channel B BB
Channel
Channel Channel B BB
Channel
Channel
Channel
annel B Channel B
ZB Channel
Z ZB Channel Z Channel
Channel Z Z
Channel
Channel
Channel Channel
Channel B ChannelChannel
B Channel
B B
Channel BChannel
Channel Z BZ B
Z Channel
Channel Channel
Channel B
Channel
hannel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z
Channel Z ZZ
Channel
Channel Channel Z ZZ
Channel
Channel
Channel
annel Z Channel Z
Channel Channel
Z Channel
Z Z ChannelChannel
Z Channel
Z Z ChannelChannel
Z Channel
Z Z Channel Z
Figure 9: Quadrature A and B with inverted Figure 10: Quadrature A and B with ungated Figure 11: Quadrature A and B with ungated Figure 12: Quadrature A and B with 180°
180° Index gated to B inverted Index centered on A between 360° Index centered on A low between 360° and Index gated to B low
and 180° 180°
R3R3
R3 R3R3
R3 R5R4R4
R4
R5
R5 R5R5
R5
R4R4R4 Channel A AA
Channel
Channel
Channel R6 Channel A AA
Channel
Channel R7
Channel Channel A A
A Channel ChannelChannel A A
A Channel Channel A
Channel B BB
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel Channel B B
B Channel ChannelChannel B B
B Channel Channel B
Channel Z ZZ
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel Channel Z Z
Z Channel ChannelChannel Z Z
Z Channel Channel Z
Figure 13: Quadrature A and B with 90° Figure 14: Quadrature A and B with ungated Figure 15: Quadrature A and B with inverted Figure 16: Quadrature A and B with inverted
Index gated to A low and B low Index centered on A low between 360° and 180° Index gated to A low 180° Index gated to B low
180°
R6 R6 R6
R7R6
R6 R7R8
R8 R7
R7 R8R8
R8
R6 R7 R7
Channel Channel A A
R8 Channel A AA
Channel
Channel
Channel
ChannelChannel A A
Channel A AA
Channel
Channel
A Channel A Channel
Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B
Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z
R7R7 R8R8
K KK D KDKD DD3
D
D3D3 D3
D3
Channel
Channel A A
KKK Channel
Channel A A
D DD Channel
Channel A A
D3D3D3
ChannelChannel A A
A Channel
Channel
ChannelChannel
A A
Channel
A A
A Channel
Channel
ChannelChannel
A A
Channel
A A
A Channel
A Channel
ChannelChannel A A A Channel
ChannelChannel A A
Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel
Channel B B Channel B B
Channel Channel B B
Channel
ChannelChannel B B
B Channel
B Channel
ChannelChannel B B B Channel
ChannelChannel B B
Channel
Channel Z Z Channel
Channel Z Z Channel Z Z
Channel
Channel
Channel Z Z
ChannelChannel Z Z
Z Channel
Z Channel
ChannelChannel Z Z Z Channel
ChannelChannel Z Z
Figure 17: Quadrature A and B with inverted Figure 18: Quadrature A and B with ungated Figure 19: Reverse Quadrature A and B Figure 20: Reverse Quadrature A and B with
90° Index gated to A low and B low inverted Index centered on A low between 360° 180° Index gated to B low
and 180°
D3 D5D5
D5 D7D5
D5
D7
D7 D7
D7
D2D2
D2 D2
D2
Channel A D5D5D5 Channel A D7D7D7 ChannelChannelD2D2D2
A A
A Channel
Channel A A
Channel
ChannelChannel A A
A Channel
Channel
ChannelChannel
A A
Channel
A A
A Channel
A Channel
ChannelChannel A A
Channel B B
Channel Channel B B
Channel
Channel B Channel B ChannelChannel B B
B Channel
B Channel
ChannelChannel B B
Channel Z Z
Channel Channel Z Z
Channel
Channel Z Channel Z ChannelChannel Z Z
Z Channel
Z Channel
ChannelChannel Z Z
Figure 21: Reverse Quadrature A and B with Figure 22: Reverse Quadrature A and B with Figure 23: Reverse Quadrature A and B with Figure 24: Reverse Quadrature A and B with
90° Index gated to A low and B low inverted 180° Index gated to B low inverted 90° Index gated to A low and B low 180° Index gated to A low
D4
D4 D8D6
D6
D8 D8
D8
Channel A
D2
D4D4D4 Channel A
D4D4
D4
D6D6D6 ChannelChannel
D6D6
A A
A Channel
D6
D8D8D8
Channel
ChannelChannel
A A
Channel
A A
A Channel
DD8 Channel A A
Channel
ChannelChannel A A
A Channel
A Channel
ChannelChannel A A Channel A
A Channel
ChannelChannel A A
Channel B B
Channel
Channel B B
Channel
Channel B Channel B ChannelChannel B B
B Channel
ChannelChannel B B
B Channel
B Channel
ChannelChannel B B Channel B
B Channel
ChannelChannel B B
Channel Z Z
Channel
Channel Z Z
Channel
Channel Z ChannelChannel Z Z
Z Channel
Channel Z ChannelChannel Z Z
Z Channel
Z Channel
ChannelChannel Z Z Channel Z
Z Channel
ChannelChannel Z Z
Figure 25: Reverse Quadrature A and B with Figure 26: Reverse Quadrature A and B with Figure 27: Reverse Quadrature A and B with Figure 28: Reverse Quadrature A and B with
ungated Index centered on B low between inverted 180° Index gated to A low ungated and inverted Index centered on B low ungated Index centered on B low between
360° and 180° between 360° and 180° 360° and 180°
D8
Channel A Channel A
Channel B Channel B Call Sales & Customer Service at 800-366-5412

EPC is open for business from
Channel Z 8:00
Channel Z am to 7:30 pm Eastern Time/ 5:00 am to 4:30 pm Pacific Time

O r d e r i n g / T e ch n i c a l S u p p o r t
Lead Time Company has distributors across the United States and Canada.
Call 800-366-5412 and ask a Customer Service Representative for
Standard lead time is 4 to 6 business days. Expedite Service is
a distributor in your area.
available upon request. Accessories are generally in stock and
available for quick delivery. Contact Customer Service to confirm Technical Support
lead times. Single-piece orders for many of our products can ship
the next business day. Contact Customer Service for details. Our Technical Support professionals are available to assist you in
your application needs – whether it’s selecting the right encoder for
Expedited Service your application, troubleshooting a new installation, or connecting
your new encoder to your motion control system.
Express and expedite services are available for most product
configurations should you need a product faster than the standard Encoder Products Company understands the importance of
lead times allows. Contact Customer Service for details. time when you have a machine down. Through our free Cross
Reference and Retrofit Service, and thanks to a thorough library
Telephone Orders of specifications and dimensional information for a wide range
All telephone orders must be confirmed by mail or fax. Please of competitive encoders, EPC offers expert assistance for the
be sure the order is clearly marked “confirmation”. Please check cross-referencing and/or retrofit replacement of most domestic
your purchase order against the acknowledgment that Encoder and foreign optical rotary encoders. In addition, serviceable
Products Company faxes to you. To ensure accuracy, a Customer replacements can often be found for encoders that use other
Service Representative will check your confirmation against your technologies. As a final service, for those hard to find units, EPC
order. can often suggest an alternative approach that will get you back
up and running. We have provided an Expert Cross-Reference
Change Orders Service page on our website. It provides you with part numbers of
competitors' encoders, and compares them with EPC encoders,
To change an order, ask for a Customer Service Representative.
so that you can begin the cross-referencing process.
For faster service, either have your purchase order number or
Encoder Products Company’s sales order number available. Each Accu-Coder™ manufactured by Encoder Products Company
Service charges are assessed for some changes, including order is backed by our industry-leading three--year warranty. If you
cancellations. Contact Customer Service to determine applicable experience a problem, call our trained professionals. We can often
charges. troubleshoot a problem over the phone and determine if a repair
is needed. If it’s necessary to return the encoder for repair, our
Orders will be shipped out by UPS or Federal Express. All
technicians will perform a complete evaluation and recommend
shipments are F.O.B. factory. If you are a new OEM account or
a course of action. In an emergency situation our technicians
have a new OEM application, consignment or evaluation units
can often have your evaluation and repair completed, and ready
may be available for up to 60 days. Contact Customer Service for
for return shipment, within a matter of hours after receiving your
complete details.
encoder.
Part Numbering If your application calls for a solution that cannot be solved using
Encoder part numbers are found on the model datasheet at off-the-shelf-products, EPC’s Custom Design Service may be just
encoder.com. Use the appropriate Ordering Guide for your what you need. Call Customer Service to put our expertise to work
particular model. It is important to specify the complete part for you.
number. If you are reordering, the serial number of the unit being
replaced will help speed the ordering process. Ordering with
incomplete information may delay product delivery. In addition,
Encoder Products Company cannot assume responsibility for
errors when a part number is incomplete. If you need help creating
a part number, contact Customer Service. Encoder Products

Warranty/Returns/Repairs
Warranty Policy: OF SUITABILITY, COMPATIBILITY OR PERFORMANCE OF ANY

SOFTWARE PROVIDED TO CLIENT AND MAY AT ITS OPTION
Products manufactured by Encoder Products Company Inc. (EPC)
REPLACE OR REPAIR ANY DEFECTIVE SOFTWARE. EPC
are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship and
RESERVES THE RIGHT TO UPDATE, REVISE AND AMEND
are warranted to meet the performance specifications as listed in
ALL SOFTWARE AND TECHNICAL DATA OR CONTENT AT
the current catalog and/or data sheet for the specific product being
ANY TIME. EPC SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY OF ANY KIND OR
warranted. This warranty applies to all standard catalog product
NATURE FOR ANY TECHNICAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS IN
configurations, with the exception of units with a rated operating
ANY SOFTWARE OR TECHNICAL DATA.
temperature exceeding 85° C, for three (3) years following the
date of shipment. For units with a rated operating temperature
exceeding 85° C, the warranty period shall be two (2) years Return Policy
following the date of shipment. During that period, EPC will, at its Only products currently stocked by EPC may be returned for
sole option, repair or replace, at no cost to the customer, products restocking. Products that have been manufactured or configured to
that prove to be defective, provided the defect or failure is not customer specifications are not stocked and may not be returned.
due to misuse or abuse of the product. Any unauthorized attempt Returned products are subject to a restocking fee of $25 or 25%
to repair the product(s) by the customer, or any unauthorized of the purchase price, whichever is greater, and must be returned
modifications by the customer, can, at EPC’s sole option, cause within 30 days of the date shipped from EPC.
this warranty to become null and void. In addition, this warranty
does not apply to products that have been subjected to abuse or All products being returned must be 100% complete and must be
operated in environments that exceed their design specifications. packaged in ORIGINAL PACKAGING. All packaging materials,
The customer is responsible for shipment of the defective product manuals, other accessories and documentation must be included
to the EPC factory. Any warranty service (consisting of time, in the original packaging. In the event that a return shipment
travel, and expenses related to such services) performed other received by us is improperly packaged, altered, or physically
than at EPC’s factory, shall be at the customer’s expense. damaged, items sent for return consideration will be denied, and
EPC's return policy will not be honored. All items will be inspected
and tested upon receipt.
Limitations:
EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE STATED IN THIS WARRANTY A Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number is required for
POLICY, THERE IS NO OTHER WARRANTY, GUARANTEE, any item returned for credit. RMA numbers may be obtained by
OR REPRESENTATION, WRITTEN OR ORAL, WHETHER contacting Customer Service in advance. RMA numbers will be
EXPRESSED BY DESCRIPTION, DRAWING, MODEL issued to original purchaser only.
OR SAMPLE, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF Repair Services
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR Each Accu-Coder™ manufactured by Encoder Products Company
PURPOSE. EPC SHALL, IN NO CASE, BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, is backed by our industry-leading three year warranty. If you
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSSES experience a problem, call our trained professionals. We can often
OR DAMAGES, OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR troubleshoot a problem over the phone and determine if a repair
NATURE WHATSOEVER. IN ANY EVENT, ANY LIABIITY SHALL is needed. If it's necessary to return the encoder for repair, our
BE LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR PURCHASE technicians will perform a complete evaluation and recommend
PRICE REFUND, AT THE SOLE OPTION OF EPC, ONLY AFTER a course of action. In an emergency situation, our technicians
THE RETURN OF SUCH GOODS WITH PRIOR WRITTEN can often have your evaluation and repair completed, and ready
CONSENT OF EPC IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RETURN for return shipment, within a matter of hours after receiving your
POLICY AND WITH ALL SHIPPING CHARGES PREPAID. encoder.
SOFTWARE PRODUCTS ARE SUPPLIED TO CUSTOMER
SUBJECT TO CUSTOMERS ACCEPTANCE OF ALL
APPLICABLE SOFTWARE LICENSES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED
HEREIN, EPC MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION

Sh a f t L o a d i n g a n d S e a l i n g
v s . B e a r i n g L i f e E x p e ct a n c y
The mechanical life of an encoder is mainly determined by the life of the unit’s bearings.
Several factors affect bearing life, including shaft loading, heat, ingress, and rotational speed.
Shaft Loading
Shaft loading is likely the top cause of premature bearing failure. There are two types of loading
to consider: radial and axial.
• Radial loading is the perpendicular force applied to the shaft. Common causes of radial
loading include misalignment of the shaft when mounted or use of items such as pulley
and gears.
• Axial loading is the parallel force, or force applied along the same direction of the The Model 25SP Programmable Size 25 Shaft Encoder
shaft. As radial and/or axial loading increases, bearing life shortens. For this reason, Comes standard with dual bearings rated 80lbs axial
the minimum amount of shaft loading or misalignment should always be the goal when or radial. See page 88 for product details.
installing an encoder.
One important loading fact to remember: radial shaft loading increases as a linear function the further away from the bearing the
force is applied, much the same way a longer wrench gives you greater leverage against a stubborn bolt. It is always best practice to
place any unavoidable radial load as close to the bearings as possible.
Heat
Heat is another factor affecting bearing. Excessive temperatures can thin out the grease in the bearings. As the grease thins,
lubrication reduces and bearing wear increases.
Ingress
Ingress is the introduction of foreign matter into the bearings. Ingress of foreign matter, whether it is in liquid or solid form, is another
common cause of rapid bearing failure. Ball bearings are precision devices with critical internal clearances. Anything that disturbs
these clearances will shorten the life of the bearing, often quite drastically. For this reason, many encoders are available with shaft
seals that help guard the unit and bearings against the ingress of foreign substances.
All of the factors discussed above, combined with the speed of rotation, work together to determine bearing life. In a worst case
condition that combines high shaft loading, high heat, and excessive foreign matter with high rotational speeds, bearing life will likely
not be what would be expect to be within the range of typical. An encoder subjected to the same factors at lower rotational speeds
might never cause any concern with the life expectancy of the bearings.
To realize the maximum life potential of an encoder, take the necessary precautions when
installing the unit for proper shaft alignment, specify shaft seals (see page 137) when
needed to protect from foreign materials, and do not subject the unit to any unnecessary
heat.
If you still have questions about output, or anything else encoder-related, call EPC When you
call EPC, you talk to engineers and encoder experts who can answer your toughest encoder
A group of bearings questions. Call today to get the information you need.

IP R a t i n gS a n d S e a l i n g
options for epc encoders
Encoder Products Company uses the international standard IP Code, International Protection Marking, IEC standard 605291, for
specifying the sealing qualities of our units. The chart below explains what the different numerical designations define. Note that the
designations build on the previous ones; that is, an IP69K rating means that unit is also protected against everything that a unit rated
IP68, IP67, IP66, etc., is protected against.
EPC encoders offer the following sealing

designations on our encoders: 1st Digit Protection Against Solids 2nd Digit Protection Against Liquids
IP50: Unit is not entirely protected from ingress 0 No Protection 0 No Protection

of dust, but not enough dust can enter the unit
Protected against Protected against
to interfere with the unit’s function. Unit is not 1 50 mm solid objects greater 1 vertically falling
protected from water/moisture. than 50 mm drops of water
All IP designations of IP60 or higher are protected Protected against

Protected against
direct sprays of water
completely against dust ingress; i.e., “dust-tight”. 2 12 mm solid objects greater 2 up to 15° from the
than 12 mm
vertical
IP64: Dust-tight. Protected against water sprays Protected against
from all directions, with limited ingress permitted. Protected against
direct sprays of water
3 2.5 mm solid objects greater 3 up to 60° from the
than 2.5 mm
IP65: Dust-tight. Protected against low-pressure vertical
jets of water in all directions, with limited ingress Protected against
Protected against
permitted. 4 1 mm solid objects greater 4
water sprays from all
directions - limited
than 1 mm
ingress permitted
IP66: Dust-tight. Protected against strong-
pressure jets of water in all directions, with limited Protected against low
pressure jets of water
ingress permitted. 5 Dust protected 5 from all directions -
limited ingress permitted
IP67: Dust-tight. Protected against water Protected against strong
immersion between 15 cm and 1 m for a duration pressure jets of water
of 30 minutes. 6 Dust tight 6 from all directions -
limited ingress permitted
IP69K: Dust-tight. Protected against continuous Protected against water
immersion in water, and Protected against close- 7
immersion between
15 cm and 1 m for a
range, high pressure, high temperature spray
duration of 30 minutes
downs.
Protected against
For help determining which IP rating is right for the 8 continuous immersion
encoder in your application, contact our Technical in water
Services Department at 1-800-366-5412. Protected against close-
range, high pressure,
9K high temperature spray
downs
IP Ratings system
1
See http://www.iec.ch/ for testing standards.
Encoder Products Company WP-2013, Rev. B, 01/2018

Ce Option/cable considerations
T h e C E Ma rk o pti on
Please read carefully before choosing the CE Mark option.
The CE (Conformite European) mark indicates that a product complies with the European Union (EU) directives, and will affect you only if your system is to be sold in
Europe. CE does not describe the quality of a product, only that it complies with relevant EU directives and can be incorporated into systems sold in the European market.
Select encoder series manufactured by Encoder Products Company (EPC) are tested in accordance with harmonized standards to meet specific noise immunity and
emission requirements for an industrial environment, so as to comply with European directives. These tests ensure that, when you order CE certified encoders from
Encoder Products Company, they will operate without disturbing other equipment and without being disturbed themselves. Testing for CE certification is performed
on encoders with 6 feet of cable or standard body mount connectors. These testing limitations should be taken into consideration any time the CE mark is ordered in
combination with non-standard connectors or cable lengths in excess of 6 feet.
It should be understood that CE wiring techniques may cause severe ground loops if used with systems other than CE certified systems. Therefore, we strongly suggest
that the CE encoder option only be used with CE wired systems, or in situations where the user has a clear understanding of the CE requirements. For markets other than
the EU, Encoder Products Company maintains the strictest tests to ensure that non-CE units are shielded and grounded against electromagnetic phenomenon.
C a b l e Co nsi d eration s
When the electrical signals are generated by an EPC Accu-Coder™ encoder, they are electrically “clean” in the sense of being noise free. However, due to a number of
factors, these signals can be degraded by the time they reach their intended destination Environmental factors, such as radiated and induced electrical noise, can introduce
signal distortions. In addition, system design factors, such as cable capacitance (especially over long cable runs), impedance mismatches, poor cable quality, inadequate
shielding, poor grounding, and poor cable termination can all contribute to signal loss and distortion.
Cable Considerations
All cables have small amounts of capacitance between adjacent conductors. The amount of capacitance present is a direct function of the cable’s length. As capacitance
increases, it tends to round off the leading edge of the square wave signal, decreasing rise times. It can also distort the signal to the extent that errors are caused in
the system. Signal distortion is not usually significant for lengths less than 30 ft (or 1000 picofarads). To minimize the distortion, a low capacitance cable (less than 35
picofarads per foot) is recommended. Cable lengths should also be as short as possible.
If it is necessary for the cable length to exceed 30 feet, the use of a Line Driver output (output option HV or H5 in the Ordering Guide) along with differential type receiver
circuitry is strongly recommended. A low capacitance twisted-shielded pair cable should be used whenever using differential signals with cable lengths in excess of 30 ft.
Contact Customer Service for additional information. For high frequency applications (>200kHz), this type of cable may be needed for all lengths. EPC’s standard cable has
a braided and foil shield, but it is not twisted-shielded pair cable. Therefore, for high frequency applications, it is highly recommended that the user terminate the standard
cable just outside the encoder, and then run a low capacitance twisted-shielded pair cable the remaining distance.
Proper cable termination is also extremely important with differential signals. You can try a simple, non-terminated configuration first. However, keep in mind that signal
reflections may occur, resulting in severely distorted waveforms. For this type of signal distortion, parallel termination is recommended, which involves placing a resistor
across the differential lines at the far (receiver) end of the line. This resistor should be approximately equivalent to, or up to 10% greater than, the characteristic impedance
of the cable (Zo) [usually between 70-150 ohms]. This permits higher frequencies to be transmitted without significant distortion. Unfortunately, low valued resistors can
increase the power dissipated by the Line Driver, and reduce the output signal level. In this case, a capacitor should be placed in series with the resistor. The capacitor
value should be equal to the round trip delay of the cable divided by the cables Zo. Round trip delay is equal to the cable length multiplied by 1.7 ns/ft. (Note that the RC
time constant of this type of termination can reduce the system frequency response.)
A parallel termination resistor of a larger value than given above can often provide adequate reduction of signal reflections, and still maintain adequate frequency response
with low power dissipation. Experimentation in an application consisting of long cable runs will usually result in the best balance of all of these factors.
Grounding Considerations
A common cause of signal distortion in systems is poor grounding. The following tips will help eliminate distortions due to grounding:
1. It is extremely important that cable shields are connected to the receiver/instrument (counter, PLC, etc.) ground.
2. Always make sure the motor/machine for which the encoder is mounted is properly grounded.
3. The encoder case should also be grounded with the following conditions:
a. DO NOT ground the encoder case through both the motor/machine and the cable wiring.
b. DO NOT allow the encoder cable wiring to ground the motor/machine exclusively. High motor/machine ground currents could flow through the encoder wiring,
potentially damaging the encoder and associated equipment.

G LOSSARY
Absolute Encoder Differential Output
An absolute encoder is a device that provides a unique code for Differential output refers to the complementary outputs from a
each position, meaning that an absolute encoder provides both the feedback device when the signals are excited by a Line Driver.
indication that the position has changed and an indication of the Optimum performance is achieved when the receiver input
absolute position of the encoder. impedance is matched to the line receiver output and transmission
line.
Accuracy
Related to the incremental encoding disk. It is the difference between Disc
the theoretical position of one increment or bit edge and the actual Typically made of glass, metal or plastic with precise position
position of the edge. incremental lines. These lines are also known as increments. The
number of increments determines the resolution or CPR of the
Axial Loading encoder.
The force applied to a shaft end surface directed along the axis of
rotation. Encoder (shaft type)
Axial Load (maximum) An encoder is an electro-mechanical device that translates

mechanical motion (such as position, velocity, acceleration, speed,
Maximum axial load is the maximum force that may be applied to the direction) into electrical signals.
shaft without reducing the rated operating life or causing deviation
from the rated performance. Frequency Response
Bi-directional The maximum frequency in cycles per second.
Bi-directional refers to an encoder output code format from which Incremental Encoder
direction of travel can be determined. An incremental encoder is a device that provides a series of periodic
CE (Conformite European or European Compliance) signals due to mechanical motion. The number of successive cycles
corresponds to the resolvable mechanical increments of motion.
Sets essential electromagnetic compatibility, within the European
markets, for all electrical and electronic equipment that may interfere Index Reference
with other equipment, or that may be interfered by other equipment. The index is a separate output generated by a special track which
Channel produces a single cycle (or transition change) at a unique position
or positions such as center, home, zero, or reset point. Sometimes
Each channel is a unique incremental output of the encoder. referred to as a marker pulse.
Current Sinking Output IP Sealing
A logic form that requires current flow out of the input of the PLC or Encoder Products Company uses the international standard IP
counter and back to the output of the encoder. The encoder “sinks” Code, International Protection Marking, IEC standard 60529, for
this current, which is “sourced” by the input circuitry. This is the most specifying the sealing qualities of our units. The chart on page 137
common output circuit configuration. It uses an NPN output transistor explains what the different numerical designations define.
in the encoder.
Line Driver
Current Sourcing Output A circuit that provides error-free output pulses in electrically noisy
A logic form that requires current flow from the output of the encoder environments or over long transmission lines when used with a line
to the input of the counter or PLC. The encoder “sources” the current receiver.
and the input circuitry of the counter or PLC “sinks” this current.
This output circuit is seldom used. It usually requires a PNP output Negative Going Pulse
transistor in the encoder. When activated, the pulse goes low (logic 0) or in a negative direction.
Do not be confused by “negative going” meaning the pulse goes
Cycles Per Revolution negative in relationship to the signal common or reference level.
Called CPR. The number of increments on the disk of an incremental These statements are for “positive logic” only. All shaft encoders are
encoder. A one thousand increment encoder has a CPR of 1000. based on positive logic.

G LOSSARY
Open Collector Output Push-Pull Output
When the signal is taken directly off the collector element of the An output circuit that will both sink and source current.
output transistor, no Pull-Up is used. This is the electronic equivalent Quadrature
of a mechanical switch closure to common. The input device of the
PLC or counter is effectively placed in a series circuit that includes A dual output encoder used for bi-directional motion control. One
the output transistor and input device, which is often an opto-isolator channel leads the other by 90° electrical. By monitoring the phase
and the positive voltage supply. When the output transistor turns on, shift of both channel A and B, direction can be determined. Another
the circuit is completed and current will flow. The output signal cannot benefit of a quadrature encoder is count multiplication. With an
be observed unless the circuit is completed externally. appropriate counter, resolution can be multiplied up to four times.
For instance, using this technique an encoder with CPR of 1000 can
Positive Going Pulse provide a resolution of up to 4000 pulses per shaft revolution.
In the low or logic 0 state, it is in the quiescent state. It goes high Quadrature Error
or logic 1 when activated. This is a transition in the “positive going”
direction. Quadrature error is the phase error when the specified phase
relationship between two channels is nominally 90° electrical.
Potato
Radial Load
A tuberous root credited with generating as much fame for the state
of Idaho as their encoder prowess. The force applied at a specific point to the encoder shaft
perpendicular to the axis of rotation.
Pulses Per Revolution
Radial Load (maximum)
Number of pulses occurring in one revolution of the encoder shaft.
The maximum force that may be applied perpendicularly to the shaft
Pulse Polarity without reducing the rated operating life or causing deviation from the
Either positive going or negative going. A pulse has two logic states: rated performance.
activated or inactivated. These two states are opposite. When the Resolution
pulse is in its quiescent state (high or low), it is at one particular logic
level (1 or 0). When the pulse hits or is in the activated state, this The number of increments on the encoder disk. For incremental
logic level reverses itself for the duration of the pulse. encoders, resolution is defined as cycles per revolution.
Pulse Width Shaft Runout

The actual real time between the leading and trailing edge of a pulse. Amount of shaft movement while spinning.
The pulse width of the output signal of most encoders is a 50% duty
Single Channel
cycle on the clock outputs. Some models utilize a timed or “one shot”
output. This provides a constant pulse width irrespective of the pulse A single channel encoder produces one incremental output. They are
repetition rate or shaft speed. The factors to be considered when often used for tachometry applications.
determining pulse width specifications are: (1.) What is the minimum
Torque (running)
pulse width requirement of the counter or PLC? This information is
available in the counter or PLC specifications. (2.) Pulse repetition Running torque is the rotary force required to keep an encoder shaft
rate versus pulse width. With a constant pulse width, the individual turning. It is typically expressed in oz-in.
pulses become closer together as the pulse repetition rate or shaft
Torque, Starting (breakaway)
speed increases. At some point the pulses will overlap and the output
signal as a series of well defined pulses ceases. The pulse repetition Starting (breakaway) torque is the rotary force required to overcome
rate varies inversely with the pulse width and vice versa. static friction and cause the encoder shaft to begin rotating.
Pull-Up Resistor Unidirectional

When added inside the encoder between the positive voltage and An encoder that generates a single stream of pulse counts regardless
the collector element of the output transistor, it becomes a “pull-up” of direction of shaft rotation. Unidirectional encoders are not capable
circuit. This is also know as a pulse output. of determining direction of shaft rotation.

World Headquarters Europe Division Asia Division
Americas Division British Encoder Products Company Zhuhai Precision Encoder Co., LTD
Encoder Products Company Whitegate Industrial Estate, Unit 33 RM. 308C, 3/F
464276 Highway 95 Wrexham, Clwyd Zhongdian Building
PO Box 249 Wales LL138UG No. 1082 JiuZhou Ave.
Sagle, Idaho 83860 United Kingdom Ji Da District, Zhuhai City
USA Phone: +44.1978.262100 Guangdong Province, PRC
Fax: +44.1978.262101 519015
Phone: 800.366.5412
208.263.8541 Email: [email protected] Phone: +86.756.3363470
Fax: 208.263.0541 Web: encoder.co.uk Fax: +86.756.3363573
Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected]
Web: encoder.com Web: www.asiaencoder.com
ENCODER PRODUCTS COMPANY CATALOG, ISSUE NO. 8

© 2019 Encoder Products Company. All rights reserved.

Epc Full Product Catalog 2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Epc Full Product Catalog 2019

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Epc Full Product Catalog 2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Industrial Encoders &

50th Anniversary Edition

EPC’s world headquarters in Sagle, Idaho.

Quick Selection Guide................................................................2

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 1

Pg 10 Ø58 mm Pg 12 Ø58 mm Pg 14 Ø36 mm

Pg 16 Ø36 mm Pg 18 Ø58 mm Pg 20 Ø2.5”

2 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

Pg 40 Ø1.5” Pg 44 Ø1.5” Pg 46 Ø2.0”

Pg 50 Ø2.25” Pg 52 Ø2.5” Pg 54 Ø58 mm

Pg 58 Ø58 mm Pg 60 Ø4.3” Pg 62 Ø4.3”

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 3

Pg 70-77 Ø2.25” Pg 78 Ø1.5” Pg 82 Ø1.5”

4 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

Pg 100 Ø2.0” Pg 102 Ø58 mm Pg 104 Ø6.5”

Pg 106 Ø30 mm Pg 108 Ø30 mm Pg 112 Ø2.0”

Call Sales & Customer Service at 800-366-5412

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 5

How an incremental encoder square wave is produced:

6 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

Cut-to-Length is a very practical application of an encoder combined with simple

Spooling (sometimes referred to as Level Wind) is another application where

Electronics is just one industry that widely uses encoders in pick-and-place

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 7

Quick Selection Chart

8 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

Absolute encoders differ from incremental encoders

Absolute encoders provide position information for a

Advantages of EPC Absolute Encoders

When to Use Absolute Encoders

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 9

EPC Absolute Encoder – now with EtherCAT connectivity

Model A58HE Ordering Guide

10 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

Primary dimensions are in mm, secondary dimen-

Female M12x1, Connector M12x1, Female M12x1,

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 11

EPC Absolute Encoder – now with EtherCAT connectivity

Model A58SE Ordering Guide

MODEL SINGLE TURN COMM PROTOCOL OUTPUT CODE connector type3

12 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 13

MODEL SINGLE TURN COMM

BORE SIZE Input

MOUNTING CONNECTOR TYPE4

14 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 15

MODEL SINGLE TURN COMM

Notes: CONNECTOR TYPE4

16 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 17

Model A58HB Ordering Guide

MODEL BORE SIZE SINGLE TURN COMM Input Voltage

18 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 19

20 1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected]

Programmable CANopen Transmission Modes

1-800-366-5412 • www.encoder.com • [email protected] 21

Ø2.5" Not recommended for new applications.

925 B F XXXX CW S G/6 07 N PP N

Radial Shaft Load �� 35 lb max

Axial Shaft Load �� 40 lb max +

For linear applications, the Tru-

Gland Cable† 5-pin M12 8-pin M12

Humidity �� 98% RH non-condensing

See Waveform Diagram. Function Wire Color M12 M12

Input Current ��100 mA max (65 mA typical) with no output load